FULL- 2WAY REMOTE LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
-
Upload
khangminh22 -
Category
Documents
-
view
1 -
download
0
Transcript of FULL- 2WAY REMOTE LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
ECM3 032021-1ZF
Panasonic Corporation Life Solutions CompanyEnergy System Business Division, System Components Business Unit■ Head Office : 1048, Kadoma, Osaka 571-8686, Japan■ Telephone : +81-6-6906-0620 ■ Facsimile : +81-6-6904-4225
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Please contact
All Rights Reserved 2021 COPYRIGHT Panasonic Corporation
バック色彩(未)
2 0 2 1 -
FULL- 2WAYREMOTE LIGHTINGCONTROL SYSTEM
2021.2
1 2
1-3
G4
P3
off Delay
Group control allows you to control multiple lighting, turning on or off an entire section of the building with one switch. Pattern control allows you to match lighting to the time of day or to the work habits of people in the building.
The system employs a multiplexed transmission system using two non-polarized signal wires. This reduces the number of wires needed compared to conventional remote control wiring.
With the compact wireless address setting unit, switch functions like pattern and group control along with delayed timing can be programmed after wiring is complete. This speeds up the entire process-from design and estimate to ordering, delivery, and installation. The unit also allows you to quickly and easily change system functions.
There is no need to modify the wiring if lighting control has to be changed due to room layout alterations. This contributes to reduce overall costs.
Timers and sensors can control the system to provide light only when needed. This cuts energy use and costs. The ability to carry out centralized monitoring and control of lighting for up to 256 circuits makes it easy to cut unnecessary light use.
Group control
Turn off all lights in the sales department.
Turn on all lights inthe sales department.
Pattern control9:00 a.m.Work starts
Noon to 1:00 p.m.Lunch break
2:00 to 3:00 p.m.Natural light entersoffices from outside
6:00 p.m.
Turn onall lights
Turn offsome lights
Turn offlights nearwindows
Turn offall lights
Switch connection involves merelyconnecting two signal wires. The wires are non-polarized, so there'sless chance of installation errors.
All switches are networked via two±24V signal wires.
Wireless Programming Unit
Centralized monitoring and control
Control and monitor all lightingfrom a central location.
Functional display of lighting status
An LED displays lighting status.
On: Red LED is lit
Off: Green LED is lit
Timer and sensor controlled
Save-Energy, Cost Reduction
Flexibility Reduces Total Costs
Minimal Design, Minimum Maintenance
Simple Design andLabor-Saving Installation
(n) locations
Selector Switch Switch
Two wires
Two wires
Only two wires are required, regardless of thenumber of switches.General-purpose electrical wire can be used.
Distributionpanel board
Relay controlpanel
Load 1 Load 2 Load 3
Four functions in one unit
3. Pattern controlA push of the switch changes the lighting conditions to a pre-programmed pattern that matches the time of day or work habits.
1. Individual on/off controlSwitch controls individual lights. An LED shows whether the lighting is on or off.
2. Group controlA single switch controls multiple lights, turning them all on or off with one touch.
4. Timer controlThis can be programmed to automatically perform tasks like delay the turning on or off of the lights or to turn the lights on temporarily.
WRT5514-8Switch (4)(Infrared I/O)The wireless address setting unit
has an LCD that shows the settings made by theuser, like the exampleon the left.
24
68
24
68
75
31
75
31
Layout change
Daylight Sensor Ceiling UnitWRT3655-8
Mode
Initial
IND
DimmerLevel
Individual
Addresssetting
P/G setting
P
Off-delaySpecial
Confirm Switch InputT/U
RelayT/U
DimmerT/U
Low BatteryIndication
TimerON/OFFAddressNo.
ControlledLoad
7654321
G
5min
WRT9600-8
Changing of the lighting control parameters can be carried out easily using either the group or pattern switches of the selector switch unit or the Wireless Programming Unit.
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
WirelessProgramming Unit
Amenity Means User-Friendly
Simple
Amenity
Convenience
Flexibility
EcologyThe system interconnects devices like passive infrared ceiling units, Daylight Sensor Ceiling UnitTimer setting unit.
Simple, Ef�cient Lighting Control that Matches Your Needs
Multiplex TransmissionFULL-2WAY Remote Lighting Control System
Multiplex transmission FULL-2WAY remote control system uses two ±24 V signal wires for all the switches on a network, and controls lighting using pulse signals.
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
1 2
1-3
G4
P3
off Delay
Group control allows you to control multiple lighting, turning on or off an entire section of the building with one switch. Pattern control allows you to match lighting to the time of day or to the work habits of people in the building.
The system employs a multiplexed transmission system using two non-polarized signal wires. This reduces the number of wires needed compared to conventional remote control wiring.
With the compact wireless address setting unit, switch functions like pattern and group control along with delayed timing can be programmed after wiring is complete. This speeds up the entire process-from design and estimate to ordering, delivery, and installation. The unit also allows you to quickly and easily change system functions.
There is no need to modify the wiring if lighting control has to be changed due to room layout alterations. This contributes to reduce overall costs.
Timers and sensors can control the system to provide light only when needed. This cuts energy use and costs. The ability to carry out centralized monitoring and control of lighting for up to 256 circuits makes it easy to cut unnecessary light use.
Group control
Turn off all lights in the sales department.
Turn on all lights inthe sales department.
Pattern control9:00 a.m.Work starts
Noon to 1:00 p.m.Lunch break
2:00 to 3:00 p.m.Natural light entersoffices from outside
6:00 p.m.
Turn onall lights
Turn offsome lights
Turn offlights nearwindows
Turn offall lights
Switch connection involves merelyconnecting two signal wires. The wires are non-polarized, so there'sless chance of installation errors.
All switches are networked via two±24V signal wires.
Wireless Programming Unit
Centralized monitoring and control
Control and monitor all lightingfrom a central location.
Functional display of lighting status
An LED displays lighting status.
On: Red LED is lit
Off: Green LED is lit
Timer and sensor controlled
Save-Energy, Cost Reduction
Flexibility Reduces Total Costs
Minimal Design, Minimum Maintenance
Simple Design andLabor-Saving Installation
(n) locations
Selector Switch Switch
Two wires
Two wires
Only two wires are required, regardless of thenumber of switches.General-purpose electrical wire can be used.
Distributionpanel board
Relay controlpanel
Load 1 Load 2 Load 3
Four functions in one unit
3. Pattern controlA push of the switch changes the lighting conditions to a pre-programmed pattern that matches the time of day or work habits.
1. Individual on/off controlSwitch controls individual lights. An LED shows whether the lighting is on or off.
2. Group controlA single switch controls multiple lights, turning them all on or off with one touch.
4. Timer controlThis can be programmed to automatically perform tasks like delay the turning on or off of the lights or to turn the lights on temporarily.
WRT5514-8Switch (4)(Infrared I/O)The wireless address setting unit
has an LCD that shows the settings made by theuser, like the exampleon the left.
24
68
24
68
75
31
75
31
Layout change
Daylight Sensor Ceiling UnitWRT3655-8
Mode
Initial
IND
DimmerLevel
Individual
Addresssetting
P/G setting
P
Off-delaySpecial
Confirm Switch InputT/U
RelayT/U
DimmerT/U
Low BatteryIndication
TimerON/OFFAddressNo.
ControlledLoad
7654321
G
5min
WRT9600-8
Changing of the lighting control parameters can be carried out easily using either the group or pattern switches of the selector switch unit or the Wireless Programming Unit.
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
Group
WirelessProgramming Unit
Amenity Means User-Friendly
Simple
Amenity
Convenience
Flexibility
EcologyThe system interconnects devices like passive infrared ceiling units, Daylight Sensor Ceiling UnitTimer setting unit.
Simple, Ef�cient Lighting Control that Matches Your Needs
Multiplex TransmissionFULL-2WAY Remote Lighting Control System
Multiplex transmission FULL-2WAY remote control system uses two ±24 V signal wires for all the switches on a network, and controls lighting using pulse signals.
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
The difference in switching methods
FULL-2WAY remote control methodThere are just two 24V signal wires to the centralized control switch section.
Wires going to the switch can be housed in a thinconduit.
Commonwiring
Direct Control
Common wiring methodA total of 9 power lines are needed to the centralized controlswitch section.
This requires a thick conduit which the wires going to theswitch.
Total number of power lines: 8 plus 1
Two 24Vsignal wires
FULL-2WAY remote control wiring is suitable for any medium- and large-scale projects
Common wiring is suitable only for small-scale projects
The remote control relay is located between the load and the power source. The switch acts as a signal transmitter, sending commands to the relay to turn the power on and off.
The switch is located between the load and the power source, so it can directly turn the power on and off.
Common wiring FULL-2WAY remote control wiring
This diagram illustrates the difference in systems.Compare an application of centralized monitoring and control of a load of eight circuits.
Load 1Load 2
Load 3Load 4
Load 5Load 6
Load 7Load 8 Centralized monitor and control switch
(selector switch)
Ry1Ry3
Ry2Ry4
Ry5Ry7
Ry6Ry8
CPUTr
1
3
5
2
NS
1P20A
4
6
Lightingfixtures
Distribution panel
Two 24V signal wires
NS
1P20A
Distribution panel
1
2
3
4
7
8
Lightingfixtures
power lines
6
5
Multiplex transmission FULL-2WAY wiring is designed differently than common wiring methods. Commands are signaled from remote locations and lighting is controlled using two ±24V non-polarized wires, so installation labor costs decrease despite the increasing of building size.
Remote Control
The switch controls lighting by selecting one of the remote control relays. Power on and off commands are given by transmitting signals via the signal wires to a remote control relay at a preset location.
Multiplex transmissionFULL-2WAY control
…
AC24V
Switch T/U
2-wire multiplex transmission technology
2-wire multiplex transmission technology helps to simplify lighting control system.
What is multiple transmission? Load addressThe system transmits signals via two wires to circuits which are to be switched on and off. With FULL-2WAY multiple transmission, load addresses comprised of channel and load numbers are set up in advance, and the signal is transmitted to the designated addresses that correspond to remote controlled HID relays when switches are operated.
Load address for switches and T/Us need to be matched according to the load addressed.
Load address
Inside Relay control panel
Load address #15-2
Load address
Load Channel
Load Channel
Load numbers
Load numbers
Set the Load addresson the switches
transmission Unit RelaysGenerates the current pulse to the relay
Receives the current pulse andcloses the contact
Receives the signal from switchsent T/U the signal
Load Channel Load numbers
FULL-2WAY signal wire
FULL-2WAY signal wire
FULL-2WAY signal wire
Up to 256 circuits per one transmission unit
Up to 4 relay per one T/U ON/OFF
ON/OFF
With multiple transmission, the signal is transmitted by pulse signals
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
FULL-2WAYremote control
Pulse signal waveform
Unique trapezoidal waveformgenerates very little noise.
The rectangular waveformis a source of noise
Conventionalmultiplextransmission
What is a pulse signal? Reduced noise level with the special trapezoidal waveform for the pulse signal
The number of signals is limited only by the number of different possible arrangements of 0s and 1s, thus making it possible to handle many signal destinations (circuits to be switched on and off).Pulse signals are transmitted at an interval of 0.015 second for each Terminal Unit, so there is no chance of signal interference in the two signal wires.
FULL-2WAY remote control has the cut-in method of high-speed control response and signal indication
In addition to "CYCLIC TIME SHARING MULTIPLE TRANSMISSION METHOD", a new technology called the "CUT-IN SIGNAL CIRCUIT" can control relays at high speed and indicate on the ON/OFF status.
start mode flag address control
Basic transmission formatcheck sum supervise
signalwaveform
cut-in signal 100 1 1 000
dummy dummy cut-in controldummy
CYCLIC TIME DIVISONMULTIPLEX TRANSMISSIONA
pp
end
ixIn
stal
lati
on
Addi
tiona
l Fun
ctio
nsA
dd
ress
Set
tin
gD
esig
nP
rod
uct
sB
asic
Fu
nct
ion
sS
yste
m O
utl
ine
3
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
4
The Bigger the Building, the More Labor-saving the Installation.The Key is Our Special Switching System. System Principle
The difference in switching methods
FULL-2WAY remote control methodThere are just two 24V signal wires to the centralized control switch section.
Wires going to the switch can be housed in a thinconduit.
Commonwiring
Direct Control
Common wiring methodA total of 9 power lines are needed to the centralized controlswitch section.
This requires a thick conduit which the wires going to theswitch.
Total number of power lines: 8 plus 1
Two 24Vsignal wires
FULL-2WAY remote control wiring is suitable for any medium- and large-scale projects
Common wiring is suitable only for small-scale projects
The remote control relay is located between the load and the power source. The switch acts as a signal transmitter, sending commands to the relay to turn the power on and off.
The switch is located between the load and the power source, so it can directly turn the power on and off.
Common wiring FULL-2WAY remote control wiring
This diagram illustrates the difference in systems.Compare an application of centralized monitoring and control of a load of eight circuits.
Load 1Load 2
Load 3Load 4
Load 5Load 6
Load 7Load 8 Centralized monitor and control switch
(selector switch)
Ry1Ry3
Ry2Ry4
Ry5Ry7
Ry6Ry8
CPUTr
1
3
5
2
NS
1P20A
4
6
Lightingfixtures
Distribution panel
Two 24V signal wires
NS
1P20A
Distribution panel
1
2
3
4
7
8
Lightingfixtures
power lines
6
5
Multiplex transmission FULL-2WAY wiring is designed differently than common wiring methods. Commands are signaled from remote locations and lighting is controlled using two ±24V non-polarized wires, so installation labor costs decrease despite the increasing of building size.
Remote Control
The switch controls lighting by selecting one of the remote control relays. Power on and off commands are given by transmitting signals via the signal wires to a remote control relay at a preset location.
Multiplex transmissionFULL-2WAY control
…
AC24V
Switch T/U
2-wire multiplex transmission technology
2-wire multiplex transmission technology helps to simplify lighting control system.
What is multiple transmission? Load addressThe system transmits signals via two wires to circuits which are to be switched on and off. With FULL-2WAY multiple transmission, load addresses comprised of channel and load numbers are set up in advance, and the signal is transmitted to the designated addresses that correspond to remote controlled HID relays when switches are operated.
Load address for switches and T/Us need to be matched according to the load addressed.
Load address
Inside Relay control panel
Load address #15-2
Load address
Load Channel
Load Channel
Load numbers
Load numbers
Set the Load addresson the switches
transmission Unit RelaysGenerates the current pulse to the relay
Receives the current pulse andcloses the contact
Receives the signal from switchsent T/U the signal
Load Channel Load numbers
FULL-2WAY signal wire
FULL-2WAY signal wire
FULL-2WAY signal wire
Up to 256 circuits per one transmission unit
Up to 4 relay per one T/U ON/OFF
ON/OFF
With multiple transmission, the signal is transmitted by pulse signals
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
FULL-2WAYremote control
Pulse signal waveform
Unique trapezoidal waveformgenerates very little noise.
The rectangular waveformis a source of noise
Conventionalmultiplextransmission
What is a pulse signal? Reduced noise level with the special trapezoidal waveform for the pulse signal
The number of signals is limited only by the number of different possible arrangements of 0s and 1s, thus making it possible to handle many signal destinations (circuits to be switched on and off).Pulse signals are transmitted at an interval of 0.015 second for each Terminal Unit, so there is no chance of signal interference in the two signal wires.
FULL-2WAY remote control has the cut-in method of high-speed control response and signal indication
In addition to "CYCLIC TIME SHARING MULTIPLE TRANSMISSION METHOD", a new technology called the "CUT-IN SIGNAL CIRCUIT" can control relays at high speed and indicate on the ON/OFF status.
start mode flag address control
Basic transmission formatcheck sum supervise
signalwaveform
cut-in signal 100 1 1 000
dummy dummy cut-in controldummy
CYCLIC TIME DIVISONMULTIPLEX TRANSMISSIONA
pp
end
ixIn
stal
lati
on
Addi
tiona
l Fun
ctio
nsA
dd
ress
Set
tin
gD
esig
nP
rod
uct
sB
asic
Fu
nct
ion
sS
yste
m O
utl
ine
3
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
4
The Bigger the Building, the More Labor-saving the Installation.The Key is Our Special Switching System. System Principle
5 6
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
100%
70%
5:00 7:00 9:00 17:00 21:00 23:00
30%
(First train) (Early rush hour) (Late rush hour) (Last train)
Example of control lights using the Program Timer Unit
Program timer unit allows scheduled lighting control accordingto the business hours from opening to closing time.
Basic control
Basic control
Option control
Option control
Uses
Effect
•Control room•Emergency center
•Reduced labor for control and management
•Lights always get turned off automatically
Uses•Locker room•Coffee room•Restroom
Uses
Effect
•Control room•Emergency center
•Reduced labor for control and management
•Lights always get turned off automatically
Effect•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management
•Energy saving lighting control
Uses
Effect
•Factories•Warehouses•Cafeterias•Conference room •Common areas-Corridors, lobby/hall
•No re-wiring needed for lighting layout changes
Uses•Outside light•Parking lots•Elevator areas
Effect•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management
Option control
Applied in the factory
Centralized monitoring and control Network monitoring and control
Group control
Timer control
Passive infrared sensor control
Passive infrared sensor
Program Timer Unit
Lights automatically turn on upon entering a room.Lights automatically turn off after a set time (Approx. 10 sec. to 30 min.)after the person leaves the room.
Lights automatically turn on upon entering a room
Off-delay time may be set within a range from 10 sec. to 30 min.
Centralized monitoring and control of the lighting in the factory and offices can be carried out from the superintendent's office.
Centralized monitoring and control of the lighting in the factory and offices can be carried out from the superintendent's office.
Lighting in entire sections of the factory or warehouse can be turned on or off all at once.
The timer can be set so lights operate based on people's movements throughout the day, from arriving at work in the morning to lunch breaks to late night shift changes.
Interface unit allows the system to be controlled by a mobile app or a computer program.
Lights automatically turn on and off as people enter and leaveplaces like locker rooms.
Conference room
Parking lots
Corridor
Entrance
Outside lightControl & monitor
Each section
Basic control Basic control
•Office•Conference room
•Building entrance•Lobby•Restrooms•Elevator area•Common areas: corridor, stairwells
•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management
•No re-wiring needed for lighting layout changes
Uses
Effect
Uses
Effect
•Locker rooms•Coffee rooms•Restrooms
•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management
•Energy saving lighting control
Uses
Effect
•Office•Conference room
•Adjust lighting as needed
•Total control by wireless switch
Uses
Effect
Option control Option control
Option control
Uses
Effect
•Offices or conference rooms•Common areas: restrooms, corridors, hall, stairwells
•Energy saving•Lights always get turned off automatically
•Turn off all lights together at end of day•Optimum lighting level for audio-visual presentation rooms
Program Timer Unit
Entrance
Corridor
Office
Outside light
Lights automatically turn on upon entering a room.Lights automatically turn off after a set time (Approx. 10 sec. to 30 min.)after the person leaves the room."
Lights automatically turn on upon entering a room.
Off-delay time may be set within a range from 10 sec. to 30 min.
Applied in the office building
Group control
Timer control Passive infrared sensor control
Wireless control
Passive infrared sensor
Wireless remote controller allows manual control in any situation.
Pattern control
Up to 256 circuits per system can be handled from a central control room
Turn on and off all lights in an entire section of a building
Lights are turned on or off automatically at a preset time to match a company's daily schedule.
Lights automatically turn on and off as people enter and leaveplaces like locker rooms.
Remote controller allows you to manually adjust lights and equipment during meetings and conferences.
The system can be programmed to match work schedules or habits, allowing you, for example, to turn down office lighting during lunch hour with a push of a switch.
Conference room
Corridor
Outside light
Office
Entrance
Control & monitor Each section
Office Building Examples of Building Applications Factory Examples of Building Applications
5 6
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
100%
70%
5:00 7:00 9:00 17:00 21:00 23:00
30%
(First train) (Early rush hour) (Late rush hour) (Last train)
Example of control lights using the Program Timer Unit
Program timer unit allows scheduled lighting control accordingto the business hours from opening to closing time.
Basic control
Basic control
Option control
Option control
Uses
Effect
•Control room•Emergency center
•Reduced labor for control and management
•Lights always get turned off automatically
Uses•Locker room•Coffee room•Restroom
Uses
Effect
•Control room•Emergency center
•Reduced labor for control and management
•Lights always get turned off automatically
Effect•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management
•Energy saving lighting control
Uses
Effect
•Factories•Warehouses•Cafeterias•Conference room •Common areas-Corridors, lobby/hall
•No re-wiring needed for lighting layout changes
Uses•Outside light•Parking lots•Elevator areas
Effect•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management
Option control
Applied in the factory
Centralized monitoring and control Network monitoring and control
Group control
Timer control
Passive infrared sensor control
Passive infrared sensor
Program Timer Unit
Lights automatically turn on upon entering a room.Lights automatically turn off after a set time (Approx. 10 sec. to 30 min.)after the person leaves the room.
Lights automatically turn on upon entering a room
Off-delay time may be set within a range from 10 sec. to 30 min.
Centralized monitoring and control of the lighting in the factory and offices can be carried out from the superintendent's office.
Centralized monitoring and control of the lighting in the factory and offices can be carried out from the superintendent's office.
Lighting in entire sections of the factory or warehouse can be turned on or off all at once.
The timer can be set so lights operate based on people's movements throughout the day, from arriving at work in the morning to lunch breaks to late night shift changes.
Interface unit allows the system to be controlled by a mobile app or a computer program.
Lights automatically turn on and off as people enter and leaveplaces like locker rooms.
Conference room
Parking lots
Corridor
Entrance
Outside lightControl & monitor
Each section
Basic control Basic control
•Office•Conference room
•Building entrance•Lobby•Restrooms•Elevator area•Common areas: corridor, stairwells
•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management
•No re-wiring needed for lighting layout changes
Uses
Effect
Uses
Effect
•Locker rooms•Coffee rooms•Restrooms
•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management
•Energy saving lighting control
Uses
Effect
•Office•Conference room
•Adjust lighting as needed
•Total control by wireless switch
Uses
Effect
Option control Option control
Option control
Uses
Effect
•Offices or conference rooms•Common areas: restrooms, corridors, hall, stairwells
•Energy saving•Lights always get turned off automatically
•Turn off all lights together at end of day•Optimum lighting level for audio-visual presentation rooms
Program Timer Unit
Entrance
Corridor
Office
Outside light
Lights automatically turn on upon entering a room.Lights automatically turn off after a set time (Approx. 10 sec. to 30 min.)after the person leaves the room."
Lights automatically turn on upon entering a room.
Off-delay time may be set within a range from 10 sec. to 30 min.
Applied in the office building
Group control
Timer control Passive infrared sensor control
Wireless control
Passive infrared sensor
Wireless remote controller allows manual control in any situation.
Pattern control
Up to 256 circuits per system can be handled from a central control room
Turn on and off all lights in an entire section of a building
Lights are turned on or off automatically at a preset time to match a company's daily schedule.
Lights automatically turn on and off as people enter and leaveplaces like locker rooms.
Remote controller allows you to manually adjust lights and equipment during meetings and conferences.
The system can be programmed to match work schedules or habits, allowing you, for example, to turn down office lighting during lunch hour with a push of a switch.
Conference room
Corridor
Outside light
Office
Entrance
Control & monitor Each section
Office Building Examples of Building Applications Factory Examples of Building Applications
7 8
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
control room
Basic control
Option control Option control
Uses
Effect
Uses
Effect
Pattern control
Passive infrared sensor control Wireless control
Applied in the Hospital
Doctor's office
Ward
Outside light
Waiting room
Entrance
You get lighting control to match your exact needs. With just a touch of a button, you can either turn on/off all lights in one area of the building, or turn on/off individual lights as required.
Control patterns can be programmed to match specifictimes of the day or work routines.
The light of a room turns on automatically when a person enters a room.
Wireless control allows users to control lights from bed.
Bedridden patients can directly control the lighting
Doctor's can directly control the lighting
The light of a room turns on/off automatically when a person enters a room.
ON30%
OFF
Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit (Main unit)
Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit ( Auxiliary unit )
Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit(Auxiliary unit /
Wide Detection Area Type)
ON100%
OFF
ON30%
ON100%
•Doctor's office
•Reduced labor for control and management
•Locker rooms•Coffee rooms•Restrooms
Uses•Ward•Doctor's office•Conference room
•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management
•Easy lighting control
Effect•Easy lighting control
Detection area
Detection area
enter
turn ON 100% light after entering the area
turn ON light after entering the area
Lights automatically turn off after a set time (Approx. 10 sec. to 30 min.)after the person leaves the room.
Lights automatically dim light 70% after a set time (Approx. 10 sec. to 30 min.)after the person leaves the room.
leave
enter leave
Lights automatically turn off after a set time after the person leaves the room.
Lights automatically turn off after a set time after the person leaves the room.
Wireless Receiver
Usual condition:100% ON During a break : 50% ON While sleeping: OFF
Medical examination : 100% ON Explanation of examination results : 30% ON
After examination : OFF
Wireless Switch
ALL ON
Corridor
ON 50% ALL OFF
Control & monitor Each section
control room
Out side light
Basic control
Option control
Option control
Option control
Uses Effect
Uses Effect
Applied in the Gymnasium
Passive infrared sensor control
Timer control
Pattern control
Network monitoring and control
Outside light
Locker rooms
Parking lots
Corridor
EntranceControl & monitor
Each section
Lightings of arena and seats can be checked at a glance andcentrally controlled from a control room.
Lights automatically turn on upon entering a room.Lights automatically turn off after a set time (Approx. 10 sec. to 30 min.)after the person leaves the room."room Lights automatically turn on
upon entering a roomOff-delay time may be set within a range from 10 sec. to 30 min.
Program Timer Unit
Sunset (automatically ON)
ALL OFFALL ON Some ON
Sunset (ALL ON) Midnight(Some Off) Sunrise (ALL OFF)
Set time (automatically off)
ALL ON ON 50%
ON 50% ALL OFF
Sunrise (automatic OFF)
Passive infrared sensor
Lights automatically turn on and off as people enter and leaveplaces like locker rooms.
Interface unit allows the system to be controlled by a mobile app or a computer program.
The timer can be set so lights operate based on people's movements throughout the day, from arriving at work in the morning to lunch breaks to late night shift changes.
Single push of a switch creates ideal lightingenvironment according to user's needs.
Uses•Locker rooms•Warehouse•Restrooms
•Outside light•Parking lots•Elevator areas
•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management
•Banquet room•conference
•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management•Easy lighting control
Uses•Control room•Emergency centerEffect
•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management
•Energy saving lighting control
Effect•Reduced labor for control and management•Lights always get turned off automatically
Parking lots
Gymnasium & School Examples of Building Applications Hospital Examples of Building Applications
7 8
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
control room
Basic control
Option control Option control
Uses
Effect
Uses
Effect
Pattern control
Passive infrared sensor control Wireless control
Applied in the Hospital
Doctor's office
Ward
Outside light
Waiting room
Entrance
You get lighting control to match your exact needs. With just a touch of a button, you can either turn on/off all lights in one area of the building, or turn on/off individual lights as required.
Control patterns can be programmed to match specifictimes of the day or work routines.
The light of a room turns on automatically when a person enters a room.
Wireless control allows users to control lights from bed.
Bedridden patients can directly control the lighting
Doctor's can directly control the lighting
The light of a room turns on/off automatically when a person enters a room.
ON30%
OFF
Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit (Main unit)
Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit ( Auxiliary unit )
Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit(Auxiliary unit /
Wide Detection Area Type)
ON100%
OFF
ON30%
ON100%
•Doctor's office
•Reduced labor for control and management
•Locker rooms•Coffee rooms•Restrooms
Uses•Ward•Doctor's office•Conference room
•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management
•Easy lighting control
Effect•Easy lighting control
Detection area
Detection area
enter
turn ON 100% light after entering the area
turn ON light after entering the area
Lights automatically turn off after a set time (Approx. 10 sec. to 30 min.)after the person leaves the room.
Lights automatically dim light 70% after a set time (Approx. 10 sec. to 30 min.)after the person leaves the room.
leave
enter leave
Lights automatically turn off after a set time after the person leaves the room.
Lights automatically turn off after a set time after the person leaves the room.
Wireless Receiver
Usual condition:100% ON During a break : 50% ON While sleeping: OFF
Medical examination : 100% ON Explanation of examination results : 30% ON
After examination : OFF
Wireless Switch
ALL ON
Corridor
ON 50% ALL OFF
Control & monitor Each section
control room
Out side light
Basic control
Option control
Option control
Option control
Uses Effect
Uses Effect
Applied in the Gymnasium
Passive infrared sensor control
Timer control
Pattern control
Network monitoring and control
Outside light
Locker rooms
Parking lots
Corridor
EntranceControl & monitor
Each section
Lightings of arena and seats can be checked at a glance andcentrally controlled from a control room.
Lights automatically turn on upon entering a room.Lights automatically turn off after a set time (Approx. 10 sec. to 30 min.)after the person leaves the room."room Lights automatically turn on
upon entering a roomOff-delay time may be set within a range from 10 sec. to 30 min.
Program Timer Unit
Sunset (automatically ON)
ALL OFFALL ON Some ON
Sunset (ALL ON) Midnight(Some Off) Sunrise (ALL OFF)
Set time (automatically off)
ALL ON ON 50%
ON 50% ALL OFF
Sunrise (automatic OFF)
Passive infrared sensor
Lights automatically turn on and off as people enter and leaveplaces like locker rooms.
Interface unit allows the system to be controlled by a mobile app or a computer program.
The timer can be set so lights operate based on people's movements throughout the day, from arriving at work in the morning to lunch breaks to late night shift changes.
Single push of a switch creates ideal lightingenvironment according to user's needs.
Uses•Locker rooms•Warehouse•Restrooms
•Outside light•Parking lots•Elevator areas
•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management
•Banquet room•conference
•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management•Easy lighting control
Uses•Control room•Emergency centerEffect
•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management
•Energy saving lighting control
Effect•Reduced labor for control and management•Lights always get turned off automatically
Parking lots
Gymnasium & School Examples of Building Applications Hospital Examples of Building Applications
9 10
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Uses Effect
Option control
Option control
Option controlBasic control
Basic control
Basic control
Applied in the Station Building
Timer control
Network monitoring and control
Passive infrared sensor control
Passive infrared sensor
Daylight Sensor Entrance
Group control
Pattern control
Centralized monitoring and control of the lighting can be carried out from the superintendent's office.
Daylight SensorLights can be controlled according to the brightness of daylight from outside
100%
70%
5:00 7:00 9:00 17:00 21:00 23:00
30%
(First train) (Early rush hour) (Late rush hour) (Last train)
Example of control lights using the Program Timer Unit
Program timer unit allows scheduled lighting control accordingto the business hours from opening to closing time.
Interface unit allows the system to be controlled by a mobile app or a computer program.
Lights automatically turn on and off as people enter and leaveplaces like locker rooms.
Lights are turned on or off automatically at a preset time to match a daily schedule.
Lighting in entire sections can be turned on or off all at once.
Single push of a switch creates ideal lighting environment according to user's needs.
Corridor
Waiting lounge
Ticket office Office
Ticket office
Outside light
•Outside light•Parking lots•Elevator areas
•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management
Uses•Corridor•Platform
Effect•Wide area control•Reduced labor for control and management
Uses•Control room•Emergency center
Uses•Locker rooms•Coffee rooms•Restrooms
Effect•Reduced labor for control and management
•Lights always get turned off automatically
Uses Effect•Entrance•Elevated station
•Corridor•Rest room
•Energy savingReduced labor for control and management
Effect•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management
•Energy saving lighting control
Uses•Corridor•Waiting lounge •Ticket office
Effect•Energy saving•Creating an atmosphere ideal for different situations.
Program Timer Unit
Lights automatically turn on upon entering a room.Lights automatically turn off after a set time (Approx. 10 sec. to 30 min.)after the person leaves the room.
Lights automatically turn on upon entering a room.
Off-delay time may be set within a range from 10 sec. to 30 min.
Control & monitor Each section
Applied in the residence and hotelYou get lighting control to match your exact needs.
Parking lots
Banquet room
Outside light
Corridor
Entrance
Control & monitor Each section
Daytime
Evening Midnight
Fade out
Fade in
Fadeout
Morning
Midnight
Someoneinto
the past
turn ON 100% light after a set time
Banquet room
Sunset (ALL ON)
Sunset (automatically ON) Sunrise (automatic OFF)
Set time (automatically off)
Midnight(Some Off) Sunrise (ALL OFF)
Timer control and Dimmer control
Passive infrared sensor control and Dimmer control
Out side light ALL OFFALL ON Some ON
Wireless remote controller allows manual control in any situation.
Option control
Option control
Option control
Basic controlPassive infrared sensor controlIn addition to the timer control, Labor-savings and energy conservation are achieved using sensors
Timer controlThe timer can be set so lights operate based on people's movements throughout the day, from arriving at work in the morning to lunch breaks to late night shift changes.
Wireless controlRemote controller allows you to manually adjust lighting, motorized equipment during meetings and conferences.
Uses•Entrance•Corridor
Effect•Energy saving•Automatic management
Uses•Outside light•Parking lots•Elevator areas
Effect•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management
Uses•Banquet room•Conference room
Effect•Adjust lighting as needed•Total control by wireless switch
Pattern controlCreating an atmosphere ideal for different situations.
Uses•Banquet room•Conference room
Effect•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management•Easy lighting control
Program Timer Unit
Program Timer Unit
Passive infrared ceiling unitDimmer Unit
Dimmer Unit
Conference room OHP AV presentation
Station Building & Subway Examples of Building Applications Residence & Hotel Examples of Building Applications
9 10
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Uses Effect
Option control
Option control
Option controlBasic control
Basic control
Basic control
Applied in the Station Building
Timer control
Network monitoring and control
Passive infrared sensor control
Passive infrared sensor
Daylight Sensor Entrance
Group control
Pattern control
Centralized monitoring and control of the lighting can be carried out from the superintendent's office.
Daylight SensorLights can be controlled according to the brightness of daylight from outside
100%
70%
5:00 7:00 9:00 17:00 21:00 23:00
30%
(First train) (Early rush hour) (Late rush hour) (Last train)
Example of control lights using the Program Timer Unit
Program timer unit allows scheduled lighting control accordingto the business hours from opening to closing time.
Interface unit allows the system to be controlled by a mobile app or a computer program.
Lights automatically turn on and off as people enter and leaveplaces like locker rooms.
Lights are turned on or off automatically at a preset time to match a daily schedule.
Lighting in entire sections can be turned on or off all at once.
Single push of a switch creates ideal lighting environment according to user's needs.
Corridor
Waiting lounge
Ticket office Office
Ticket office
Outside light
•Outside light•Parking lots•Elevator areas
•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management
Uses•Corridor•Platform
Effect•Wide area control•Reduced labor for control and management
Uses•Control room•Emergency center
Uses•Locker rooms•Coffee rooms•Restrooms
Effect•Reduced labor for control and management
•Lights always get turned off automatically
Uses Effect•Entrance•Elevated station
•Corridor•Rest room
•Energy savingReduced labor for control and management
Effect•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management
•Energy saving lighting control
Uses•Corridor•Waiting lounge •Ticket office
Effect•Energy saving•Creating an atmosphere ideal for different situations.
Program Timer Unit
Lights automatically turn on upon entering a room.Lights automatically turn off after a set time (Approx. 10 sec. to 30 min.)after the person leaves the room.
Lights automatically turn on upon entering a room.
Off-delay time may be set within a range from 10 sec. to 30 min.
Control & monitor Each section
Applied in the residence and hotelYou get lighting control to match your exact needs.
Parking lots
Banquet room
Outside light
Corridor
Entrance
Control & monitor Each section
Daytime
Evening Midnight
Fade out
Fade in
Fadeout
Morning
Midnight
Someoneinto
the past
turn ON 100% light after a set time
Banquet room
Sunset (ALL ON)
Sunset (automatically ON) Sunrise (automatic OFF)
Set time (automatically off)
Midnight(Some Off) Sunrise (ALL OFF)
Timer control and Dimmer control
Passive infrared sensor control and Dimmer control
Out side light ALL OFFALL ON Some ON
Wireless remote controller allows manual control in any situation.
Option control
Option control
Option control
Basic controlPassive infrared sensor controlIn addition to the timer control, Labor-savings and energy conservation are achieved using sensors
Timer controlThe timer can be set so lights operate based on people's movements throughout the day, from arriving at work in the morning to lunch breaks to late night shift changes.
Wireless controlRemote controller allows you to manually adjust lighting, motorized equipment during meetings and conferences.
Uses•Entrance•Corridor
Effect•Energy saving•Automatic management
Uses•Outside light•Parking lots•Elevator areas
Effect•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management
Uses•Banquet room•Conference room
Effect•Adjust lighting as needed•Total control by wireless switch
Pattern controlCreating an atmosphere ideal for different situations.
Uses•Banquet room•Conference room
Effect•Energy saving•Reduced labor for control and management•Easy lighting control
Program Timer Unit
Program Timer Unit
Passive infrared ceiling unitDimmer Unit
Dimmer Unit
Conference room OHP AV presentation
Station Building & Subway Examples of Building Applications Residence & Hotel Examples of Building Applications
Circuit Design for Individual ControlIndividual control: Controls up to 256 circuits plus 16 dimmer circuits per system or per one transmission unit.Central monitor and control, and control from multiple locations for up to 256 circuits plus 16 dimmer circuits.
Design Tips for Circuit Divisions
Panel configuration1
Decide the load to be controlled by the FULL-2WAY remote control.
1. Install one transmission unit per system.2. Determine a minimum control area and count the number of relays required for circuits. One transmission unit can control up to 256
circuits.3. Check each load capacity per circuit, and for high power, specify 20A HID relays.
For low capacity loads (less than 6A), a T/U is available with a 6A, 10A relay unit. For details, see page 15.4. Install a relay control T/U unit for every four (4) 20A HID relays.
Relay control T/U units (4-Circuit), and T/U with a 6A, 10A-relay units (4-Circuit), up to a maximum of 64 can be connected per one transmission unit.
5. Install a transformer in each relay control panel to simplify wiring.
Selector switch configuration2Determine the same number of individual switches as the circuits required for centralized monitoring and control.
Local switches3Determine the individual switches required for local operation.
Caution: The FULL-2WAY remote lighting control system cannot be used in combination with other systems.Do not use remote control relays or remote control transmission systems from other manufacturers.
Notes on design• When using dimmer address setting switches, install an amplifier for approximately every 50 circuits. See page 18 for details.• When using the WRT2050-80 Transmission Unit, use the WR3913K-80 Amplifier.
WR6161K-8
0-1
0-3
0-2
0-4
WR6161K-8
WR3400-8 or WRT4014-8
0ch
•Transformer
WR2311-851
Make sure there is no duplication of Relay Control T/U load addresses. (Not available in US)
Powersource
Powersource
0-1
1-1
0-3
1-3
Ry1
Ry3
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
RedBlue
RedBlue
Ry2
Ry41
3
2
4
Ry5
Ry7
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
RedBlue
RedBlue
Ry6
Ry8
1
3
2
4
Ry1
Ry3
Ry2
Ry4
Ry5
Ry7
Ry6
Ry8
WR2311-851
Transformer
2ch
3ch
TransformerWRT2050-80Transmission Unit
Lightingfixtures Lighting fixtures
WR6161K-8
0ch
WR6161K-820A HID Relay (Single Pole)
WR3400-8Relay Control T/U (4-Circuit)(Dip switch setting type)
or
WRT4014-8Relay Control T/U (4-Circuit) (Infrared I/O) (Panel Use)
Load channel
Load number
Sign
al
24V AC
0-2
1-2
100-242V AC
220V AC
WRT5554K-8Switch (4) X 4 units
WRT5554K-8Switch (4)
Individual controlWRT5552K-8 Switch (2)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Matching of the load addresses of the switchesallows remote control from multiple locations.
FULL-2WAY signal lines
Selector switch Local switches
RelayControl T/U
Relay control panel L-2
1-2
3-3
WRT5502WK-8Switch (2)(COSMO Module)
20AHID Relay
•For individual control of 16 circuits
WR3913K-80Amplifier
20A HID Relay (Single Pole)
1-4
Signal White
WRT5554K-8Switch (4) X 2 units
0-10-20-30-4
1-11-21-31-4
1-11-21-31-4
2-12-22-32-4
3-13-23-33-4
2-12-22-32-4
3-13-23-33-4
•Only one (1) transmission unit is installedeven though there are three (3) separaterelay control panels.
• It is recommended that each relay controlpanel be equipped with one (1) transformer.
1ch
7
5
109
8
6
3 4
1 21P20A1P20A
MCB
NS
3 4
1 21P20A 1P20A
RNT
NS
(for Centralized monitoringand controll)
(for Local operation)
Relay control panel L-1
BlueW
hiteFULL
-2W
AY s
igna
l lin
es
4-3
1-2
0-4
Basic wiring diagram for individual control
or
(Not available in U.S)
WRT5511-8 WRT5514-8 WRT5518-8WRT5513-8WRT5512-8WRT5501WK-8 WRT5504WK-8WRT5503WK-8 WRT5731WK-8
WRV5601S1-8Silver Gray
WRV5602S1-8Silver Gray
WRV5603S1-8Silver Gray
WRV5604S1-8Silver Gray
WRV5831S1-8Silver Gray
WRT5551K-8 WRT5552K-8 WRT5553K-8 WRT5554K-8 WRT5771K-8
Address setting: Set the addresses on the Relay Control T/U, then set the same address on the switches.Address setting method for T/Us(DIP switch): For details, see page 33.Address setting method for switches and T/Us(Infrared I/O): For details, see page 38.
Master Switch (Surface-mount) (Infrared I/O)
Central Control and Programming Unit
LCD Appellation Touch Switch
See page 45 for details. See page 55 for details.
•Surface-mounting installation makes it easy to work on during renovations.
•Because it's Infrared I/O address setting type, you can program individual, group, and pattern control.
WRT6144WK-8
•Allows you to carry out pattern/group control settings without the need for individual switches and pattern/group setting switches.
•Allows you to confirm operation of tasks like individual, pattern, and group control.
WRT9103K-89WRT 9261K-8
FULL-COLOR Module
COSMO Module
GLACIER Series
Eight Free Module
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
11
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
12
Basic Functions
Circuit Design for Individual ControlIndividual control: Controls up to 256 circuits plus 16 dimmer circuits per system or per one transmission unit.Central monitor and control, and control from multiple locations for up to 256 circuits plus 16 dimmer circuits.
Design Tips for Circuit Divisions
Panel configuration1
Decide the load to be controlled by the FULL-2WAY remote control.
1. Install one transmission unit per system.2. Determine a minimum control area and count the number of relays required for circuits. One transmission unit can control up to 256
circuits.3. Check each load capacity per circuit, and for high power, specify 20A HID relays.
For low capacity loads (less than 6A), a T/U is available with a 6A, 10A relay unit. For details, see page 15.4. Install a relay control T/U unit for every four (4) 20A HID relays.
Relay control T/U units (4-Circuit), and T/U with a 6A, 10A-relay units (4-Circuit), up to a maximum of 64 can be connected per one transmission unit.
5. Install a transformer in each relay control panel to simplify wiring.
Selector switch configuration2Determine the same number of individual switches as the circuits required for centralized monitoring and control.
Local switches3Determine the individual switches required for local operation.
Caution: The FULL-2WAY remote lighting control system cannot be used in combination with other systems.Do not use remote control relays or remote control transmission systems from other manufacturers.
Notes on design• When using dimmer address setting switches, install an amplifier for approximately every 50 circuits. See page 18 for details.• When using the WRT2050-80 Transmission Unit, use the WR3913K-80 Amplifier.
WR6161K-8
0-1
0-3
0-2
0-4
WR6161K-8
WR3400-8 or WRT4014-8
0ch
•Transformer
WR2311-851
Make sure there is no duplication of Relay Control T/U load addresses. (Not available in US)
Powersource
Powersource
0-1
1-1
0-3
1-3
Ry1
Ry3
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
RedBlue
RedBlue
Ry2
Ry41
3
2
4
Ry5
Ry7
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
RedBlue
RedBlue
Ry6
Ry8
1
3
2
4
Ry1
Ry3
Ry2
Ry4
Ry5
Ry7
Ry6
Ry8
WR2311-851
Transformer
2ch
3ch
TransformerWRT2050-80Transmission Unit
Lightingfixtures Lighting fixtures
WR6161K-8
0ch
WR6161K-820A HID Relay (Single Pole)
WR3400-8Relay Control T/U (4-Circuit)(Dip switch setting type)
or
WRT4014-8Relay Control T/U (4-Circuit) (Infrared I/O) (Panel Use)
Load channel
Load number
Sign
al
24V AC
0-2
1-2
100-242V AC
220V AC
WRT5554K-8Switch (4) X 4 units
WRT5554K-8Switch (4)
Individual controlWRT5552K-8 Switch (2)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Matching of the load addresses of the switchesallows remote control from multiple locations.
FULL-2WAY signal lines
Selector switch Local switches
RelayControl T/U
Relay control panel L-2
1-2
3-3
WRT5502WK-8Switch (2)(COSMO Module)
20AHID Relay
•For individual control of 16 circuits
WR3913K-80Amplifier
20A HID Relay (Single Pole)
1-4
Signal White
WRT5554K-8Switch (4) X 2 units
0-10-20-30-4
1-11-21-31-4
1-11-21-31-4
2-12-22-32-4
3-13-23-33-4
2-12-22-32-4
3-13-23-33-4
•Only one (1) transmission unit is installedeven though there are three (3) separaterelay control panels.
• It is recommended that each relay controlpanel be equipped with one (1) transformer.
1ch
7
5
109
8
6
3 4
1 21P20A1P20A
MCB
NS
3 4
1 21P20A 1P20A
RNT
NS
(for Centralized monitoringand controll)
(for Local operation)
Relay control panel L-1
BlueW
hiteFULL
-2W
AY s
igna
l lin
es
4-3
1-2
0-4
Basic wiring diagram for individual control
or
(Not available in U.S)
WRT5511-8 WRT5514-8 WRT5518-8WRT5513-8WRT5512-8WRT5501WK-8 WRT5504WK-8WRT5503WK-8 WRT5731WK-8
WRV5601S1-8Silver Gray
WRV5602S1-8Silver Gray
WRV5603S1-8Silver Gray
WRV5604S1-8Silver Gray
WRV5831S1-8Silver Gray
WRT5551K-8 WRT5552K-8 WRT5553K-8 WRT5554K-8 WRT5771K-8
Address setting: Set the addresses on the Relay Control T/U, then set the same address on the switches.Address setting method for T/Us(DIP switch): For details, see page 33.Address setting method for switches and T/Us(Infrared I/O): For details, see page 38.
Master Switch (Surface-mount) (Infrared I/O)
Central Control and Programming Unit
LCD Appellation Touch Switch
See page 45 for details. See page 55 for details.
•Surface-mounting installation makes it easy to work on during renovations.
•Because it's Infrared I/O address setting type, you can program individual, group, and pattern control.
WRT6144WK-8
•Allows you to carry out pattern/group control settings without the need for individual switches and pattern/group setting switches.
•Allows you to confirm operation of tasks like individual, pattern, and group control.
WRT9103K-89WRT 9261K-8
FULL-COLOR Module
COSMO Module
GLACIER Series
Eight Free Module
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
11
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
12
Basic Functions
G1
G2
G1
G2
Circuit Design for Group Control / Pattern ControlThe basic circuit design is the same as the individual control.• Group control: Up to 127 per transmission unit.• Pattern control: Up to 72 per transmission unit.Simply add group switches and a program setting unit to individual control circuits.• Group / Pattern control setting can be performed by WRT9600-8. (Recommended for up to 50 circuits)
• Address and pattern settings at selector switch
Design Tips for Circuit Divisions
Panel configuration1
The configuration is the same as individual control circuit.
Selector switch configuration: Install Selector switch with Program setting unit in the superintendent's office, etc.2
Address setting at local switch: Assign the same group / patterm address on the local switch to match that of the selector switch.
• Group control setting, add group switches and Program setting unit (WRT5850-8).
Install the same number of individual switches as the circuits.
Local switches3
Install switches for the required number of groups and for the number of multi-location control points.
(1) Set the addresses of the individual and group control / pattern controlswitches using the Wireless Programming Unit or the Wireless Address Setting Unit.
• Make sure that the pattern address on the local switch matches that of the selector switch to enable control from multiple locations.
• Do not install the Program Setting Unit (WRT5850-8) in a common space, to avoid the set program being modified inadvertently.
For individual controlSwitches
(0ch-1,0ch-2, ...,63ch-3,63ch-4)
FULL-COLOR Module
WRT9600-8
COSMOModule
+ For group controlSwitches
(G1,...,G127)
WRT5850-8Program Setting Unit
At least one unit requiredInstall according to the number of groups needed
WRT9600-8Wireless Programming Unit
Install according to the numberof load circuits or relays
For individual controlWRT5554K-8Switch (4)
For group controlWRT5554K-8Switch (4)
WRT5850-8Program Setting Unit
0_1
0_2
0_3
0_4
1_1
1_2
1_3
1_4
2_1
2_2
2_3
2_4
G1
G2
G3
G4
(For details, see page 41)(For details, see page 41)
Using Selector Switches, or using Wireless Programming Unit.(2) Set the Group / Pattern control range.
(For details, see page 39) (For details, see page 35)
(3) Assign the same group address on the local switch to match that of the group control using Wireless programming unit or Wireless address setting unit.
(1) The Red LED on a group switch lights when all individual switches programmed in the group are turned on.
(2) The Green LED on a group switch lights when all individual switches programmed in the group are turned off.
(3) Turning one individual switch in the group to ON does not change the Red LED state on the group switch.(4) The load status shall not be monitored from central location by a group switch.
LED indications for Group switch
Basic Wiring Diagram for Group Control •Individual control: 16 circuits •Group control: 4 groups
FULL-COLOR Module
I/O pointRed (with LED on)Operation section, appellation card
Green (with LED on)
1P20A 1P20A
RNT
NS
3 4
1 2
WRT5554K-8Switch (4) X 2 (Units)
Group addresses of the switches are matched to each other,allowing remote control from multiple locations.
Selector switchLocal switches
WRT5502WK-8Switch (2)COSMO Module
WRT5502WK-8Switch (2)COSMO Module
FULL-2WAY signal line
WRT5552K-8Switch (2)WRT5554K-8Switch (4)
WRT5554K-8Switch (4)
2-12-22-32-4
3-13-23-33-4
0-10-20-30-4
0-10-20-30-4
G1
G2
Only one Transmission Unit isused although there are separaterelay control panels installed.Transformer must be installedfor wiring configurtation at each relay control.
WRT2050-80TransmissionUnit
Transformer
2ch
3ch
RelayControl T/U
20A HID Relay
WR3913K-80Amplifier
Ry1
Ry3
Ry2
Ry4
Ry5
Ry7
Ry6
Ry8
Transformer
0ch
1ch
Ry1
Ry3
Ry2
Ry4
Ry5
Ry7
Ry6
Ry8
RelayControl T/U
20A HID Relay
Relay control panel L-1
1P20A 1P20A
RNT
MCB
NS
7
5
109
8
6
3 4
1 2
WRT5554K-8Switch (4) X 4 (Units)
for individual control
0-10-20-30-4
1-11-21-31-4
2-12-22-32-4
3-13-23-33-4
G1G2G3G4
WRT5850-8Program Setting Unit
WRT5554K-8Switch (4)
for group controlInstalled at the control room For manual operation
marked products are the needed equipment for Individual Control when Group Controlis being performed
Relay control panel L-2
Local switches
G1
G2
G3
G4
• Address setting at local switch
•Any of the individual, group or pattern switches may be used to control a given load in an overlapping manner. Priority is given to the switch used most recently for remote lighting control.
•The load remains unchanged even when the same pattern switch is pushed again.
• Pattern control setting, add pattern switches and Program Setting Unit (WRT5850-8).
• Do not install the Program Setting Unit (WRT5850-8) in a common space, to avoid the set program being modified inadvertently.
For individual controlSwitches
(0ch-1,0ch-2, ...,63ch-3,63ch-4)+ For pattern control
Switches(P1,...,P72)
WRT5850-8Program Setting Unit
At least one unit requiredInstall according to the number of patterns needed
Install according to the numberof load circuits or relays
0-1
0-2
0-3
0-4
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
P1
P2
P3
P4
For individual controlWRT5554K-8Switch (4)
For pattern controlWRT5554K-8Switch (4)
WRT5850-8Program Setting Unit
(1) The Red LED on a pattern switch lights when the state of every individual switch in the pattern matches that of the programmed pattern.If one individual circuit is turned on at a local switch, the LED on the pattern switch changes to green.Thus load status can be monitored from a central location via the pattern switch.
(2) The Green LED on a pattern switch lights when the state of any of the individual switches in the pattern does not match that of the programmed pattern.The Red LED on a pattern switch lights when all of the lights are turned off. ("All-off" pattern)
LED indications for Pattern switch
FULL-COLOR Module
I/O pointRed (with LED on)Operation section, appellation card
Green (with LED on)
1413
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
G1
G2
G1
G2
Circuit Design for Group Control / Pattern ControlThe basic circuit design is the same as the individual control.• Group control: Up to 127 per transmission unit.• Pattern control: Up to 72 per transmission unit.Simply add group switches and a program setting unit to individual control circuits.• Group / Pattern control setting can be performed by WRT9600-8. (Recommended for up to 50 circuits)
• Address and pattern settings at selector switch
Design Tips for Circuit Divisions
Panel configuration1
The configuration is the same as individual control circuit.
Selector switch configuration: Install Selector switch with Program setting unit in the superintendent's office, etc.2
Address setting at local switch: Assign the same group / patterm address on the local switch to match that of the selector switch.
• Group control setting, add group switches and Program setting unit (WRT5850-8).
Install the same number of individual switches as the circuits.
Local switches3
Install switches for the required number of groups and for the number of multi-location control points.
(1) Set the addresses of the individual and group control / pattern controlswitches using the Wireless Programming Unit or the Wireless Address Setting Unit.
• Make sure that the pattern address on the local switch matches that of the selector switch to enable control from multiple locations.
• Do not install the Program Setting Unit (WRT5850-8) in a common space, to avoid the set program being modified inadvertently.
For individual controlSwitches
(0ch-1,0ch-2, ...,63ch-3,63ch-4)
FULL-COLOR Module
WRT9600-8
COSMOModule
+ For group controlSwitches
(G1,...,G127)
WRT5850-8Program Setting Unit
At least one unit requiredInstall according to the number of groups needed
WRT9600-8Wireless Programming Unit
Install according to the numberof load circuits or relays
For individual controlWRT5554K-8Switch (4)
For group controlWRT5554K-8Switch (4)
WRT5850-8Program Setting Unit
0_1
0_2
0_3
0_4
1_1
1_2
1_3
1_4
2_1
2_2
2_3
2_4
G1
G2
G3
G4
(For details, see page 41)(For details, see page 41)
Using Selector Switches, or using Wireless Programming Unit.(2) Set the Group / Pattern control range.
(For details, see page 39) (For details, see page 35)
(3) Assign the same group address on the local switch to match that of the group control using Wireless programming unit or Wireless address setting unit.
(1) The Red LED on a group switch lights when all individual switches programmed in the group are turned on.
(2) The Green LED on a group switch lights when all individual switches programmed in the group are turned off.
(3) Turning one individual switch in the group to ON does not change the Red LED state on the group switch.(4) The load status shall not be monitored from central location by a group switch.
LED indications for Group switch
Basic Wiring Diagram for Group Control •Individual control: 16 circuits •Group control: 4 groups
FULL-COLOR Module
I/O pointRed (with LED on)Operation section, appellation card
Green (with LED on)
1P20A 1P20A
RNT
NS
3 4
1 2
WRT5554K-8Switch (4) X 2 (Units)
Group addresses of the switches are matched to each other,allowing remote control from multiple locations.
Selector switchLocal switches
WRT5502WK-8Switch (2)COSMO Module
WRT5502WK-8Switch (2)COSMO Module
FULL-2WAY signal line
WRT5552K-8Switch (2)WRT5554K-8Switch (4)
WRT5554K-8Switch (4)
2-12-22-32-4
3-13-23-33-4
0-10-20-30-4
0-10-20-30-4
G1
G2
Only one Transmission Unit isused although there are separaterelay control panels installed.Transformer must be installedfor wiring configurtation at each relay control.
WRT2050-80TransmissionUnit
Transformer
2ch
3ch
RelayControl T/U
20A HID Relay
WR3913K-80Amplifier
Ry1
Ry3
Ry2
Ry4
Ry5
Ry7
Ry6
Ry8
Transformer
0ch
1ch
Ry1
Ry3
Ry2
Ry4
Ry5
Ry7
Ry6
Ry8
RelayControl T/U
20A HID Relay
Relay control panel L-1
1P20A 1P20A
RNT
MCB
NS
7
5
109
8
6
3 4
1 2
WRT5554K-8Switch (4) X 4 (Units)
for individual control
0-10-20-30-4
1-11-21-31-4
2-12-22-32-4
3-13-23-33-4
G1G2G3G4
WRT5850-8Program Setting Unit
WRT5554K-8Switch (4)
for group controlInstalled at the control room For manual operation
marked products are the needed equipment for Individual Control when Group Controlis being performed
Relay control panel L-2
Local switches
G1
G2
G3
G4
• Address setting at local switch
•Any of the individual, group or pattern switches may be used to control a given load in an overlapping manner. Priority is given to the switch used most recently for remote lighting control.
•The load remains unchanged even when the same pattern switch is pushed again.
• Pattern control setting, add pattern switches and Program Setting Unit (WRT5850-8).
• Do not install the Program Setting Unit (WRT5850-8) in a common space, to avoid the set program being modified inadvertently.
For individual controlSwitches
(0ch-1,0ch-2, ...,63ch-3,63ch-4)+ For pattern control
Switches(P1,...,P72)
WRT5850-8Program Setting Unit
At least one unit requiredInstall according to the number of patterns needed
Install according to the numberof load circuits or relays
0-1
0-2
0-3
0-4
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
P1
P2
P3
P4
For individual controlWRT5554K-8Switch (4)
For pattern controlWRT5554K-8Switch (4)
WRT5850-8Program Setting Unit
(1) The Red LED on a pattern switch lights when the state of every individual switch in the pattern matches that of the programmed pattern.If one individual circuit is turned on at a local switch, the LED on the pattern switch changes to green.Thus load status can be monitored from a central location via the pattern switch.
(2) The Green LED on a pattern switch lights when the state of any of the individual switches in the pattern does not match that of the programmed pattern.The Red LED on a pattern switch lights when all of the lights are turned off. ("All-off" pattern)
LED indications for Pattern switch
FULL-COLOR Module
I/O pointRed (with LED on)Operation section, appellation card
Green (with LED on)
1413
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
• Resistive load (pf=1)• Inductive load (pf>0.6)• Incandescent lamp load• Fluorescent lamp load with (conventional) ballast with high-pf (conventional) ballast with electronic ballast self-ballasted compact fluorescent lamp fixture• High Intensity Discharged (HID) lamp load• Between terminals of different pole OUTPUT• Between live parts and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of OUTPUT and SIGNAL• Between terminals of different pole OUTPUT• Between live parts and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of OUTPUT and SIGNAL• Main contacts
6 A 300 V AC6 A 300 V AC6 A 250 V AC
6 A 250 V ACdo not use
1 A 250 V ACdo not usedo not use
Electrical life
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
Temperature rise
30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )
Item Condition Performance
2,000 V ACfor 1 min
65 max
10 M ( 500 V megger )
WR34169-8/WR3426K-8/WRT41249-8: 6A Contact Output T/U Specifications
high-pf (power factor) : pf > 0.85
OUTPUT contact side :• Resistive load (pf=1)• Inductive load (pf>0.6)• Incandescent lamp load• Fluorescent lamp load with (conventional) ballast with high-pf (conventional) ballast with electronic ballast self-ballasted compact fluorescent lamp fixture• High Intensity Discharged (HID) lamp loadAUXILIARY contact side :• Resistive load (pf=1)• Resistive load (pf=1)
• Between terminals of each OUTPUT (OFF condition)• Between live parts and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of OUTPUT and AUXILIARY• Between terminals of OUTPUT and INPUT• Between terminals of INPUT and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of each AUXILIARY• Between terminals of each OUTPUT (OFF condition)• Between live parts and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of OUTPUT and AUXILIARY• Between terminals of OUTPUT and INPUT• Between terminals of INPUT and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of each AUXILIARY
• Performance frequency : 20 cycles (40 operations)/min
• Main contacts
20 A 300 V AC20 A 300 V AC20 A 250 V AC
20 A 250 V AC20 A 250 V AC15 A 250 V AC15 A 250 V AC20 A 300 V AC
1 A 125 V AC0.5 A 250 V AC
Electrical life
Dielectric strength
Mechanical life
Insulation resistance
Temperature rise
30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )
60,000 cycles( 120,000 operations )
Item Condition Performance
2,000 V ACfor 1 min
4,000 V ACfor 1 min
600 V ACfor 1 min
65 max
10 M ( 500 V megger )
WR6161K-8/WR61613K-8 : Contact Output Specifications
high-pf (power factor) : pf > 0.85
OUTPUT contact side :• Resistive load (pf=1)• Inductive load (pf>0.6)• Incandescent lamp load• Fluorescent lamp load with (conventional) ballast with high-pf (conventional) ballast with electronic ballast self-ballasted compact fluorescent lamp fixture• High Intensity Discharged (HID) lamp loadAUXILIARY contact side :• Resistive load (pf=1)• Resistive load (pf=1)
• Between terminals of different pole OUTPUT• Between terminals of each OUTPUT (OFF condition)• Between live parts and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of OUTPUT and AUXILIARY• Between terminals of OUTPUT and INPUT• Between terminals of INPUT and non-live metal parts• Between terminal of each AUXILIARY• Between terminals of different pole OUTPUT• Between terminals of each OUTPUT (OFF condition)• Between live parts and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of OUTPUT and AUXILIARY• Between terminals of OUTPUT and INPUT• Between terminals of INPUT and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of each AUXILIARY
• Performance frequency : 20 cycles (40 operations)/min
• Main contacts
20 A 300 V AC20 A 300 V AC20 A 250 V AC
20 A 250 V AC20 A 250 V AC15 A 250 V AC15 A 250 V AC20 A 300 V AC
1 A 125 V AC0.5 A 250 V AC
Electrical life
Dielectric strength
Mechanical life
Insulation resistance
Temperature rise
30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )
60,000 cycles( 120,000 operations )
Item Condition Performance
2,000 V ACfor 1 min
600 V ACfor 1 min
65 max
10 M ( 500 V megger )
WR6166-8/WR61663-8 : Contact Output Specifications
high-pf (power factor) : pf > 0.85
OUTPUT contact side :• General use• Tungsten• (Standard) Ballast• Motor starting , single phase• Motor starting , single phase
• Between terminals of each OUTPUT (OFF condition)• Between live parts and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of OUTPUT and AUXILIARY• Between terminals of OUTPUT and INPUT• Between terminals of INPUT and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of each AUXILIARY• Between terminals of each OUTPUT (OFF condition)• Between terminals of OUTPUT and INPUT
• Performance frequency : 20 cycles (40 operations)/min
• Main contacts
30 A 300 Vac2400 W 120 Vac
20 A 300 Vac1/2 HP 110-125 Vac
1-1/2 HP 220-277 Vac
OUTPUT contact side :• General use• Tungsten• (Standard) Ballast• Motor starting , single phase• Motor starting , single phase
30 A 347 Vac2400 W 120 Vac
20 A 300 Vac1/2 HP 110-125 Vac
1-1/2 HP 220-250 Vac
<UL-rating>Electrical life
<CSA-rating>Electrical life
Dielectric strength
Mechanical life
Insulation resistance
Temperature rise
30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )
20,000 cycles( 40,000 operations )
30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )
-
60,000 cycles( 120,000 operations )
Item Condition Performance
1,694 V AC for 1 min
2,500 V AC for 1 min
600 V AC for 1 min
65 max
10 M ( 500 V megger )
WR6161K-84/WR61613K-84 : Contact Output Specifications
OUTPUT contact side :• General use• Tungsten• (Standard) Ballast • Motor starting , single phase• Motor starting , single phase• Short circuit rating
• Between terminals of different pole OUTPUT• Between terminals of each OUTPUT (OFF condition)• Between live parts and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of OUTPUT and AUXILIARY• Between terminals of OUTPUT and INPUT• Between terminals of INPUT and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of each AUXILIARY• Between terminals of each OUTPUT (OFF condition)• Between terminals of OUTPUT and INPUT
• Performance frequency : 20 cycles (40 operations)/min
• Auxiliary contact side (WR61723K-84 only)
• Main contacts
20 A 480 Vac2400 W 120 Vac
20 A 480 Vac1/2 HP 110-125 Vac
1-1/2 HP 220-277 Vac5,000 A 277 Vac
OUTPUT contact side :• General use• Tungsten• (Standard) Ballast• Motor starting , single phase• Motor starting , single phase
20 A 347 Vac2400 W 120 Vac
20 A 347 Vac1/2 HP 110-125 Vac
1-1/2 HP 220-250 Vac
<UL-rating>Electrical life
<CSA-rating>Electrical life
Electrical life
Dielectric strength
Mechanical life
Insulation resistance
Temperature rise
30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )
30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )
30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )
-
60,000 cycles( 120,000 operations )
Item Condition Performance
1,960 V AC for 1 min
2,500 V AC for 1 min
600 V AC for 1 min
65 max
10 M ( 500 V megger )
WR6172K-84/WR61723K-84 : Contact Output Specifications
OUTPUT contact side :• General use• Tungsten• (Standard) Ballast• Motor Starting , single phase• Motor Starting , single phase
• Between terminals of different pole OUTPUT• Between terminals of each OUTPUT (OFF condition)• Between live parts and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of OUTPUT and AUXILIARY• Between terminals of OUTPUT and INPUT• Between terminals of INPUT and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of each AUXILIARY• Between terminals of each OUTPUT (OFF condition)• Between terminals of OUTPUT and INPUT
• Performance frequency : 20 cycles (40 operations)/min
• Main contacts
20 A 300 Vac2400 W 120 Vac
20 A 300 Vac1/2 HP 110-125 Vac
1-1/2 HP 220-277 Vac
OUTPUT contact side :• General use• Tungsten• (Standard) Ballast• Motor starting , single phase• Motor starting , single phase
20 A 347 Vac2400 W 120 Vac
20 A 347 Vac1/2 HP 110-125 Vac
1-1/2 HP 220-250 Vac
<UL-rating>Electrical life
<CSA-rating>Electrical life
Dielectric strength
Mechanical life
Insulation resistance
Temperature rise
30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )
30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )
-
60,000 cycles( 120,000 operations )
Item Condition Performance
1,694 V AC for 1 min
2,500 V AC for 1 min
600 V AC for 1 min
65 max
10 M ( 500 V megger )
WR6166-84/WR61663-84 : Contact Output Specifications
Remote control relay selectionHow to select the relay to be used
HID and other large-capacity loads (20A max.)
(6A max.)
Multiple loads per circuit
20A HID Relay
Relay Control T/U Transformer
• Choose relays based on the capacity of the load.
Deciding where to install relays• Relays are usually installed inside the relay control panel.However, in the following cases, relays can be installed in scattered locations, such as on ceilings and inside lighting fixtures.(1) When the EPS is small.(2) When you want to keep the relay control panel compact.(3) When you want to reduce lighting wiring coming from the relay control panel.
• Because the 6A Contact Output T/U (4-Circuit) does not require a transformer, relay control panels are compact and equipment costs are lower.
+Small-capacity loads
6A Contact Output T/UNote: Cannot be used with HID loads.
Relay Control T/U + 20A HID Relay + Transformer
JIS approved dimensions (1)
• WR6161K-8 / WR6161K-84(UL,CSA-Approved) 20A HID Relay (Single Pole)• WR61613K-8 / WR61613K-84 (UL,CSA Approved) 20A HID Relay (Single Pole) (with Auxiliary Contact)
• Contact arrangement
WR6161K-8
(Dou
ble-
pole
rela
ys)
(Si
ngle
pol
e re
lays
)
Relay control panel
20A max.Load capacity
Configuration
Installation
6A Contact Output T/U (no transformer needed)6A max. (not for use with HID loads)
10A max.
No auxiliary contact available for WR6161K-8
Main circuit Auxiliarycircuit
Wiring Diagram
• WR34169-8 6A Contact Output T/U (4-Circuit)• WR3426K-8 6A Contact Output T/U (1-Circuit)
WR34169-8
Wiring Diagram
BlueRed
Ry
Transformer
0ch
0-11 2
43
WR3400-8Relay Control T/U
WR6161K-820A HID Relay
Power source
WR2311-851
White
Blue
Lighting fixture
Power source
To Transmission Unit(WRT2050-80)
20A HID Relay with JIS approved dimensions (1) designed for a more compact relay control panel
• WR6166-8 / WR6166-84(UL,CSA Approved) 20A HID Relay (Double Pole) (JIS approved dimensions (1))• WR61663-8 / WR61663-84 (UL,CSA Approved) 20A HID Relay (Double Pole) (JIS approved dimensions (1)) (with Auxiliary Contact)• WR6172K-84 (UL,CSA Approved) / WR61723K-84 (UL Approved)
• Contact arrangement
WR6166-8
Wiring Diagram
BlueRed
0-1
White
Blue
Transformer
0ch1 2
43
WR3400-8Relay Control T/U
Lighting fixture WR6166-820A HID Relay
Power sourcePower source
WR2311-851
Ry
To Transmission Unit (WRT2050-80)
No auxiliary contact available for WR6166-8
Main circuit Auxiliarycircuit
(CON)
(NC)
(NO)
0-10-20-30-4
WR34169-86A Contact Output T/U (4-Circuit)
Lightingfixture
0ch
Power source
To Transmission Unit(WRT2050-80)
WR3442-8
Wiring Diagram
Specifications
0-10-20-30-4
WR3442-810A Contact Output T/U (4-Circuit)
Lightingfixture
0ch
Power source
To Transmission Unit(WRT2050-80)
Caution:The FULL-2WAY remote lighting control system cannot be used in combination with other systems.Do not use remote control relays or remote control transmission systems from other manufactures.
Not applicable to U.S.A and CANADA market. See page 73 for selecting appropriate items.
Rec
omm
ende
d re
lays
by
num
ber o
f pol
es
10A Contact Output T/U (no transformer needed)
• Short circuit rating 18,000 A 277 Vac
16 A 277 Vac• Electronic Ballast
1 A 125 Vac
• Auxiliary contact side (WR61663K-84 only)Electrical life 30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )1 A 125 Vac
5,000 A 277 Vac• Short circuit rating
• Auxiliary contact side (WR61613K-84 only)Electrical life 30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )1 A 125 Vac
Signal VoltageSignal Current Consumption Less than 3 mA
Electric Life
Terminal Intensity More than 1.2 N m
Resistive Load (Pf = 1)Inductive Load (Pf: more than 0.6)Incandescent lamp LoadFluorescent lamp Load (containing electronic ballast)High intensity Discharged lamp Load
Insulation Resistance
Between live parts and non-live partsBetween live parts of different polarityBetween live parts and signal terminals
More than 10MΩ
Electric Strength
Between live parts and non-live partsBetween live parts of different polarityBetween live parts and signal terminals
2000 V/min.
10 A AC 250 V 1,000,000 cycles10 A AC 250 V 200,000 cycles10 A AC 250 V 200,000 cycles10 A AC 250 V 200,000 cycles
10 A AC 250 V 200,000 cycles
From ±18 V to ±30 V
Temperature Rise Main contact Less than 65
Relay Selecting Chart by Load Capacity
15 16
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
• Resistive load (pf=1)• Inductive load (pf>0.6)• Incandescent lamp load• Fluorescent lamp load with (conventional) ballast with high-pf (conventional) ballast with electronic ballast self-ballasted compact fluorescent lamp fixture• High Intensity Discharged (HID) lamp load• Between terminals of different pole OUTPUT• Between live parts and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of OUTPUT and SIGNAL• Between terminals of different pole OUTPUT• Between live parts and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of OUTPUT and SIGNAL• Main contacts
6 A 300 V AC6 A 300 V AC6 A 250 V AC
6 A 250 V ACdo not use
1 A 250 V ACdo not usedo not use
Electrical life
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
Temperature rise
30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )
Item Condition Performance
2,000 V ACfor 1 min
65 max
10 M ( 500 V megger )
WR34169-8/WR3426K-8/WRT41249-8: 6A Contact Output T/U Specifications
high-pf (power factor) : pf > 0.85
OUTPUT contact side :• Resistive load (pf=1)• Inductive load (pf>0.6)• Incandescent lamp load• Fluorescent lamp load with (conventional) ballast with high-pf (conventional) ballast with electronic ballast self-ballasted compact fluorescent lamp fixture• High Intensity Discharged (HID) lamp loadAUXILIARY contact side :• Resistive load (pf=1)• Resistive load (pf=1)
• Between terminals of each OUTPUT (OFF condition)• Between live parts and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of OUTPUT and AUXILIARY• Between terminals of OUTPUT and INPUT• Between terminals of INPUT and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of each AUXILIARY• Between terminals of each OUTPUT (OFF condition)• Between live parts and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of OUTPUT and AUXILIARY• Between terminals of OUTPUT and INPUT• Between terminals of INPUT and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of each AUXILIARY
• Performance frequency : 20 cycles (40 operations)/min
• Main contacts
20 A 300 V AC20 A 300 V AC20 A 250 V AC
20 A 250 V AC20 A 250 V AC15 A 250 V AC15 A 250 V AC20 A 300 V AC
1 A 125 V AC0.5 A 250 V AC
Electrical life
Dielectric strength
Mechanical life
Insulation resistance
Temperature rise
30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )
60,000 cycles( 120,000 operations )
Item Condition Performance
2,000 V ACfor 1 min
4,000 V ACfor 1 min
600 V ACfor 1 min
65 max
10 M ( 500 V megger )
WR6161K-8/WR61613K-8 : Contact Output Specifications
high-pf (power factor) : pf > 0.85
OUTPUT contact side :• Resistive load (pf=1)• Inductive load (pf>0.6)• Incandescent lamp load• Fluorescent lamp load with (conventional) ballast with high-pf (conventional) ballast with electronic ballast self-ballasted compact fluorescent lamp fixture• High Intensity Discharged (HID) lamp loadAUXILIARY contact side :• Resistive load (pf=1)• Resistive load (pf=1)
• Between terminals of different pole OUTPUT• Between terminals of each OUTPUT (OFF condition)• Between live parts and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of OUTPUT and AUXILIARY• Between terminals of OUTPUT and INPUT• Between terminals of INPUT and non-live metal parts• Between terminal of each AUXILIARY• Between terminals of different pole OUTPUT• Between terminals of each OUTPUT (OFF condition)• Between live parts and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of OUTPUT and AUXILIARY• Between terminals of OUTPUT and INPUT• Between terminals of INPUT and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of each AUXILIARY
• Performance frequency : 20 cycles (40 operations)/min
• Main contacts
20 A 300 V AC20 A 300 V AC20 A 250 V AC
20 A 250 V AC20 A 250 V AC15 A 250 V AC15 A 250 V AC20 A 300 V AC
1 A 125 V AC0.5 A 250 V AC
Electrical life
Dielectric strength
Mechanical life
Insulation resistance
Temperature rise
30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )
60,000 cycles( 120,000 operations )
Item Condition Performance
2,000 V ACfor 1 min
600 V ACfor 1 min
65 max
10 M ( 500 V megger )
WR6166-8/WR61663-8 : Contact Output Specifications
high-pf (power factor) : pf > 0.85
OUTPUT contact side :• General use• Tungsten• (Standard) Ballast• Motor starting , single phase• Motor starting , single phase
• Between terminals of each OUTPUT (OFF condition)• Between live parts and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of OUTPUT and AUXILIARY• Between terminals of OUTPUT and INPUT• Between terminals of INPUT and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of each AUXILIARY• Between terminals of each OUTPUT (OFF condition)• Between terminals of OUTPUT and INPUT
• Performance frequency : 20 cycles (40 operations)/min
• Main contacts
30 A 300 Vac2400 W 120 Vac
20 A 300 Vac1/2 HP 110-125 Vac
1-1/2 HP 220-277 Vac
OUTPUT contact side :• General use• Tungsten• (Standard) Ballast• Motor starting , single phase• Motor starting , single phase
30 A 347 Vac2400 W 120 Vac
20 A 300 Vac1/2 HP 110-125 Vac
1-1/2 HP 220-250 Vac
<UL-rating>Electrical life
<CSA-rating>Electrical life
Dielectric strength
Mechanical life
Insulation resistance
Temperature rise
30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )
20,000 cycles( 40,000 operations )
30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )
-
60,000 cycles( 120,000 operations )
Item Condition Performance
1,694 V AC for 1 min
2,500 V AC for 1 min
600 V AC for 1 min
65 max
10 M ( 500 V megger )
WR6161K-84/WR61613K-84 : Contact Output Specifications
OUTPUT contact side :• General use• Tungsten• (Standard) Ballast • Motor starting , single phase• Motor starting , single phase• Short circuit rating
• Between terminals of different pole OUTPUT• Between terminals of each OUTPUT (OFF condition)• Between live parts and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of OUTPUT and AUXILIARY• Between terminals of OUTPUT and INPUT• Between terminals of INPUT and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of each AUXILIARY• Between terminals of each OUTPUT (OFF condition)• Between terminals of OUTPUT and INPUT
• Performance frequency : 20 cycles (40 operations)/min
• Auxiliary contact side (WR61723K-84 only)
• Main contacts
20 A 480 Vac2400 W 120 Vac
20 A 480 Vac1/2 HP 110-125 Vac
1-1/2 HP 220-277 Vac5,000 A 277 Vac
OUTPUT contact side :• General use• Tungsten• (Standard) Ballast• Motor starting , single phase• Motor starting , single phase
20 A 347 Vac2400 W 120 Vac
20 A 347 Vac1/2 HP 110-125 Vac
1-1/2 HP 220-250 Vac
<UL-rating>Electrical life
<CSA-rating>Electrical life
Electrical life
Dielectric strength
Mechanical life
Insulation resistance
Temperature rise
30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )
30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )
30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )
-
60,000 cycles( 120,000 operations )
Item Condition Performance
1,960 V AC for 1 min
2,500 V AC for 1 min
600 V AC for 1 min
65 max
10 M ( 500 V megger )
WR6172K-84/WR61723K-84 : Contact Output Specifications
OUTPUT contact side :• General use• Tungsten• (Standard) Ballast• Motor Starting , single phase• Motor Starting , single phase
• Between terminals of different pole OUTPUT• Between terminals of each OUTPUT (OFF condition)• Between live parts and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of OUTPUT and AUXILIARY• Between terminals of OUTPUT and INPUT• Between terminals of INPUT and non-live metal parts• Between terminals of each AUXILIARY• Between terminals of each OUTPUT (OFF condition)• Between terminals of OUTPUT and INPUT
• Performance frequency : 20 cycles (40 operations)/min
• Main contacts
20 A 300 Vac2400 W 120 Vac
20 A 300 Vac1/2 HP 110-125 Vac
1-1/2 HP 220-277 Vac
OUTPUT contact side :• General use• Tungsten• (Standard) Ballast• Motor starting , single phase• Motor starting , single phase
20 A 347 Vac2400 W 120 Vac
20 A 347 Vac1/2 HP 110-125 Vac
1-1/2 HP 220-250 Vac
<UL-rating>Electrical life
<CSA-rating>Electrical life
Dielectric strength
Mechanical life
Insulation resistance
Temperature rise
30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )
30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )
-
60,000 cycles( 120,000 operations )
Item Condition Performance
1,694 V AC for 1 min
2,500 V AC for 1 min
600 V AC for 1 min
65 max
10 M ( 500 V megger )
WR6166-84/WR61663-84 : Contact Output Specifications
Remote control relay selectionHow to select the relay to be used
HID and other large-capacity loads (20A max.)
(6A max.)
Multiple loads per circuit
20A HID Relay
Relay Control T/U Transformer
• Choose relays based on the capacity of the load.
Deciding where to install relays• Relays are usually installed inside the relay control panel.However, in the following cases, relays can be installed in scattered locations, such as on ceilings and inside lighting fixtures.(1) When the EPS is small.(2) When you want to keep the relay control panel compact.(3) When you want to reduce lighting wiring coming from the relay control panel.
• Because the 6A Contact Output T/U (4-Circuit) does not require a transformer, relay control panels are compact and equipment costs are lower.
+Small-capacity loads
6A Contact Output T/UNote: Cannot be used with HID loads.
Relay Control T/U + 20A HID Relay + Transformer
JIS approved dimensions (1)
• WR6161K-8 / WR6161K-84(UL,CSA-Approved) 20A HID Relay (Single Pole)• WR61613K-8 / WR61613K-84 (UL,CSA Approved) 20A HID Relay (Single Pole) (with Auxiliary Contact)
• Contact arrangement
WR6161K-8
(Dou
ble-
pole
rela
ys)
(Si
ngle
pol
e re
lays
)
Relay control panel
20A max.Load capacity
Configuration
Installation
6A Contact Output T/U (no transformer needed)6A max. (not for use with HID loads)
10A max.
No auxiliary contact available for WR6161K-8
Main circuit Auxiliarycircuit
Wiring Diagram
• WR34169-8 6A Contact Output T/U (4-Circuit)• WR3426K-8 6A Contact Output T/U (1-Circuit)
WR34169-8
Wiring Diagram
BlueRed
Ry
Transformer
0ch
0-11 2
43
WR3400-8Relay Control T/U
WR6161K-820A HID Relay
Power source
WR2311-851
White
Blue
Lighting fixture
Power source
To Transmission Unit(WRT2050-80)
20A HID Relay with JIS approved dimensions (1) designed for a more compact relay control panel
• WR6166-8 / WR6166-84(UL,CSA Approved) 20A HID Relay (Double Pole) (JIS approved dimensions (1))• WR61663-8 / WR61663-84 (UL,CSA Approved) 20A HID Relay (Double Pole) (JIS approved dimensions (1)) (with Auxiliary Contact)• WR6172K-84 (UL,CSA Approved) / WR61723K-84 (UL Approved)
• Contact arrangement
WR6166-8
Wiring Diagram
BlueRed
0-1
White
Blue
Transformer
0ch1 2
43
WR3400-8Relay Control T/U
Lighting fixture WR6166-820A HID Relay
Power sourcePower source
WR2311-851
Ry
To Transmission Unit (WRT2050-80)
No auxiliary contact available for WR6166-8
Main circuit Auxiliarycircuit
(CON)
(NC)
(NO)
0-10-20-30-4
WR34169-86A Contact Output T/U (4-Circuit)
Lightingfixture
0ch
Power source
To Transmission Unit(WRT2050-80)
WR3442-8
Wiring Diagram
Specifications
0-10-20-30-4
WR3442-810A Contact Output T/U (4-Circuit)
Lightingfixture
0ch
Power source
To Transmission Unit(WRT2050-80)
Caution:The FULL-2WAY remote lighting control system cannot be used in combination with other systems.Do not use remote control relays or remote control transmission systems from other manufactures.
Not applicable to U.S.A and CANADA market. See page 73 for selecting appropriate items.
Rec
omm
ende
d re
lays
by
num
ber o
f pol
es
10A Contact Output T/U (no transformer needed)
• Short circuit rating 18,000 A 277 Vac
16 A 277 Vac• Electronic Ballast
1 A 125 Vac
• Auxiliary contact side (WR61663K-84 only)Electrical life 30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )1 A 125 Vac
5,000 A 277 Vac• Short circuit rating
• Auxiliary contact side (WR61613K-84 only)Electrical life 30,000 cycles( 60,000 operations )1 A 125 Vac
Signal VoltageSignal Current Consumption Less than 3 mA
Electric Life
Terminal Intensity More than 1.2 N m
Resistive Load (Pf = 1)Inductive Load (Pf: more than 0.6)Incandescent lamp LoadFluorescent lamp Load (containing electronic ballast)High intensity Discharged lamp Load
Insulation Resistance
Between live parts and non-live partsBetween live parts of different polarityBetween live parts and signal terminals
More than 10MΩ
Electric Strength
Between live parts and non-live partsBetween live parts of different polarityBetween live parts and signal terminals
2000 V/min.
10 A AC 250 V 1,000,000 cycles10 A AC 250 V 200,000 cycles10 A AC 250 V 200,000 cycles10 A AC 250 V 200,000 cycles
10 A AC 250 V 200,000 cycles
From ±18 V to ±30 V
Temperature Rise Main contact Less than 65
Relay Selecting Chart by Load Capacity
15 16
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Circuit Design for 6A 10A Contact Output T/U (Dip Switch)Features
6A,10A Contact Output Terminal Units do not require a transformer, thus allowing more compact relay control panels.
Mounting space can be reduced to half.• The use of 6A,10A Contact Output T/Us does not require a transformer. T/U relay itself is one unit, thus reduction of
space and cost can be achieved.
Set addresses using the dip switches on the T/U. (Set address may be visually confirmed.) (For address settings, see page 33.)
• FeaturesDifferent load channel can be set to a Single Relay Control T/U (or a Single 6A Contact Output T/U)For the address setting method, see page 38.
Note: Do NOT use with HID loads. (6A Contact Output T/U) Use 20A HID Relay. or 10A Contact Output T/U.
For Small-capacity Load (6A max. or 10A max.) per Circuit
WR34169-86A Contact Output T/U(Single Pole) (4-Circuit)
WR3442-810A Contact Output T/U (4-Circuit)
• 20A HID Relay • 10A Contact Output T/U
WRT41249-86A Contact Output T/U(Single Pole) (4-Circuit)(Infrared I/O)
WRT4014-8Relay Control T/U(4-Circuit) (Infrared I/O)
0-1
0-3
0-2
0-4
Ry1
Ry3
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
RedBlue
RedBlue
Ry2
Ry41
3
2
4
Lightingfixture
WR6161K-820A HID Relay
WR2311-851Transformer
WR3400-8 Relay Control T/U
WR6161K-820A HID Relay
0ch
0-40-30-20-1
WR3442-810A Contact Output T/U(4-Circuit)
0ch
• 6A Contact Output T/U (Single Pole) (WR34169-8)• 10A Contact Output T/U (Single Pole) (WR3442-8)
Wiring Diagram
Circuit Design for Relay Control T/U (Infrared I/O) and 6A Contact Output T/U (Infrared I/O)
Power source
Powersource
WRT2050-80Transmisson Unit
WR3442-810A Contact Output T/U(4-Circuit)
Lightingfixture
To switch/relay control panel
FULL-2WAY signal line
11 0
1248
1632
22 43 64 8
1357
Load numbers1-4-fixed
Load channel2+8=ch.10
Sign
al
Mode
Addresssetting
P • G SET
Initial
Individual
Individual
IndividualSpecial
Switch
ControlledLoad TimerAddress
number ON/OFF
T/U input Relay T/U Dimmer T/U
Dimmer level
Low BatteryIndication
7654321
Individual
WRT9600-8 LCD Panel
Amplifier
Ex. 50 circuits (signal current consumption)Relay control T/U WR3400-8 1.2mA X 13Selector switch section Individual switches WRT5554K-8 9mA X 13 Pattern switch WRT5554K-8 9mA X 1 Program setting unit WRT5850-8 5mA X 1Local switches WRT5551K-8 6mA X 50
Total signal current consumption...431mA
• Output signal current from a Transmission Unit is 500mA. Be sure to use an Amplifier when the total signal current of components, such as Switches and Relay Control T/Us, exceeds 500mA.(For signal current of Switches and Terminal Units, see their respective ratings in the "Products" section.)
• A 500mA signal current is supplied per Amplifier.• A signal current of 3000mA can be supplied when the maximum of five
Amplifiers are installed in a system.
• Transmission Unit to Amplifier A1 +Transmission Unit to Amplifier B1 <500mA• Amplifier A1 to Amplifier A2 <500mA• Transmission Unit to Amplifier A5 <3000mA
Type of electric wire
The total wiring length should be a maximum of three times of the length of the longest wire.
Maximum wiring length (Max. distance from a Transmission Unit to components, e.g. switch or T/U)
500m
300m
250m
100m
Electric wire diameter and wiring length
Power source
Power source Power source
Power source
Power source
T/U and switch
T/U and switch
T/U and switch
T/U and switch
FULL-2WAY signal line ¡Star wiring is also possible.
T/U and switch
WRT2050-80Transmisson Unit
WR3913K-80Amplifier
WR3913K-80Amplifier
WR3913K-80Amplifier
WR3913K-80Amplifier
¡Up to 5 Amplifiers can be connected per line.
¡Make Amplifier installation to ensuremaximum signal current between theTransmission Unit and an Amplifier,and between Amplifiers, is 500mA.
A1 B1
A2
A5
InputO
utputO
utputnput
Output
nput
nputO
utpu
100-242V AC
Sign
al
100-242V AC
A B
C
E
Powersource
Powersource
WRT2050-80Transmisson Unit
WR3913K-80Amplifier In
put
Out
put
D
FULL-2WAYsignal line
WR3913K-80Amplifier
(1) Calculation method for FULL-2WAY signal current
Example Under Wiring Method (1)
(2) Calculation method for FULL-2WAY signal wire length
It is recommended, when using infrared I/O Switches, to install one Amplifier per approx 50 relay circuits.
1.6mm– 1.2mm (2.0mm2–1.25mm2)
1.0mm (1.0mm2)
0.9mm (0.75mm2)
0.65mm (0.5mm2)
It is recommended that communication cable (CPEV) be used for signal lines to differentiate them from power lines and prevent their miswiring, though general-purpose electric wires can be used for signal line.
Signal wires: 1.2mm diameter, 1.25mm2 or more• Maximum wiring length: Wiring length of A + B + C or A + B + D + E
is 500m max.• Total wiring length: Total wiring length of A + B + C + D + E is 1,500m
max.Installation of an Amplifier can extend 500m for the max wiring length and 1,500m total length.When a maximum number of five Amplifiers are used in a system, wiring can be extended to 3,000m for the maximum wire distance, and 9,000m for total wire length.
Wiring method (2)
Wiring method (2)
Address Setting for 6A 10A Contact Output T/U (4-Circuit)
0-40-30-20-1
0ch
17 18
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Circuit Design for 6A 10A Contact Output T/U (Dip Switch)Features
6A,10A Contact Output Terminal Units do not require a transformer, thus allowing more compact relay control panels.
Mounting space can be reduced to half.• The use of 6A,10A Contact Output T/Us does not require a transformer. T/U relay itself is one unit, thus reduction of
space and cost can be achieved.
Set addresses using the dip switches on the T/U. (Set address may be visually confirmed.) (For address settings, see page 33.)
• FeaturesDifferent load channel can be set to a Single Relay Control T/U (or a Single 6A Contact Output T/U)For the address setting method, see page 38.
Note: Do NOT use with HID loads. (6A Contact Output T/U) Use 20A HID Relay. or 10A Contact Output T/U.
For Small-capacity Load (6A max. or 10A max.) per Circuit
WR34169-86A Contact Output T/U(Single Pole) (4-Circuit)
WR3442-810A Contact Output T/U (4-Circuit)
• 20A HID Relay • 10A Contact Output T/U
WRT41249-86A Contact Output T/U(Single Pole) (4-Circuit)(Infrared I/O)
WRT4014-8Relay Control T/U(4-Circuit) (Infrared I/O)
0-1
0-3
0-2
0-4
Ry1
Ry3
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
RedBlue
RedBlue
Ry2
Ry41
3
2
4
Lightingfixture
WR6161K-820A HID Relay
WR2311-851Transformer
WR3400-8 Relay Control T/U
WR6161K-820A HID Relay
0ch
0-40-30-20-1
WR3442-810A Contact Output T/U(4-Circuit)
0ch
• 6A Contact Output T/U (Single Pole) (WR34169-8)• 10A Contact Output T/U (Single Pole) (WR3442-8)
Wiring Diagram
Circuit Design for Relay Control T/U (Infrared I/O) and 6A Contact Output T/U (Infrared I/O)
Power source
Powersource
WRT2050-80Transmisson Unit
WR3442-810A Contact Output T/U(4-Circuit)
Lightingfixture
To switch/relay control panel
FULL-2WAY signal line
11 0
1248
1632
22 43 64 8
1357
Load numbers1-4-fixed
Load channel2+8=ch.10
Sign
al
Mode
Addresssetting
P • G SET
Initial
Individual
Individual
IndividualSpecial
Switch
ControlledLoad TimerAddress
number ON/OFF
T/U input Relay T/U Dimmer T/U
Dimmer level
Low BatteryIndication
7654321
Individual
WRT9600-8 LCD Panel
Amplifier
Ex. 50 circuits (signal current consumption)Relay control T/U WR3400-8 1.2mA X 13Selector switch section Individual switches WRT5554K-8 9mA X 13 Pattern switch WRT5554K-8 9mA X 1 Program setting unit WRT5850-8 5mA X 1Local switches WRT5551K-8 6mA X 50
Total signal current consumption...431mA
• Output signal current from a Transmission Unit is 500mA. Be sure to use an Amplifier when the total signal current of components, such as Switches and Relay Control T/Us, exceeds 500mA.(For signal current of Switches and Terminal Units, see their respective ratings in the "Products" section.)
• A 500mA signal current is supplied per Amplifier.• A signal current of 3000mA can be supplied when the maximum of five
Amplifiers are installed in a system.
• Transmission Unit to Amplifier A1 +Transmission Unit to Amplifier B1 <500mA• Amplifier A1 to Amplifier A2 <500mA• Transmission Unit to Amplifier A5 <3000mA
Type of electric wire
The total wiring length should be a maximum of three times of the length of the longest wire.
Maximum wiring length (Max. distance from a Transmission Unit to components, e.g. switch or T/U)
500m
300m
250m
100m
Electric wire diameter and wiring length
Power source
Power source Power source
Power source
Power source
T/U and switch
T/U and switch
T/U and switch
T/U and switch
FULL-2WAY signal line ¡Star wiring is also possible.
T/U and switch
WRT2050-80Transmisson Unit
WR3913K-80Amplifier
WR3913K-80Amplifier
WR3913K-80Amplifier
WR3913K-80Amplifier
¡Up to 5 Amplifiers can be connected per line.
¡Make Amplifier installation to ensuremaximum signal current between theTransmission Unit and an Amplifier,and between Amplifiers, is 500mA.
A1 B1
A2
A5
InputO
utputO
utputnput
Output
nput
nputO
utpu
100-242V AC
Sign
al
100-242V AC
A B
C
E
Powersource
Powersource
WRT2050-80Transmisson Unit
WR3913K-80Amplifier In
put
Out
put
D
FULL-2WAYsignal line
WR3913K-80Amplifier
(1) Calculation method for FULL-2WAY signal current
Example Under Wiring Method (1)
(2) Calculation method for FULL-2WAY signal wire length
It is recommended, when using infrared I/O Switches, to install one Amplifier per approx 50 relay circuits.
1.6mm– 1.2mm (2.0mm2–1.25mm2)
1.0mm (1.0mm2)
0.9mm (0.75mm2)
0.65mm (0.5mm2)
It is recommended that communication cable (CPEV) be used for signal lines to differentiate them from power lines and prevent their miswiring, though general-purpose electric wires can be used for signal line.
Signal wires: 1.2mm diameter, 1.25mm2 or more• Maximum wiring length: Wiring length of A + B + C or A + B + D + E
is 500m max.• Total wiring length: Total wiring length of A + B + C + D + E is 1,500m
max.Installation of an Amplifier can extend 500m for the max wiring length and 1,500m total length.When a maximum number of five Amplifiers are used in a system, wiring can be extended to 3,000m for the maximum wire distance, and 9,000m for total wire length.
Wiring method (2)
Wiring method (2)
Address Setting for 6A 10A Contact Output T/U (4-Circuit)
0-40-30-20-1
0ch
17 18
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
•Dimensions (units: mm)
Symbol indiagramModel No. Description Rating Remarks
•Dimensions (units: mm)
Symbol indiagramModel No. Description Rating Remarks
• Signal current: Rated input signal current (Name displayed on units) • Signal current: Rated input signal current (Name displayed on units)
Switches
Notice: Our remote control system products are not compatible with those of other manufacturers and should not be used in combination with any such products. Always use Matsushita Electric Co. Ltd. remote control relays, breakers and transformers.Always use WRT**** series Transmission Unit when using infrared I/O address type components.
Switches (COSMO Module) ... For applicable plates, see page 29.
•RSignal current6 mAWRT5501WK-8 Switch (1) (Infrared I/O)
(COSMO Module) (White)
•R2Signal current8 mAWRT5502WK-8 Switch (2) (Infrared I/O)
(COSMO Module) (White)
•R3Signal current10 mAWRT5503WK-8
Switch (3) (Infrared I/O)(COSMO Module) (White)
•R4Signal current12 mAWRT5504WK-8 Switch (4) (Infrared I/O)
(COSMO Module) (White)
Applicable toCOSMO Module1-Gangswitch plates(Non volatilememory used)
(1)
WRT5501WK-8
(2)
WRT5502WK-8
(4)
WRT5504WK-8
(3)
WRT5503WK-8
WRT5502WK-8
WRT5503WK-8 WRT5504WK-8
42.4
101
110
91.4
69
4525.2 24.9
0.79.5 20.7
83.5
42.4
101
110
91.4
69
4525.2 24.9
0.79.5 20.7
83.5
42.4
101
110
91.4
69
4525.2 24.9
0.79.5 20.7
83.5
WRT5501WK-8
42.4
101
110
91.4
69
4525.2 24.9
0.79.5 20.7
I/O point
83.5
WRT5731WK-8
42.4
101
110
91.4
69
4525.2 24.9
0.79.5 20.7WRT5731WK-8
(1)
WRT5551K-8
WRT5552K-8
WRT5553K-8
(3)
(2)
(4)
WRT5554K-8
MRSignal current10 mAWRT5771K-8
Dimmer Switch(Infrared I/O Type)(FULL-COLOR Module)
WRT5771K-8
Applicable toCOSMO Moduleswitch plates(1-Gang)(Non-volatilememory used)
Signal current10 mAWRT5731WK-8
Dimmer Switch(Infrared I/O Type) (COSMO Module) (White)
MR
WRT5551K-8 •RSwitch (1)(Infrared I/O)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Applicable toFULL-COLORplates(1)(Non-volatilememory used)
Signal current6 mA
WRT5552K-8 •R2Switch (2)(Infrared I/O)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Signal current7 mA
WRT5554K-8 •R4Switch (4)(Infrared I/O)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Signal current9 mA
WRT5553K-8 •R3Switch (3)(Infrared I/O)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Signal current8 mA
Switches (FULL-COLOR Module) ... For applicable plates, see page 30.
Applicable toFULL-COLOR plates (3)(Non-volatilememory used)
WRT5850-8
Program Setting Unit ... For setting details, please see pages 39.
WRT5850-8 •RSProgram Setting Unit(FULL-COLOR Module)
Signal current5 mA
Use TransmissionUnit WRT2050-80seriesApplicable toFULL-COLORplates (3)
This device should not be installed in a location where people can easily manipulate
WRT5850-8
83.5
110
101
68.7 72
2822.5 23.5
3.77.8
11.8
827.4
Master Switches (Surface Mount)
(44 circuits)
WRT6144WK-8
WRT6024WK-8
(20 circuits)
WRT6120WK-8
(24 circuits)
WRT6120WK-8 WRT6144WK-8
WRT6168WK-8
WRT6024WK-8 WRT6048WK-8
WRT6072WK-8
641
2541
8
120
641
2541
8
95215
641
2541
8
9595310
641
2541
8
120
641
2541
8
95215
641
2541
8
9595310
Surface-mounttype(Non-volatilememory used)
R68RS
Master Switch (72)(Infrared I/O)WRT6072WK-8
Master Switch (48)(Infrared I/O)
Signal current216 mA
Signal current144 mAWRT6048WK-8
R48
Master Switch (24)(Infrared I/O)
Signal current72 mAWRT6024WK-8 R24
Master Switch (68)(Infrared I/O)(with Program Setting Unit)
Signal current209 mAWRT6168WK-8
R44RS
Master Switch (44)(Infrared I/O)(with Program Setting Unit)
Signal current137 mAWRT6144WK-8
R20RS
Master Switch (20)(Infrared I/O)(with Program Setting Unit)
Signal current65 mAWRT6120WK-8
R72
Switches, Setting Devices
COSMO Moduleappellation card size(solid color)
23.5
9.5
Switches (Eight Free Module) ... For details of plates to use, see page 29.
(1)
(4)(3)
(8)
WRT5518-8
WRT5514-8WRT5513-8
WRT5512-8WRT5511-8
(2)
•RWRT5511-8Switch (1)(Infrared I/O)(Eight Free Module)
Signal current:6 mA
WRT5512-8Switch (2)(Infrared I/O)(Eight Free Module)
Signal current:7 mA •R2
Applicable to
Plates (1-Gang)WRT5513-8
Switch (3)(Infrared I/O)(Eight Free Module)
Signal current:8 mA •R3
WRT5514-8Switch (4)(Infrared I/O)(Eight Free Module)
Signal current:9 mA •R4
WRT5518-8Switch (8)(Infrared I/O)(Eight Free Module)
Signal current:14 mA R8
91.4
69
9.3 20.7
42.4
101
110
4525.2 24.9
WRT5514-8
WRT5518-8
Eight Freeappellation card size
38
9
42.410
111
045
25.2 24.9
42.4
101
110
4525.2 24.9
42.410
111
045
25.2 24.9
42.4
101
110
4525.2 24.9
WRT5511-8 WRT5512-8
WRT5513-8
42.4
101
110
4525.2 24.9
I/O point
WRV5601S1-8
42.4
101
110
4525.2 24.9
WRV5602S1-8
42.4
101
110
4525.2 24.9
WRV5603S1-8
42.4
101
110
4525.2 24.9
WRV5604S1-8
101
42.4
110
4525.2 24.9
WRV5831S1-8
Switches (GLACIER Series) ... For details of plates to use, see page 29.
(1)
(4)
WRV5604S1-8
WRV5602S1-8WRV5601S1-8
(2)
•RWRV5601S1-8
Switch (1)(Infrared I/O)(GLACIER Series)(Silver Gray)
Signal current:6 mA
WRV5602S1-8
Switch (2)(Infrared I/O)(GLACIER Series)(Silver Gray)
Signal current:8 mA •R2 Applicable to
GLACIER SeriesPlates (1-Gang)
(Non-volatilememory used)
Appellationcard cannotbe mounted.
WRV5603S1-8
Switch (3)(Infrared I/O)(GLACIER Series)(Silver Gray)
Signal current:10 mA •R3
WRV5604S1-8
Switch (4)(Infrared I/O)(GLACIER Series)(Silver Gray)
Signal current:12 mA •R4
WRV5831S1-8
Dimmer Switch(Infrared I/O)(GLACIER Series)(Silver Gray)
Signal current:10 mA MR
WRT92619-8
WRT92619-8
LCD Appellation Touch Switch
Rated Current Consumption200 mARated Signal Current Consumption15 mA
R24
LCD Appellation Touch Switch ... For details of plates to use, see page 29. WRT92619-8
91.4
9.8 28.7
30
69101
110
88.44625.2 24.9
83.5
71.7
54.5
WRT5771K-8
I/O point
WRT5551K-8 WRT5552K-8
WRT5553K-8 WRT5554K-8
I/OpointI/O
point
I/Opoint
I/Opoint
FULL-COLOR appellationcard size(solid color)
19.4
9.4
4428
820
.722
.7
83.5
110
2822.5 23.5
68.7 72
7.88
20.9
83.5
110
2822.5 23.5
68.7 72
7.88
20.9
83.5
110
2822.5 23.5
68.7 72
7.88
20.9
83.5
110
101
2822.5 23.5
68.7 72
7.88
20.9
Products
19 20
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
•Dimensions (units: mm)
Symbol indiagramModel No. Description Rating Remarks
•Dimensions (units: mm)
Symbol indiagramModel No. Description Rating Remarks
• Signal current: Rated input signal current (Name displayed on units) • Signal current: Rated input signal current (Name displayed on units)
Switches
Notice: Our remote control system products are not compatible with those of other manufacturers and should not be used in combination with any such products. Always use Matsushita Electric Co. Ltd. remote control relays, breakers and transformers.Always use WRT**** series Transmission Unit when using infrared I/O address type components.
Switches (COSMO Module) ... For applicable plates, see page 29.
•RSignal current6 mAWRT5501WK-8 Switch (1) (Infrared I/O)
(COSMO Module) (White)
•R2Signal current8 mAWRT5502WK-8 Switch (2) (Infrared I/O)
(COSMO Module) (White)
•R3Signal current10 mAWRT5503WK-8
Switch (3) (Infrared I/O)(COSMO Module) (White)
•R4Signal current12 mAWRT5504WK-8 Switch (4) (Infrared I/O)
(COSMO Module) (White)
Applicable toCOSMO Module1-Gangswitch plates(Non volatilememory used)
(1)
WRT5501WK-8
(2)
WRT5502WK-8
(4)
WRT5504WK-8
(3)
WRT5503WK-8
WRT5502WK-8
WRT5503WK-8 WRT5504WK-8
42.4
101
110
91.4
69
4525.2 24.9
0.79.5 20.7
83.5
42.4
101
110
91.4
69
4525.2 24.9
0.79.5 20.7
83.5
42.4
101
110
91.4
69
4525.2 24.9
0.79.5 20.7
83.5
WRT5501WK-8
42.4
101
110
91.4
69
4525.2 24.9
0.79.5 20.7
I/O point
83.5
WRT5731WK-8
42.4
101
110
91.4
69
4525.2 24.9
0.79.5 20.7WRT5731WK-8
(1)
WRT5551K-8
WRT5552K-8
WRT5553K-8
(3)
(2)
(4)
WRT5554K-8
MRSignal current10 mAWRT5771K-8
Dimmer Switch(Infrared I/O Type)(FULL-COLOR Module)
WRT5771K-8
Applicable toCOSMO Moduleswitch plates(1-Gang)(Non-volatilememory used)
Signal current10 mAWRT5731WK-8
Dimmer Switch(Infrared I/O Type) (COSMO Module) (White)
MR
WRT5551K-8 •RSwitch (1)(Infrared I/O)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Applicable toFULL-COLORplates(1)(Non-volatilememory used)
Signal current6 mA
WRT5552K-8 •R2Switch (2)(Infrared I/O)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Signal current7 mA
WRT5554K-8 •R4Switch (4)(Infrared I/O)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Signal current9 mA
WRT5553K-8 •R3Switch (3)(Infrared I/O)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Signal current8 mA
Switches (FULL-COLOR Module) ... For applicable plates, see page 30.
Applicable toFULL-COLOR plates (3)(Non-volatilememory used)
WRT5850-8
Program Setting Unit ... For setting details, please see pages 39.
WRT5850-8 •RSProgram Setting Unit(FULL-COLOR Module)
Signal current5 mA
Use TransmissionUnit WRT2050-80seriesApplicable toFULL-COLORplates (3)
This device should not be installed in a location where people can easily manipulate
WRT5850-8
83.5
110
101
68.7 72
2822.5 23.5
3.77.8
11.8
827.4
Master Switches (Surface Mount)
(44 circuits)
WRT6144WK-8
WRT6024WK-8
(20 circuits)
WRT6120WK-8
(24 circuits)
WRT6120WK-8 WRT6144WK-8
WRT6168WK-8
WRT6024WK-8 WRT6048WK-8
WRT6072WK-8
641
2541
8
120
641
2541
8
95215
641
2541
8
9595310
641
2541
8
120
641
2541
8
95215
641
2541
8
9595310
Surface-mounttype(Non-volatilememory used)
R68RS
Master Switch (72)(Infrared I/O)WRT6072WK-8
Master Switch (48)(Infrared I/O)
Signal current216 mA
Signal current144 mAWRT6048WK-8
R48
Master Switch (24)(Infrared I/O)
Signal current72 mAWRT6024WK-8 R24
Master Switch (68)(Infrared I/O)(with Program Setting Unit)
Signal current209 mAWRT6168WK-8
R44RS
Master Switch (44)(Infrared I/O)(with Program Setting Unit)
Signal current137 mAWRT6144WK-8
R20RS
Master Switch (20)(Infrared I/O)(with Program Setting Unit)
Signal current65 mAWRT6120WK-8
R72
Switches, Setting Devices
COSMO Moduleappellation card size(solid color)
23.5
9.5
Switches (Eight Free Module) ... For details of plates to use, see page 29.
(1)
(4)(3)
(8)
WRT5518-8
WRT5514-8WRT5513-8
WRT5512-8WRT5511-8
(2)
•RWRT5511-8Switch (1)(Infrared I/O)(Eight Free Module)
Signal current:6 mA
WRT5512-8Switch (2)(Infrared I/O)(Eight Free Module)
Signal current:7 mA •R2
Applicable to
Plates (1-Gang)WRT5513-8
Switch (3)(Infrared I/O)(Eight Free Module)
Signal current:8 mA •R3
WRT5514-8Switch (4)(Infrared I/O)(Eight Free Module)
Signal current:9 mA •R4
WRT5518-8Switch (8)(Infrared I/O)(Eight Free Module)
Signal current:14 mA R8
91.4
69
9.3 20.7
42.4
101
110
4525.2 24.9
WRT5514-8
WRT5518-8
Eight Freeappellation card size
38
9
42.4
101
110
4525.2 24.9
42.4
101
110
4525.2 24.9
42.4
101
110
4525.2 24.9
42.4
101
110
4525.2 24.9
WRT5511-8 WRT5512-8
WRT5513-8
42.4
101
110
4525.2 24.9
I/O point
WRV5601S1-8
42.4
101
110
4525.2 24.9
WRV5602S1-8
42.4
101
110
4525.2 24.9
WRV5603S1-8
42.4
101
110
4525.2 24.9
WRV5604S1-8
101
42.4
110
4525.2 24.9
WRV5831S1-8
Switches (GLACIER Series) ... For details of plates to use, see page 29.
(1)
(4)
WRV5604S1-8
WRV5602S1-8WRV5601S1-8
(2)
•RWRV5601S1-8
Switch (1)(Infrared I/O)(GLACIER Series)(Silver Gray)
Signal current:6 mA
WRV5602S1-8
Switch (2)(Infrared I/O)(GLACIER Series)(Silver Gray)
Signal current:8 mA •R2 Applicable to
GLACIER SeriesPlates (1-Gang)
(Non-volatilememory used)
Appellationcard cannotbe mounted.
WRV5603S1-8
Switch (3)(Infrared I/O)(GLACIER Series)(Silver Gray)
Signal current:10 mA •R3
WRV5604S1-8
Switch (4)(Infrared I/O)(GLACIER Series)(Silver Gray)
Signal current:12 mA •R4
WRV5831S1-8
Dimmer Switch(Infrared I/O)(GLACIER Series)(Silver Gray)
Signal current:10 mA MR
WRT92619-8
WRT92619-8
LCD Appellation Touch Switch
Rated Current Consumption200 mARated Signal Current Consumption15 mA
R24
LCD Appellation Touch Switch ... For details of plates to use, see page 29. WRT92619-8
91.4
9.8 28.7
30
69101
110
88.44625.2 24.9
83.5
71.7
54.5
WRT5771K-8
I/O point
WRT5551K-8 WRT5552K-8
WRT5553K-8 WRT5554K-8
I/OpointI/O
point
I/Opoint
I/Opoint
FULL-COLOR appellationcard size(solid color)
19.4
9.4
4428
820
.722
.7
83.5
110
2822.5 23.5
68.7 72
7.88
20.9
83.5
110
2822.5 23.5
68.7 72
7.88
20.9
83.5
110
2822.5 23.5
68.7 72
7.88
20.9
83.5
110
101
2822.5 23.5
68.7 72
7.88
20.9
Products
19 20
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
216
121
228
308
Mounting hole dimensions
2966-M5 tap
Squarehole
Central Control and Programming Unit ... For details, see page 55.
WRT9103K-89
Central Control andProgramming Unit(24V AC)
WRT9103K-89
Applicable fora flush-mountboxMWR7002(2 row/6 gang)
Rated Voltage24V AC Rated current consumption 600 mASignal current 15 mA
RS
WRT9103K-89
370258 42.4
1011.3
290
189
189
258
WRT9500K-8
WRT9600-8
Wireless Address Seting Unit ... For details, see page 36.
Wireless Programming Unit ... For details, see page 35.
WRT9500K-8 Wireless AddressSetting Unit
Ratedvoltage 6V DC(4 X AA sizebatteries)
Batteries notsuppliedBattery servicelife isapproximately500 operations
WRT9600-8Wireless Programming Unit(With Address SettingFunction)
RatedVoltage 6V DC (4 X AA sizebatteries) Signal current50 mA
Batteries notsuppliedBattery servicelife isapproximately500 operations
WRT9500K-8WRT9600-876.4
233.
3
26.4
500
76.4
233.
4
26.4
500
107
WRT5502WK-8
42.4
101
110
91.4
69
4525.2 24.9
0.79.5 20.7
83.5
WRT5501WK-8
42.4
101
110
91.4
69
4525.2 24.9
0.79.5 20.7
I/O point
83.5
•Dimensions (units: mm)
Transmission Units
Symbol indiagramModel No. Description Rating Remarks
• Signal current: Rated input signal current (Name displayed on units)
Transmission Unit(Panel Use) (100~242V AC)
(with powerfailure warranty)(Flash memoryused;)
CPU W
Rated voltage100~242V AC Power consumption30W Signal output current 500mAWRT2050-80
One unit per system isrequired as a CPU.
Amplifier (Panel Use) (100~242V AC)
Transmission Unit, Amplifire, Transformer
WR2301-811
4960
16.5
100
90
17
BlueW
hite AC23
0V
Transformer(Panel Use)(220V AC)(Output 24V Type)
Primary side 220V ACSecondary side22V AC, 1.5 A, 33 VA
R-Tr
Transformers No applicable model to UL are available
Transformer (Panel Use)(115V AC)
Primary side 115V ACSecondary side24V AC, 1.5 A, 36 VA
R-Tr
Rated voltage100~242V AC Power consumption 25W Signal current:15mASignal output current 500mA
WR3913K-80
AMP W
Use an Amplifier when current consumption exceeds 500mA, orwhen signal wire length exceeds 500 m.
Amplifier
100
90
WR3913K-8060
124.
8
Out
put
sign
alIn
put
sign
al
AC100-
242V
100
90
WRT2050-80 AC100-
242V
sign
al
60
124.
8WRT2050-80
WR3913K-80
WR2301-811
WR2311-851
•Dimensions (units: mm)
Symbol indiagramModel No. Description Rating Remarks
• Signal current: Rated input signal current (Name displayed on units)
Relay Control T/Us
WR3440K-8
WR3400-8
56
7.5
Signal line jumper(3 pcs.included)
Installation•Wooden board: Mount with wood screws.•DIN rail - Use WR3991-8.•Panel (medium-low): Mount with screws.
Signal
Signal
white
3.5 7 40
41
51
60.8
3.5
49.8
47
Lead
wire
leng
th
235
24.8
Signal
Signal
white
11 21 31 41label
90
1001 2
3 4
41 45 53
WRT4014-8
9070.5
WR3430-8
4.5 32 42
5224
.5
4143
Relay Control T/Us (Panel Use)(DIP Switch)
Lead wire type
WR3400-8
Terminal type
WR3440K-8
WR3430-8
Includes signalline jumper (Non-volatilememory used)
WRT4014-8Relay Control T/U(4-Circuit) (Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
Signal current2.3 mA Ry-T/U 4
Relay Control T/U (Panel Use)(Infrared I/O) ... For details, see page 15.
WRT4014-8
WR3440K-8 Relay Control T/U (4-Circuit) Signal current1.2 mA
Includes signalline jumperRy-T/U 4
WR3430-8 Relay Control T/U (1-Circuit) Signal current1.5 mA Ry-T/U
Includes signalline jumperWR3400-8 Relay Control T/U (4-Circuit) Signal current
1.2 mA Ry-T/U 4
70
46 614
17.3
30m
m m
ax.
105
66.7
83.5
Beam receiver
WRT1320-8
70
46 614
17.3
30m
m m
ax.
105
66.7
83.5
Beam receiver
WRT13906-8
Wireless Receivers
WRT1320-8
Wireless signal: 24V DCWireless Control ... For details, see page 51.
Master Wireless Control
Signal current15mAWRT1320-8
Operating ambientillumination notexceeding 5000Lx
Wireless Receiver (Ceiling and Flush Mount) R
20mA 24VWRT13906-8Master Wireless Switch Receiver (Infrared I/O)(Ceiling and Flush Mount)
25.2
6.7
WRT1511K-8WRT1514K-8
Appellation card size(solid color)
WRT1514K-8(Battery Type)
Rated voltageDC3V(2 X AAA batteries in use)
DC3V (2 X AAA batterries in use)
Batteries not includedBattery servicelife about oneyear (10operations/day)Non-volatilememory used
Batteries not includedBattery servicelife about oneyear (10operations/day)
WRT1514K-8
WRT1561K-8
WRT15919-8
Battery TypeWireless Switch (4)(Infrared I/O)
Battery Type Wireless Dimmer Switch (Infrared I/O)
DC3V (2 X AAA batterries in use)
Master Wireless Switch
R4
MR
WRT1511K-8Battery TypeWireless Switch (1)(Infrared I/O) R
68
66 1.617.8
161
0~90 approx
WRT13906-8
(Battery Type)WRT15919-8
Operating ambientillumination notexceeding 5000Lx
WRT15919-8
70
120 90
16.8 70
120
WR2301-811
WR2311-851
WR2311-851
4960
16.5
110
90
192A
Signal
Signal
white
1001 2
3 4Dip switch
90
42 46 54
Jumper bar(for 2 signal lines andwhite line) ,(3 pcs. included)
24.8
21 22
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
216
121
228
308
Mounting hole dimensions
2966-M5 tap
Squarehole
Central Control and Programming Unit ... For details, see page 55.
WRT9103K-89
Central Control andProgramming Unit(24V AC)
WRT9103K-89
Applicable fora flush-mountboxMWR7002(2 row/6 gang)
Rated Voltage24V AC Rated current consumption 600 mASignal current 15 mA
RS
WRT9103K-89
370258 42.4
1011.3
290
189
189
258
WRT9500K-8
WRT9600-8
Wireless Address Seting Unit ... For details, see page 36.
Wireless Programming Unit ... For details, see page 35.
WRT9500K-8 Wireless AddressSetting Unit
Ratedvoltage 6V DC(4 X AA sizebatteries)
Batteries notsuppliedBattery servicelife isapproximately500 operations
WRT9600-8Wireless Programming Unit(With Address SettingFunction)
RatedVoltage 6V DC (4 X AA sizebatteries) Signal current50 mA
Batteries notsuppliedBattery servicelife isapproximately500 operations
WRT9500K-8WRT9600-876.4
233.
3
26.4
500
76.4
233.
4
26.4
500
107
WRT5502WK-8
42.4
101
110
91.4
69
4525.2 24.9
0.79.5 20.7
83.5
WRT5501WK-8
42.4
101
110
91.4
69
4525.2 24.9
0.79.5 20.7
I/O point
83.5
•Dimensions (units: mm)
Transmission Units
Symbol indiagramModel No. Description Rating Remarks
• Signal current: Rated input signal current (Name displayed on units)
Transmission Unit(Panel Use) (100~242V AC)
(with powerfailure warranty)(Flash memoryused;)
CPU W
Rated voltage100~242V AC Power consumption30W Signal output current 500mAWRT2050-80
One unit per system isrequired as a CPU.
Amplifier (Panel Use) (100~242V AC)
Transmission Unit, Amplifire, Transformer
WR2301-811
4960
16.5
100
90
17
BlueW
hite AC23
0V
Transformer(Panel Use)(220V AC)(Output 24V Type)
Primary side 220V ACSecondary side22V AC, 1.5 A, 33 VA
R-Tr
Transformers No applicable model to UL are available
Transformer (Panel Use)(115V AC)
Primary side 115V ACSecondary side24V AC, 1.5 A, 36 VA
R-Tr
Rated voltage100~242V AC Power consumption 25W Signal current:15mASignal output current 500mA
WR3913K-80
AMP W
Use an Amplifier when current consumption exceeds 500mA, orwhen signal wire length exceeds 500 m.
Amplifier
100
90
WR3913K-8060
124.
8
Out
put
sign
alIn
put
sign
al
AC100-
242V
100
90
WRT2050-80 AC100-
242V
sign
al
60
124.
8
WRT2050-80
WR3913K-80
WR2301-811
WR2311-851
•Dimensions (units: mm)
Symbol indiagramModel No. Description Rating Remarks
• Signal current: Rated input signal current (Name displayed on units)
Relay Control T/Us
WR3440K-8
WR3400-8
56
7.5
Signal line jumper(3 pcs.included)
Installation•Wooden board: Mount with wood screws.•DIN rail - Use WR3991-8.•Panel (medium-low): Mount with screws.
Signal
Signal
white
3.5 7 40
41
51
60.8
3.5
49.8
47
Lead
wire
leng
th
235
24.8
Signal
Signal
white
11 21 31 41label
90
1001 2
3 4
41 45 53
WRT4014-8
9070.5
WR3430-8
4.5 32 42
5224
.5
4143
Relay Control T/Us (Panel Use)(DIP Switch)
Lead wire type
WR3400-8
Terminal type
WR3440K-8
WR3430-8
Includes signalline jumper (Non-volatilememory used)
WRT4014-8Relay Control T/U(4-Circuit) (Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
Signal current2.3 mA Ry-T/U 4
Relay Control T/U (Panel Use)(Infrared I/O) ... For details, see page 15.
WRT4014-8
WR3440K-8 Relay Control T/U (4-Circuit) Signal current1.2 mA
Includes signalline jumperRy-T/U 4
WR3430-8 Relay Control T/U (1-Circuit) Signal current1.5 mA Ry-T/U
Includes signalline jumperWR3400-8 Relay Control T/U (4-Circuit) Signal current
1.2 mA Ry-T/U 4
70
46 614
17.3
30m
m m
ax.
105
66.7
83.5
Beam receiver
WRT1320-8
70
46 614
17.3
30m
m m
ax.
105
66.7
83.5
Beam receiver
WRT13906-8
Wireless Receivers
WRT1320-8
Wireless signal: 24V DCWireless Control ... For details, see page 51.
Master Wireless Control
Signal current15mAWRT1320-8
Operating ambientillumination notexceeding 5000Lx
Wireless Receiver (Ceiling and Flush Mount) R
20mA 24VWRT13906-8Master Wireless Switch Receiver (Infrared I/O)(Ceiling and Flush Mount)
25.2
6.7
WRT1511K-8WRT1514K-8
Appellation card size(solid color)
WRT1514K-8(Battery Type)
Rated voltageDC3V(2 X AAA batteries in use)
DC3V (2 X AAA batterries in use)
Batteries not includedBattery servicelife about oneyear (10operations/day)Non-volatilememory used
Batteries not includedBattery servicelife about oneyear (10operations/day)
WRT1514K-8
WRT1561K-8
WRT15919-8
Battery TypeWireless Switch (4)(Infrared I/O)
Battery Type Wireless Dimmer Switch (Infrared I/O)
DC3V (2 X AAA batterries in use)
Master Wireless Switch
R4
MR
WRT1511K-8Battery TypeWireless Switch (1)(Infrared I/O) R
68
66 1.617.8
161
0~90 approx
WRT13906-8
(Battery Type)WRT15919-8
Operating ambientillumination notexceeding 5000Lx
WRT15919-8
70
120 90
16.8 70
120
WR2301-811
WR2311-851
WR2311-851
4960
16.5
110
90
192A
Signal
Signal
white
1001 2
3 4Dip switch
90
42 46 54
Jumper bar(for 2 signal lines andwhite line) ,(3 pcs. included)
24.8
21 22
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
•Dimensions (units: mm)
Symbol indiagramModel No. Description Rating Remarks
• Signal current: Rated input signal current (Name displayed on units)
20A HID Relays ... For details, see page 16. Power supply by Transformer required.
WR6161K-84
(Single pole)
WR6166-84
UL CSAWR6161K-84 20A HID Relay
(Single Pole)(Panel Use) R-Ry
UL CSAWR6166-84 20A HID Relay
(Double Pole)(Panel Use)R-Ry D
D
UL CSAWR61613K-84 DIN Type
20A HID Relay (Single Pole)(Panel Use) R-Ry
WR6166-84BlueRed 24
.560
106.5
90
ON
WR6166-8BlueRed 24
.560
106.5
90
ON
WR61663-8
BlueRed 24
.560
106.5
90
ON
WR6161K-8
(Double pole)
WR6166-8
20A HID Relay (Single Pole)(Panel Use)
Output side20 A 300V AC Input side:0.35 A 24V AC R-Ry
20A HID Relay (Double Pole)(JIS-Approved Dimensions(1), Panel Use)
Output side20 A 300V AC Input side:0.35 A 24V AC R-Ry D
D
Output side20 A 300V ACInput side0.35 A 24V ACAuxiliarycontact side:1A 125V AC
DIN Type20A HID Relay (Single Pole)(Panel Use) R-Ry
Output side300V AC, 20 AInput side:24V AC, 0.35 AAuxiliarycontact side:1A 125V AC
DIN Type20A HID Relay (Double Pole)(Panel Use) R-Ry D
D
WR6161K-8
24.5
60
90
96
BLUE
INP
UT
RED
OU
TPUT
WR61613K-8
24.5BL
UEIN
PU
TRE
D
OU
TPUT
AUXI
LIARY
90
96
60
WR61613K-84
24.5BL
UEIN
PU
TRE
D
OU
TPUT
AUXI
LIARY
90
96
60
WR6161K-84
60
90
96
24.5BL
UEIN
PU
TRE
D
OU
TPUT
10A Contact Output T/U ... For details, see page 17.
•Dimensions (units: mm)
Symbol indiagramModel No. Description Rating Remarks
• Signal current: Rated input signal current (Name displayed on units)
(Single pole)
WR34169-8
WR3426K-8
6A Contact Output T/U(Single Pole)(1-Circuit)(Panel Use)
Signal current1.5 mAOutput side6A 300V AC T/U-6A
6A Contact Output T/U(Single Pole)(4-Circuit)(Panel Use)
Includes Load jumper
Signal current1.2 mAOutput side6A 300V AC
4
T/U-6A 4
Signal current3 mAOutput side10A 250V AC
4
T/U-10A 4
6A Contact Output T/Us(Panel Use)(Infrared I/O) ... For details, see page 17.
WRT41249-8
6A Contact Output T/U(Single Pole) (4-Circuit)(Infrared I/O Type)(Panel Use)
Includes load jumper(non-volatile memory used)
Signal current2.3 mAOutput side6A 300V AC
4
T/U-6A 4
6A Contact Output T/Us(Panel Use)(DIP switch) ... For details, see page 17.
20A HID Relays ... For details, see page 16. Power supply by Transformer required.
480V 20A HID Relay (Double Pole) (Panel Use) R-Ry D
D
480V DIN Type 20A HID Relay (Double Pole)(Panel Use) R-Ry D
D
WR61663-84
BlueRed 24
.560
106.5
90
ON
WR3442-8
10A Contact Output T/U(Single Pole)(4 circuits)(Panel Use)
100
90
5324
.5
WR3426K-8
WR6172K-84
60
90
49.5
96
ON BL
UERE
D
WR61723K-84
60
90
49.5
96
ON
RED
BLUE
WR34169-8
13
57
24
68
90
10053
1.2
49.5
Jumper Plate(Load Terminal Side)
WR3442-8
908.2
49.5
73.5
114 1.9
WRT41249-8
Jumper Plate(Load Terminal Side)
100
53
90
49.5
WR6172K-84UL CSA
WR61723K-84UL CSA
Input 350mA 24 Vdc Reversible PolarityAuxiliary Contact 1A 125 Vac
Output Contacts UL20A 300 Vac(General Use)
CSA20A 347 Vac(General Use)
Input 350mA 24 Vdc Reversible PolarityAuxiliary Contact 1A 125 Vac
Output Contacts UL
20A 480 Vac(General Use)
CSA20A 347 Vac(General Use)
Input 350mA 24 Vdc Reversible Polarity
Output Contacts UL
20A 480 Vac(General Use)
CSA20A 347 Vac(General Use)
Input 350 24 Vdc Reversible Polarity
Output Contacts UL
30A 300 Vac(General Use)
CSA30A 347 Vac(General Use)
Input 350mA 24 Vdc Reversible PolarityAuxiliary Contact 1A 125 Vac
Output Contacts UL30A 300 Vac(General Use)
CSA30A 347 Vac(General Use)
DIN Type 20A HID Relay (Double Pole)(Panel Use) R-Ry D
DWR61663-84UL CSA
Input 350mA 24 Vdc Reversible PolarityAuxiliary Contact 1A 125 Vac
Output Contacts UL
20A 300 Vac(General Use)
CSA20A 347 Vac(General Use)
20A HID Relays
Note: 6A Contact Output T/Us cannot be used for HID loads. Use 20A HID Remote Control Relay.
20A HID Relays, Contact Output T/Us
See page 73 for selecting appropriate items.CSA Approved by CSA.UL Approved by UL. See page 73 for selecting appropriate items.CSA Approved by CSA.UL Approved by UL.
WR6161K-8
WR61613K-8
WR6166-8
WR61663-8
WR34169-8
WR3442-8
WR3426K-8
WRT41249-8
23 24
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
•Dimensions (units: mm)
Symbol indiagramModel No. Description Rating Remarks
• Signal current: Rated input signal current (Name displayed on units)
20A HID Relays ... For details, see page 16. Power supply by Transformer required.
WR6161K-84
(Single pole)
WR6166-84
UL CSAWR6161K-84 20A HID Relay
(Single Pole)(Panel Use) R-Ry
UL CSAWR6166-84 20A HID Relay
(Double Pole)(Panel Use)R-Ry D
D
UL CSAWR61613K-84 DIN Type
20A HID Relay (Single Pole)(Panel Use) R-Ry
WR6166-84BlueRed 24
.560
106.5
90
ON
WR6166-8BlueRed 24
.560
106.5
90
ON
WR61663-8
BlueRed 24
.560
106.5
90
ON
WR6161K-8
(Double pole)
WR6166-8
20A HID Relay (Single Pole)(Panel Use)
Output side20 A 300V AC Input side:0.35 A 24V AC R-Ry
20A HID Relay (Double Pole)(JIS-Approved Dimensions(1), Panel Use)
Output side20 A 300V AC Input side:0.35 A 24V AC R-Ry D
D
Output side20 A 300V ACInput side0.35 A 24V ACAuxiliarycontact side:1A 125V AC
DIN Type20A HID Relay (Single Pole)(Panel Use) R-Ry
Output side300V AC, 20 AInput side:24V AC, 0.35 AAuxiliarycontact side:1A 125V AC
DIN Type20A HID Relay (Double Pole)(Panel Use) R-Ry D
D
WR6161K-8
24.5
60
90
96
BLUE
INP
UT
RED
OU
TPUT
WR61613K-8
24.5BL
UEIN
PU
TRE
D
OU
TPUT
AUXI
LIARY
90
96
60
WR61613K-84
24.5BL
UEIN
PU
TRE
D
OU
TPUT
AUXI
LIARY
90
96
60
WR6161K-84
60
90
96
24.5BL
UEIN
PU
TRE
D
OU
TPUT
10A Contact Output T/U ... For details, see page 17.
•Dimensions (units: mm)
Symbol indiagramModel No. Description Rating Remarks
• Signal current: Rated input signal current (Name displayed on units)
(Single pole)
WR34169-8
WR3426K-8
6A Contact Output T/U(Single Pole)(1-Circuit)(Panel Use)
Signal current1.5 mAOutput side6A 300V AC T/U-6A
6A Contact Output T/U(Single Pole)(4-Circuit)(Panel Use)
Includes Load jumper
Signal current1.2 mAOutput side6A 300V AC
4
T/U-6A 4
Signal current3 mAOutput side10A 250V AC
4
T/U-10A 4
6A Contact Output T/Us(Panel Use)(Infrared I/O) ... For details, see page 17.
WRT41249-8
6A Contact Output T/U(Single Pole) (4-Circuit)(Infrared I/O Type)(Panel Use)
Includes load jumper(non-volatile memory used)
Signal current2.3 mAOutput side6A 300V AC
4
T/U-6A 4
6A Contact Output T/Us(Panel Use)(DIP switch) ... For details, see page 17.
20A HID Relays ... For details, see page 16. Power supply by Transformer required.
480V 20A HID Relay (Double Pole) (Panel Use) R-Ry D
D
480V DIN Type 20A HID Relay (Double Pole)(Panel Use) R-Ry D
D
WR61663-84
BlueRed 24
.560
106.5
90
ON
WR3442-8
10A Contact Output T/U(Single Pole)(4 circuits)(Panel Use)
100
90
5324
.5
WR3426K-8
WR6172K-84
60
90
49.5
96
ON BL
UERE
D
WR61723K-84
60
90
49.5
96
ON
RED
BLUE
WR34169-8
13
57
24
68
90
10053
1.2
49.5
Jumper Plate(Load Terminal Side)
WR3442-8
908.2
49.5
73.5
114 1.9
WRT41249-8
Jumper Plate(Load Terminal Side)
100
53
90
49.5
WR6172K-84UL CSA
WR61723K-84UL CSA
Input 350mA 24 Vdc Reversible PolarityAuxiliary Contact 1A 125 Vac
Output Contacts UL20A 300 Vac(General Use)
CSA20A 347 Vac(General Use)
Input 350mA 24 Vdc Reversible PolarityAuxiliary Contact 1A 125 Vac
Output Contacts UL
20A 480 Vac(General Use)
CSA20A 347 Vac(General Use)
Input 350mA 24 Vdc Reversible Polarity
Output Contacts UL
20A 480 Vac(General Use)
CSA20A 347 Vac(General Use)
Input 350 24 Vdc Reversible Polarity
Output Contacts UL
30A 300 Vac(General Use)
CSA30A 347 Vac(General Use)
Input 350mA 24 Vdc Reversible PolarityAuxiliary Contact 1A 125 Vac
Output Contacts UL30A 300 Vac(General Use)
CSA30A 347 Vac(General Use)
DIN Type 20A HID Relay (Double Pole)(Panel Use) R-Ry D
DWR61663-84UL CSA
Input 350mA 24 Vdc Reversible PolarityAuxiliary Contact 1A 125 Vac
Output Contacts UL
20A 300 Vac(General Use)
CSA20A 347 Vac(General Use)
20A HID Relays
Note: 6A Contact Output T/Us cannot be used for HID loads. Use 20A HID Remote Control Relay.
20A HID Relays, Contact Output T/Us
See page 73 for selecting appropriate items.CSA Approved by CSA.UL Approved by UL. See page 73 for selecting appropriate items.CSA Approved by CSA.UL Approved by UL.
WR6161K-8
WR61613K-8
WR6166-8
WR61663-8
WR34169-8
WR3442-8
WR3426K-8
WRT41249-8
23 24
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
•Dimensions (units: mm) •Dimensions (units: mm)Dimmer Units ... For details, see page 52.
Symbol indiagramModel No. Description Rating Remarks
Dimmer Switches ... For details, see page 52.Symbol indiagramModel No. Description Rating Remarks
• Signal current: Rated input signal current (Name displayed on units)• Signal current: Rated input signal current (Name displayed on units)
WRT4345-82
(for 500W)
Signal current 8 mAVoltageWRT4348-82(230V AC)Applicable loads40-800W
Dimmer Unit for 800W Incandescent Lamp(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
Forincandescentlamp only(Non-volatilememory used)
LC800
T/U-LC 800WRT4348-82
Signal current 8 mAVoltageWRT4345-82(230V AC)Applicable loads40-500W
Dimmer Unit for 500W Incandescent Lamp(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
Forincandescentlamp only(Non-volatilememory used)
LC500
T/U-LC 500WRT4345-82
WRT3224-8
WRT3211-8
Contact Input T/Us (infrared I/O) ... For details, See page 43.
input wiringdistance notexceeding 100 mNon-volatilememory used
WRT3211-8Contact Input T/U (1-Input)(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
Signal current5 mA 1input T/U
Input Signal 24V ACInput Signal Current normal 15mACurrent Consumption During Indication 50mA
Signal Line Monitoring Unit (Panel Use)WR39319-8
WR39319-8
outputinput
100
90
49.8
56
WR39319-8
WRT3224-8Contact Input T/U (4-Input)(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
4input T/U
input wiring distance notexceeding 100 mNon-volatile memory usedPower supply byTransformer required.
Signal current2.3 mA
Rated voltage24V ACRated current40 mA
( )
WRT3211-8
I/O point
24.5 15
57262.2
11 40.5
4.5
8
90
8.2
WRT3224-8
AC24V
Signal
inpu
t 1 13
57
24
68
inpu
t 2in
put 3
inpu
t 4
N1
N2
100
53
90
49.5
Terminal numbers 2, 4, 6, and 8 are the same in polarity.
WRT4741-82
See page 54for details.WRT4741-82
LED Dimmer Unit(Phase Control) (360VA, 220V AC)(Panel Use)
Signal current7 mA
Output Rating ・LED lamp -max. 360VA 220V AC -min. 16W 220V AC
・Incandescent lamp -max. 80W 220V AC -min. 16W 220V AC
( ) LC-T/U CON
Dimmer Control, Contact Input T/UDimmer Control
See page 73 for selecting appropriate items.UL Approved by UL.See page 73 for selecting appropriate items.UL Approved by UL.
WRT4345-82
100
90
532.2
49.5
Signal
outp
utAC
230V
N1
N2
WRT42444-8
WRT42444-8
WRT4348-82
100
90
572.2
74.5
Signal
outp
utAC
230V
N1
N2
3.4
124.
8
100
90
60
WRT3241-8
Input wiring distance not exceeding 100 m(Non-volatile memory used)See page 52for details.Transformer required.
WRT3241-8Dimmer Contact Input T/U(1-Input)(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
LC input T/U
Signal current2.3 mA
Rated voltage24V ACRated current30 mA
( )
WRT5771K-8
WRT5731WK-8
Signal current10 mAWRT5731WK-8
Dimmer Switch(Infrared I/O Type) (COSMO Module) (White)
Applicable toCOSMO Moduleswitch plates(1-Gang)(Non-volatilememory used)
MR
MRSignal current10 mAWRT5771K-8
Dimmer Switch(Infrared I/O Type)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Applicable toFULL-COLOR plates (3)(Non-volatilememory used)
Signal Line Monitoring Unit
WRT5731WK-8
42.4
101
110
91.4
69
4525.2 24.9
0.79.5 20.7
AC24V
Signal
1
6
35
7
24
68
N1
N2
100 53
90
WRT3241-8
49.55
43
21 D
OW
NO
N/O
FFU
P
WRT5771K-8
I/O point
83.5
110
101
2822.5 23.5
68.7 72
7.88
20.9
WRT42444-8Dimmer Unit(0 -10V DC)(4-Circuit) ( )
Signal current7 mA0-10V DC 100mA×4 Output
Rated voltage24V ACRated current300 mA
See page 53for details.LC-T/U CON 4
100 5710
5
74.5
1350
90
1313
WRT4741-82
WRT43415-82
(for 1500W)
Signal current 8 mAVoltageWRT43415-82(230V AC)Applicable loads40-1500W
Dimmer Unit for 1500W Incandescent Lamp(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
Forincandescentlamp only(Non-volatilememory used)
WRT43415-82 LC1500
T/U-LC 1500
WRT43415-82
146.
8
180
180
14860
34
34
Install the unit with output terminals downward.
25 26
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
•Dimensions (units: mm) •Dimensions (units: mm)Dimmer Units ... For details, see page 52.
Symbol indiagramModel No. Description Rating Remarks
Dimmer Switches ... For details, see page 52.Symbol indiagramModel No. Description Rating Remarks
• Signal current: Rated input signal current (Name displayed on units)• Signal current: Rated input signal current (Name displayed on units)
WRT4345-82
(for 500W)
Signal current 8 mAVoltageWRT4348-82(230V AC)Applicable loads40-800W
Dimmer Unit for 800W Incandescent Lamp(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
Forincandescentlamp only(Non-volatilememory used)
LC800
T/U-LC 800WRT4348-82
Signal current 8 mAVoltageWRT4345-82(230V AC)Applicable loads40-500W
Dimmer Unit for 500W Incandescent Lamp(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
Forincandescentlamp only(Non-volatilememory used)
LC500
T/U-LC 500WRT4345-82
WRT3224-8
WRT3211-8
Contact Input T/Us (infrared I/O) ... For details, See page 43.
input wiringdistance notexceeding 100 mNon-volatilememory used
WRT3211-8Contact Input T/U (1-Input)(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
Signal current5 mA 1input T/U
Input Signal 24V ACInput Signal Current normal 15mACurrent Consumption During Indication 50mA
Signal Line Monitoring Unit (Panel Use)WR39319-8
WR39319-8
outputinput
100
90
49.8
56
WR39319-8
WRT3224-8Contact Input T/U (4-Input)(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
4input T/U
input wiring distance notexceeding 100 mNon-volatile memory usedPower supply byTransformer required.
Signal current2.3 mA
Rated voltage24V ACRated current40 mA
( )
WRT3211-8
I/O point
24.5 15
57262.2
11 40.5
4.5
8
90
8.2
WRT3224-8
AC24V
Signal
inpu
t 1 13
57
24
68
inpu
t 2in
put 3
inpu
t 4
N1
N2
100
53
90
49.5
Terminal numbers 2, 4, 6, and 8 are the same in polarity.
WRT4741-82
See page 54for details.WRT4741-82
LED Dimmer Unit(Phase Control) (360VA, 220V AC)(Panel Use)
Signal current7 mA
Output Rating ・LED lamp -max. 360VA 220V AC -min. 16W 220V AC
・Incandescent lamp -max. 80W 220V AC -min. 16W 220V AC
( ) LC-T/U CON
Dimmer Control, Contact Input T/UDimmer Control
See page 73 for selecting appropriate items.UL Approved by UL.See page 73 for selecting appropriate items.UL Approved by UL.
WRT4345-82
100
90
532.2
49.5
Signal
outp
utAC
230V
N1
N2
WRT42444-8
WRT42444-8
WRT4348-82
100
90
572.2
74.5
Signal
outp
utAC
230V
N1
N2
3.4
124.
8
100
90
60
WRT3241-8
Input wiring distance not exceeding 100 m(Non-volatile memory used)See page 52for details.Transformer required.
WRT3241-8Dimmer Contact Input T/U(1-Input)(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
LC input T/U
Signal current2.3 mA
Rated voltage24V ACRated current30 mA
( )
WRT5771K-8
WRT5731WK-8
Signal current10 mAWRT5731WK-8
Dimmer Switch(Infrared I/O Type) (COSMO Module) (White)
Applicable toCOSMO Moduleswitch plates(1-Gang)(Non-volatilememory used)
MR
MRSignal current10 mAWRT5771K-8
Dimmer Switch(Infrared I/O Type)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Applicable toFULL-COLOR plates (3)(Non-volatilememory used)
Signal Line Monitoring Unit
WRT5731WK-8
42.4
101
110
91.4
69
4525.2 24.9
0.79.5 20.7
AC24V
Signal
1
6
35
7
24
68
N1
N2
100 53
90
WRT3241-8
49.55
43
21 D
OW
NO
N/O
FFU
P
WRT5771K-8
I/O point
83.5
110
101
2822.5 23.5
68.7 72
7.88
20.9
WRT42444-8Dimmer Unit(0 -10V DC)(4-Circuit) ( )
Signal current7 mA0-10V DC 100mA×4 Output
Rated voltage24V ACRated current300 mA
See page 53for details.LC-T/U CON 4
100 5710
5
74.5
1350
90
1313
WRT4741-82
WRT43415-82
(for 1500W)
Signal current 8 mAVoltageWRT43415-82(230V AC)Applicable loads40-1500W
Dimmer Unit for 1500W Incandescent Lamp(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
Forincandescentlamp only(Non-volatilememory used)
WRT43415-82 LC1500
T/U-LC 1500
WRT43415-82
146.
8
180
180
14860
34
34
Install the unit with output terminals downward.
25 26
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
•Dimensions (units: mm)Card Operation SwitchSymbol indiagramModel No. Description Rating Remarks
•Dimensions (units: mm)Passive Infrared Ceiling Units & Daylight Sensor ... See pages 46 and 47 for details.Symbol indiagramModel No. Description Rating Remarks
• Signal current: Rated input signal current (Name displayed on units) • Signal current: Rated input signal current (Name displayed on units)
9886
35
DIN Standard rail(Conforms to DIN4627 Blatt3, width 35 mm)
189.
124
.7
DIN rail mounting clip
WR3990-8
4.8
5.8116
25
2525
6 31
WR9910-8
WR3991-8 51
43 41 50
3.2
64.5 20.5
8.7
20.5
15 16.818 18
Accessories
WR3990-8 DIN Rail Mounter(Panel Use for Relay)
WR3991-8 DIN Rail Mounter (for Relay Control T/U)
WR9910-8 Mounting Strap (Panel Use for 10 Relays) 10 spaces
Insulated Mounting Strap(FULL-COLOR Module)WN3710-8
Insulated Mounting Strap(COSMO Module) WTF3710
Blank ChipWN3020-8WN3710-8
WR9910-8
WR3991-8
WR3990-8
WR3900RK-8WR3901RK-8
44
•Appellation plate and sheet are included to display the load names.•The lamp is an LED.
42
22.7
3228
27.2 35
.2
22.7
Appellation Indication Units (Dip Switch) ... For details, see page 57.
Applicable toFULL-COLORPlates (1)
Signal current10 mAWR3900RK-8
Appellation Indication Unit (Relay Status Indication Type)(Red)
R
WR3900RK-8Appellation Indication Unitwith T/U Function(Switch Contact Input T/U-linked Type) (Red)
Applicable toFULL-COLORPlates (1)
Signal current10 mAWR3901RK-8 T/U
Modbus Interface Units
Required toprepareprogrammingsoftware.
Rated voltage24V ACRated current consumption300mAOpen Communication Port : TCP/502
WRT2645K-8
WRT2645K-8
Open Protocol Interface Unit(Type-M TCP/IP)(Panel Use)
OPIUTCP/IP
OPIU
Required toprepareprogrammingsoftware.
Rated voltage24V ACRated current consumption300mACommunication Modbus protocol format(RTU Mode)
WRT2648-8
WRT2645K-8WRT2648-8
Open Protocol Interface Unit(Type-M)(Panel Use)
WR3891-8
60 80 31
70
Red LED off with card inserted
20 162212
560
WR3891-8
Signal current7 mAWR3891-8
Card Operation Switch(for Individual andGroup Control)
See page 57 for details.•RC
Program Timer Unit
Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit
WRT35409-8
See page 59for details.Transformerrequired.
Program Timer Unit(Astronomical Clock Type, 24V AC)WRT35409-8 RTM
Signal current15 mA
Rated voltage24V ACRated current350 mA
( )
WRT33649-8
WRT3394-8
WRT3395-8
WRT3657-8
WRT3367K-8Auxiliary Passive InfraredCeiling Unit(Wide Detection Area Type)(with Amplifier)
Signal current20 mADC 12V S
See page 48for details.WRT3657-8 Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit
(Infrared I/O)Signal current15 mA
SSR
WRT3365K-8Auxiliary Passive InfraredCeiling Unit(Wide Detection Area Type)
DC 12V S
WRT33649-8Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit(Infrared I/O)(with Photosensor)(Wide Detection Area Type)
Signal current20 mA
S R
WRT3394-8
Passive Infrared Sensor Switch(Infrared I/O)(Wall Mount)(with Photosensor)
Signal current20 mA
S R
WRT35409-8
100
99.5
6017
50
90
NotePassive Infrared Ceiling Unit is only available for lighting control. Do not use to control non-lighting loads such as electrical equipment, air conditioning equipment, and alarm systems. Doing so may cause malfunctions and lead to accident or injury.
Other Devices, AccessoriesSensors, Timer
WRT33749-8
WRT3375K-8Auxiliary Passive InfraredCeiling Unit(Flush Mount)
DC 12V S
WRT3395-8Auxiliary Passive Infrared Sensor Switch(Wall Mount)
DC 12V S
WRT33749-8Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit(Infrared I/O)(with Photosensor)
Signal current20 mA
S R
23.5
68.7
22.49.5
72
3022.5
28
110
WRT3394-8 WRT3395-8
68.7
22.4
72
23.522.5
28
110
27.6
WRT3365K-8
WRT33649-8
WRT33749-8
WRT3365K-8WRT3367K-8
WRT3655-8
WRT3655-8
Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit(with Separate Setting Unit)
Rated Signal Current 10 mA (Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit)
Consumption 15 mA (Separate Setting Unit)
See page 50for details.
SSR
•SSC
Ceiling
Separate Setting UnitDaylight Sensor Ceiling Unit
With plate removed
70 (Ceiling hole dimensions)
6983.5
83.5
101
110
91.4
25.2 24.9
239.442.445
83.5
10566.7
1914
.122
.6 31 42.9
WRT3655-8
124.
860
100
90±1
66.7105
83.5
25.5
34.546
11.2
11.1
70(Dimensions for mounting hole)
Ceiling
With plate removed
I/O point
25.5
34.546
14.2
11.1
70(Dimensions for mounting hole)
Ceiling
25.5
34.546
14.2
11.1
70(Dimensions for mounting hole)
Ceiling
WRT3657-8
83.5
Ceiling
4616
105
With plate removed
25.6
66.7
3411
.1
I/O point
70 (Ceiling hole dimensions)
66.7105
83.5
With plate removed
I/O point
66.7105
83.5
With plate removed
27 28
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
•Dimensions (units: mm)Card Operation SwitchSymbol indiagramModel No. Description Rating Remarks
•Dimensions (units: mm)Passive Infrared Ceiling Units & Daylight Sensor ... See pages 46 and 47 for details.Symbol indiagramModel No. Description Rating Remarks
• Signal current: Rated input signal current (Name displayed on units) • Signal current: Rated input signal current (Name displayed on units)
9886
35
DIN Standard rail(Conforms to DIN4627 Blatt3, width 35 mm)
189.
124
.7
DIN rail mounting clip
WR3990-8
4.8
5.8116
25
2525
6 31
WR9910-8
WR3991-8 51
43 41 50
3.2
64.5 20.5
8.7
20.5
15 16.818 18
Accessories
WR3990-8 DIN Rail Mounter(Panel Use for Relay)
WR3991-8 DIN Rail Mounter (for Relay Control T/U)
WR9910-8 Mounting Strap (Panel Use for 10 Relays) 10 spaces
Insulated Mounting Strap(FULL-COLOR Module)WN3710-8
Insulated Mounting Strap(COSMO Module) WTF3710
Blank ChipWN3020-8WN3710-8
WR9910-8
WR3991-8
WR3990-8
WR3900RK-8WR3901RK-8
44
•Appellation plate and sheet are included to display the load names.•The lamp is an LED.
42
22.7
3228
27.2 35
.2
22.7
Appellation Indication Units (Dip Switch) ... For details, see page 57.
Applicable toFULL-COLORPlates (1)
Signal current10 mAWR3900RK-8
Appellation Indication Unit (Relay Status Indication Type)(Red)
R
WR3900RK-8Appellation Indication Unitwith T/U Function(Switch Contact Input T/U-linked Type) (Red)
Applicable toFULL-COLORPlates (1)
Signal current10 mAWR3901RK-8 T/U
Modbus Interface Units
Required toprepareprogrammingsoftware.
Rated voltage24V ACRated current consumption300mAOpen Communication Port : TCP/502
WRT2645K-8
WRT2645K-8
Open Protocol Interface Unit(Type-M TCP/IP)(Panel Use)
OPIUTCP/IP
OPIU
Required toprepareprogrammingsoftware.
Rated voltage24V ACRated current consumption300mACommunication Modbus protocol format(RTU Mode)
WRT2648-8
WRT2645K-8WRT2648-8
Open Protocol Interface Unit(Type-M)(Panel Use)
WR3891-8
60 80 31
70
Red LED off with card inserted
20 162212
560
WR3891-8
Signal current7 mAWR3891-8
Card Operation Switch(for Individual andGroup Control)
See page 57 for details.•RC
Program Timer Unit
Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit
WRT35409-8
See page 59for details.Transformerrequired.
Program Timer Unit(Astronomical Clock Type, 24V AC)WRT35409-8 RTM
Signal current15 mA
Rated voltage24V ACRated current350 mA
( )
WRT33649-8
WRT3394-8
WRT3395-8
WRT3657-8
WRT3367K-8Auxiliary Passive InfraredCeiling Unit(Wide Detection Area Type)(with Amplifier)
Signal current20 mADC 12V S
See page 48for details.WRT3657-8 Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit
(Infrared I/O)Signal current15 mA
SSR
WRT3365K-8Auxiliary Passive InfraredCeiling Unit(Wide Detection Area Type)
DC 12V S
WRT33649-8Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit(Infrared I/O)(with Photosensor)(Wide Detection Area Type)
Signal current20 mA
S R
WRT3394-8
Passive Infrared Sensor Switch(Infrared I/O)(Wall Mount)(with Photosensor)
Signal current20 mA
S R
WRT35409-8
100
99.5
6017
50
90
NotePassive Infrared Ceiling Unit is only available for lighting control. Do not use to control non-lighting loads such as electrical equipment, air conditioning equipment, and alarm systems. Doing so may cause malfunctions and lead to accident or injury.
Other Devices, AccessoriesSensors, Timer
WRT33749-8
WRT3375K-8Auxiliary Passive InfraredCeiling Unit(Flush Mount)
DC 12V S
WRT3395-8Auxiliary Passive Infrared Sensor Switch(Wall Mount)
DC 12V S
WRT33749-8Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit(Infrared I/O)(with Photosensor)
Signal current20 mA
S R
23.5
68.7
22.49.5
72
3022.5
28
110
WRT3394-8 WRT3395-8
68.7
22.4
72
23.522.5
28
110
27.6
WRT3365K-8
WRT33649-8
WRT33749-8
WRT3365K-8WRT3367K-8
WRT3655-8
WRT3655-8
Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit(with Separate Setting Unit)
Rated Signal Current 10 mA (Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit)
Consumption 15 mA (Separate Setting Unit)
See page 50for details.
SSR
•SSC
Ceiling
Separate Setting UnitDaylight Sensor Ceiling Unit
With plate removed
70 (Ceiling hole dimensions)
6983.5
83.5
101
110
91.4
25.2 24.9
239.442.445
83.5
10566.7
1914
.122
.6 31 42.9
WRT3655-8
124.
860
100
90±1
66.7105
83.5
25.5
34.546
11.2
11.1
70(Dimensions for mounting hole)
Ceiling
With plate removed
I/O point
25.5
34.546
14.2
11.1
70(Dimensions for mounting hole)
Ceiling
25.5
34.546
14.2
11.1
70(Dimensions for mounting hole)
Ceiling
WRT3657-8
83.5
Ceiling
4616
105
With plate removed
25.6
66.7
3411
.1
I/O point
70 (Ceiling hole dimensions)
66.7105
83.5
With plate removed
I/O point
66.7105
83.5
With plate removed
27 28
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
No. of rows
No. of gangs
No. of circuits Model No.
3344455
6767867
728496
112128120140
(54) (63) (72) (84) (96) (90) (105)
WR35721-8WR3530841-8WR3540961-8WR3541121-8WR3541281-8WR3551201-8WR3551401-8
HolesizeNo.
No. of rows
No. of gangs
No. of circuits Model No.
5666778
8678788
160144168192196224256
(120) (108) (126) (144) (147) (168) (192)
WR3551601-8WR3561441-8WR3561681-8WR3561921-8WR3571961-8WR3572241-8WR3582561-8
HolesizeNo.
Dimensions (units: mm)
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (White)
WTC7101W-8 WTC7102W-8
WTC7103W-8
Model No.
WTC7101W-8
WTC7102W-8
WTC7122W-8
70
120
8.7
WTC7101W-8
120
116
WTC7102W-8
162
120
WTC7103W-8
Dimensions (units: mm)
208
120
WTC7104W-8
43.2
70
8.7
101
120
92.2
43.2 43.246
116
8.7
101
120
92.2
43.2 43.2 43.246 46
162
8.7
101
120
92.2
WTV6101S1-8 WTV6102S1-8
WTV6103S1-8
WTC9201K-8 WTC9202-8 WTC9203-8
WTC9204-8 WTC9205-8
WTC9206-8
WTV6101S1-8
WTV6102S1-8
WTV6103S1-8
GLACIER Series Plates applicable to Switches (GLACIER Type)
WTV6101S1-8
WTV6103S1-8
WTV6102S1-8
No. of rows
No. of gangs
No. of circuits Model No.
1222223
7456785
WR3510281-8WR3520321-8WR3520401-8WR35481-8WR3520561-8WR3520641-8WR3530601-8
28324048566460
(21) (24) (30) (36) (42) (48) (45)
HolesizeNo.
Special Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum)
For hole size No. see page 31.
FULL-COLOR Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum)
No. of rows No.of gangs No. of circuits
No. of rows No.of gangs No. of circuits
Model No.No. of rows No.of gangs No. of circuits
Model No.No. of rows No.of gangs No. of circuits
Model No.
11111111
11123456
124 812162024
(3 ) (6 ) (9 ) (12 ) (15 ) (18 )
WN7501-8WN7502-8WN7503-8WN7506-8WN7509-8WN7512-8WN7515-8WN7518-8
ーWN65029-8WN65039-8WN6506K-8WN6509K-8WN6512K-8WN6515K-8WN6518K-8
WN7501-8 WN7502-8WN65029-8
WN7503-8WN65039-8
WN7506-8WN6506K-8
WN7509-8WN6509K-8
WN7512-8WN6512K-8
WN7515-8WN6515K-8
WN7518-8WN6518K-8
Type I Type II (Screw Invisible)
FULL-COLOR Module Plates Applicable to Switches (White)
Decorative Plates
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
4
5
1
2
4(3)
12(9)
16(12)
20(15)
WN6001W-8
WN6002W-8
WN6003W-8
WN6009W-8
WN6012W-8
WN6015W-8
COSMO Module Plates, GLACIER Series Plates
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum)
WTC9201K-8
WTC9202-8
WTC9203-8
WTC9204-8
WTC9205-8
WTC9206-8
Dimensions (units: mm)
FULL-COLOR Module Plates
Special Plates
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1-4
2-8
3-12
1
2
3
4
5
6
1-4
2-8
3-12
4-16
5-20
6-24
1
2
2
1-4
2-8
2-8
Model No.
WTF3111W
WTF3112W
WTF3113W
WTF3111W WTF3112W WTF3113W
Dimensions (units: mm)
No. of rows No.of gangs No. of circuits
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4(3)
Model No.
Dimensions (units: mm)
No. of rows No.of gangs No. of circuits
FULL-COLOR Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Stainless Steel)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
2
4(3)
8(6)
12(9)
WN7601-8
WN7602-8
WN7603-8
WN7606-8
WN7609-8
Model No.
Dimensions (units: mm)
Dimensions (units: mm)
No. of rows No.of gangs No. of circuits
WN6002W-8WN6001W-8 WN6003W-8
WN7602-8
WN7501-8
WN7601-8 WN7603-8
WN65029-8
208
120
254
120
120
300
11670
120
8.7 162
120120
WTC9201K-8
WTC9203-8
WTC9202-8
70
120
23.2
28.5
46 69.2
70
120
23.2
28.5
46 69.2
162
70
120
23.2
28.5
46 69.2
116 162
116 162
208 254
208 254
300
WN6001W-8 WN6002W-8
WN6012W-8 WN6015W-8
WN6003W-8 WN6009W-8
WN7601-8 WN7602-8 WN7603-8
WN7606-8 WN7609-8
120
116
WTC7122W-8
WTC7104W-8
WTC7122W-8
91
42
91
42
91
42
WTF3111W WTF3112W WTF3113W
Plates
29 30
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
No. of rows
No. of gangs
No. of circuits Model No.
3344455
6767867
728496
112128120140
(54) (63) (72) (84) (96) (90) (105)
WR35721-8WR3530841-8WR3540961-8WR3541121-8WR3541281-8WR3551201-8WR3551401-8
HolesizeNo.
No. of rows
No. of gangs
No. of circuits Model No.
5666778
8678788
160144168192196224256
(120) (108) (126) (144) (147) (168) (192)
WR3551601-8WR3561441-8WR3561681-8WR3561921-8WR3571961-8WR3572241-8WR3582561-8
HolesizeNo.
Dimensions (units: mm)
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (White)
WTC7101W-8 WTC7102W-8
WTC7103W-8
Model No.
WTC7101W-8
WTC7102W-8
WTC7122W-8
70
120
8.7
WTC7101W-8
120
116
WTC7102W-8
162
120
WTC7103W-8
Dimensions (units: mm)
208
120
WTC7104W-8
43.2
70
8.7
101
120
92.2
43.2 43.246
116
8.7
101
120
92.2
43.2 43.2 43.246 46
162
8.7
101
120
92.2
WTV6101S1-8 WTV6102S1-8
WTV6103S1-8
WTC9201K-8 WTC9202-8 WTC9203-8
WTC9204-8 WTC9205-8
WTC9206-8
WTV6101S1-8
WTV6102S1-8
WTV6103S1-8
GLACIER Series Plates applicable to Switches (GLACIER Type)
WTV6101S1-8
WTV6103S1-8
WTV6102S1-8
No. of rows
No. of gangs
No. of circuits Model No.
1222223
7456785
WR3510281-8WR3520321-8WR3520401-8WR35481-8WR3520561-8WR3520641-8WR3530601-8
28324048566460
(21) (24) (30) (36) (42) (48) (45)
HolesizeNo.
Special Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum)
For hole size No. see page 31.
FULL-COLOR Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum)
No. of rows No.of gangs No. of circuits
No. of rows No.of gangs No. of circuits
Model No.No. of rows No.of gangs No. of circuits
Model No.No. of rows No.of gangs No. of circuits
Model No.
11111111
11123456
124 812162024
(3 ) (6 ) (9 ) (12 ) (15 ) (18 )
WN7501-8WN7502-8WN7503-8WN7506-8WN7509-8WN7512-8WN7515-8WN7518-8
ーWN65029-8WN65039-8WN6506K-8WN6509K-8WN6512K-8WN6515K-8WN6518K-8
WN7501-8 WN7502-8WN65029-8
WN7503-8WN65039-8
WN7506-8WN6506K-8
WN7509-8WN6509K-8
WN7512-8WN6512K-8
WN7515-8WN6515K-8
WN7518-8WN6518K-8
Type I Type II (Screw Invisible)
FULL-COLOR Module Plates Applicable to Switches (White)
Decorative Plates
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
4
5
1
2
4(3)
12(9)
16(12)
20(15)
WN6001W-8
WN6002W-8
WN6003W-8
WN6009W-8
WN6012W-8
WN6015W-8
COSMO Module Plates, GLACIER Series Plates
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum)
WTC9201K-8
WTC9202-8
WTC9203-8
WTC9204-8
WTC9205-8
WTC9206-8
Dimensions (units: mm)
FULL-COLOR Module Plates
Special Plates
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1-4
2-8
3-12
1
2
3
4
5
6
1-4
2-8
3-12
4-16
5-20
6-24
1
2
2
1-4
2-8
2-8
Model No.
WTF3111W
WTF3112W
WTF3113W
WTF3111W WTF3112W WTF3113W
Dimensions (units: mm)
No. of rows No.of gangs No. of circuits
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4(3)
Model No.
Dimensions (units: mm)
No. of rows No.of gangs No. of circuits
FULL-COLOR Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Stainless Steel)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
2
4(3)
8(6)
12(9)
WN7601-8
WN7602-8
WN7603-8
WN7606-8
WN7609-8
Model No.
Dimensions (units: mm)
Dimensions (units: mm)
No. of rows No.of gangs No. of circuits
WN6002W-8WN6001W-8 WN6003W-8
WN7602-8
WN7501-8
WN7601-8 WN7603-8
WN65029-8
208
120
254
120
120
300
11670
120
8.7 162
120120
WTC9201K-8
WTC9203-8
WTC9202-8
70
120
23.2
28.5
46 69.2
70
120
23.2
28.5
46 69.2
162
70
120
23.2
28.5
46 69.2
116 162
116 162
208 254
208 254
300
WN6001W-8 WN6002W-8
WN6012W-8 WN6015W-8
WN6003W-8 WN6009W-8
WN7601-8 WN7602-8 WN7603-8
WN7606-8 WN7609-8
120
116
WTC7122W-8
WTC7104W-8
WTC7122W-8
91
42
91
42
91
42
WTF3111W WTF3112W WTF3113W
Plates
29 30
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
1-3 Gangs
1-row
2-row
3-row
4-row
5-row
6-row
7-row
8-row
4 Gangs 5 Gangs 8 Gangs7 Gangs6 Gangs
1-6 gangs applicable to the standard flush mount boxes
Special Switch Plates
Special Switches Plates
Mounting method
Switch mounting hole dimensions for Special Switches Plates (In case a flush mount box is not used.)
1Mount Switch on Switch Mounting Frame from the rear using the screws.2Connect signal wires to Switches.3Mount Switch Mounting Frame on Box using Box screws.4Mount Plate using Plate screws.
Each extra space on a plate can be covered and more circuits can be added in the future
WN3020-8Blank Chip
Calculating Outside Dimension of Applicable Box to Relay Panel (Box (with Wood Board) Surface and Flush Mount)
(1)When 20A HID Relays used (2-line layout)
Outsidedimensions (mm)
Wiring space:
(1)When 6A,10A Contact Output T/U used (2-line layout)
Single poleDouble pole
24 circuits max.225mm min.275mm min.
Width450
Depth125
Width400
Depth125
Note: This applicable box is selected for a layout with no space for a terminal socket. Therefore, select an applicable box by taking into account a space for a terminal socket if installed.
LengthDimension a+ Wiring space
LengthDimension a + Wiring space
1
5
9
11
14
17
19
6
12
15
18
20
21
4
8
32
7
10
13
16
Using the WRT2050 series Transmission Unit
Bas
ic s
peci
ficat
ions
Bas
ic c
ontr
ol fu
nctio
ns
Transmission methodSignal wiresSignal voltageTransmission speedRelay activation timeOutput currentMax. number of circuits
Cyclic time sharing multiplex transmission with bit division and cut-in signal methodTwo wires with no polarity CPEV 1.2-1P 24VApprox. 15 msec / terminal unit (10 kbit/sec)0.2 sec max.500 mA(256 circuits (64 ch (T/U) X 4) + 16 dimmer circuits) / system
Signal transmissiondistance
Maximum signal wiring length 500 m; 1,500 m for total signal wire length (with 1.2 mm dia. wire of at least 1.25 mm2)(Using transmission unit and 5 amplifiers, signal wire distance is 3,000 m max. and total signal wire length is 9,000 m.)
Power failure backupInfrared I/O address setting: Recorded in non-volatile EEPROM memory of switches and T/U. Group and pattern control settings; Recorded in transmission unit. WRT2050 series uses flash memory; WRT2000K series uses non-volatile EEPROM.
Individual control1 circuit (1 remote control relay) on/offSwitch operation: Push to turn on, push to turn offSwitch display: On is red, off is greenMaximum possible: 256 circuits (+16 dimmer circuits) (on/off only)
Group control
Programmed multiple circuit units on/offSwitch operation: Push to turn on, push to turn offSwitch display: On is red, off is green(However, if overlapping control of individual units within groups is performed, the display shows the direction of the next control)Maximum possible: 127 groupsNo. of circuits to be controlled per group: 256 circuits (+16 dimmer circuits)
Pattern control
Optional control performed by combination setting of, for each circuit, on setting, off setting, and circuits not controlled Switch operation: Push once to change to the preset lighting pattern.Switch display: Red when patterns in effect, green when not in effectMaximum possible: 72 patternsNo. of circuits to be controlled per pattern: 256 circuits (+16 dimmer circuits)
Dimmer control(inverter fluorescent lamp)
Continuous dimming of contorollable ballast (0-10V dimmer signal type)Switch operation: Push to turn on, push to turn off (load on/off)
Continuous dimming by pushing up or downSwitch display: Red is on, green is offMaximum possible: 256 circuits including circuits using individual control and
incandescent lamp dimmingSwitch LED displays the dimming level (continuous dimming)In addition to dimmer switch, requires separate dimmer signal on/off switch
Dimmer control(incandescent lamp)
Incandescent lamp continuous dimming (500W, 800W, 1500W)Switch operation: Push to turn on, push to turn off (load on/off)
Continuous dimming by pushing up or downSwitch display: Red is on, green is offMaximum possible: 256 circuits including circuits using individual control and inverter
fluorescent lamp dimmer controlSwitch LED displays the dimming level (continuous dimming)
Group dimmer control
Continuous dimming of the programmed multiple dimmer circuitsSwitch operation: Push to turn on, push to turn off (multiple circuits on/off)
Push up, push down (multiple circuits)Switch display: Red is on, green is off(However, if overlapping control of individual units within groups is performed, the display shows the direction of the next control.)Maximum possible: 127 groups including number of group control usedNo. of circuits to be controlled per group: With dimmer circuits using individual addresses, 256
in combination with individual control
1: Recommended signal wire.2: Due to pulse signal duty cycle, the tester does not give an accurate display.
Electric wire diameter and length See page 18 for details.
Wire type Maximum length of wiring(Max. distance from a transmission unit to switch or T/U )
500 m
300 m
250 m
100 m
Total signal wire length should be less than 3 times the max. signal wire length.
Ambient temperature range -10 to 50
Switch operation Overlapping control
Add
ition
al c
ontr
ol fu
nctio
ns
1.2mm ~ 1.6mm (1.25 mm2~2.0 mm2)
1.0mm (1.0mm2)
0.9mm (0.75mm2)
0.65mm (0.5mm2)
Basic Specifications of FULL-2WAY Remote Control
31 32
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
1-3 Gangs
1-row
2-row
3-row
4-row
5-row
6-row
7-row
8-row
4 Gangs 5 Gangs 8 Gangs7 Gangs6 Gangs
1-6 gangs applicable to the standard flush mount boxes
Special Switch Plates
Special Switches Plates
Mounting method
Switch mounting hole dimensions for Special Switches Plates (In case a flush mount box is not used.)
1Mount Switch on Switch Mounting Frame from the rear using the screws.2Connect signal wires to Switches.3Mount Switch Mounting Frame on Box using Box screws.4Mount Plate using Plate screws.
Each extra space on a plate can be covered and more circuits can be added in the future
WN3020-8Blank Chip
Calculating Outside Dimension of Applicable Box to Relay Panel (Box (with Wood Board) Surface and Flush Mount)
(1)When 20A HID Relays used (2-line layout)
Outsidedimensions (mm)
Wiring space:
(1)When 6A,10A Contact Output T/U used (2-line layout)
Single poleDouble pole
24 circuits max.225mm min.275mm min.
Width450
Depth125
Width400
Depth125
Note: This applicable box is selected for a layout with no space for a terminal socket. Therefore, select an applicable box by taking into account a space for a terminal socket if installed.
LengthDimension a+ Wiring space
LengthDimension a + Wiring space
1
5
9
11
14
17
19
6
12
15
18
20
21
4
8
32
7
10
13
16
Using the WRT2050 series Transmission UnitB
asic
spe
cific
atio
nsB
asic
con
trol
func
tions
Transmission methodSignal wiresSignal voltageTransmission speedRelay activation timeOutput currentMax. number of circuits
Cyclic time sharing multiplex transmission with bit division and cut-in signal methodTwo wires with no polarity CPEV 1.2-1P 24VApprox. 15 msec / terminal unit (10 kbit/sec)0.2 sec max.500 mA(256 circuits (64 ch (T/U) X 4) + 16 dimmer circuits) / system
Signal transmissiondistance
Maximum signal wiring length 500 m; 1,500 m for total signal wire length (with 1.2 mm dia. wire of at least 1.25 mm2)(Using transmission unit and 5 amplifiers, signal wire distance is 3,000 m max. and total signal wire length is 9,000 m.)
Power failure backupInfrared I/O address setting: Recorded in non-volatile EEPROM memory of switches and T/U. Group and pattern control settings; Recorded in transmission unit. WRT2050 series uses flash memory; WRT2000K series uses non-volatile EEPROM.
Individual control1 circuit (1 remote control relay) on/offSwitch operation: Push to turn on, push to turn offSwitch display: On is red, off is greenMaximum possible: 256 circuits (+16 dimmer circuits) (on/off only)
Group control
Programmed multiple circuit units on/offSwitch operation: Push to turn on, push to turn offSwitch display: On is red, off is green(However, if overlapping control of individual units within groups is performed, the display shows the direction of the next control)Maximum possible: 127 groupsNo. of circuits to be controlled per group: 256 circuits (+16 dimmer circuits)
Pattern control
Optional control performed by combination setting of, for each circuit, on setting, off setting, and circuits not controlled Switch operation: Push once to change to the preset lighting pattern.Switch display: Red when patterns in effect, green when not in effectMaximum possible: 72 patternsNo. of circuits to be controlled per pattern: 256 circuits (+16 dimmer circuits)
Dimmer control(inverter fluorescent lamp)
Continuous dimming of contorollable ballast (0-10V dimmer signal type)Switch operation: Push to turn on, push to turn off (load on/off)
Continuous dimming by pushing up or downSwitch display: Red is on, green is offMaximum possible: 256 circuits including circuits using individual control and
incandescent lamp dimmingSwitch LED displays the dimming level (continuous dimming)In addition to dimmer switch, requires separate dimmer signal on/off switch
Dimmer control(incandescent lamp)
Incandescent lamp continuous dimming (500W, 800W, 1500W)Switch operation: Push to turn on, push to turn off (load on/off)
Continuous dimming by pushing up or downSwitch display: Red is on, green is offMaximum possible: 256 circuits including circuits using individual control and inverter
fluorescent lamp dimmer controlSwitch LED displays the dimming level (continuous dimming)
Group dimmer control
Continuous dimming of the programmed multiple dimmer circuitsSwitch operation: Push to turn on, push to turn off (multiple circuits on/off)
Push up, push down (multiple circuits)Switch display: Red is on, green is off(However, if overlapping control of individual units within groups is performed, the display shows the direction of the next control.)Maximum possible: 127 groups including number of group control usedNo. of circuits to be controlled per group: With dimmer circuits using individual addresses, 256
in combination with individual control
1: Recommended signal wire.2: Due to pulse signal duty cycle, the tester does not give an accurate display.
Electric wire diameter and length See page 18 for details.
Wire type Maximum length of wiring(Max. distance from a transmission unit to switch or T/U )
500 m
300 m
250 m
100 m
Total signal wire length should be less than 3 times the max. signal wire length.
Ambient temperature range -10 to 50
Switch operation Overlapping control
Add
ition
al c
ontr
ol fu
nctio
ns
1.2mm ~ 1.6mm (1.25 mm2~2.0 mm2)
1.0mm (1.0mm2)
0.9mm (0.75mm2)
0.65mm (0.5mm2)
Basic Specifications of FULL-2WAY Remote Control
31 32
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Signal
Signal
white
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4Load
Load
Load
Load10
! @
! @
0ch32 16 8 4 2 1
Load Address(0ch-1~4,...,63ch-1~4)
Load Channel (ch)(0~63ch)
Load Number (No.)(1~4)
Channel can be calculated byadding the number on "1" line.
63ch max.
32 16 8 4 2 1
10
(Address) (Channel) (Number)
256 circuits(64 ch X 4)
0-10-2
0-3
0-4
Load No. 4
Load No. 1
Load No. 3
Load No. 2
Load No. 4
Load No. 4Load No. 3Load No. 2Load No. 1
43241
3
2
1
Load Channel1 + 8 = 9 ch
Load channel:1 + 4 = 5 ch
Load channel:2 + 8 = 10 ch
WR3901RK-8Appellation Indication Unit(Red)
WR34169-8, WR3442-86A,10A Contact Output T/UWR3400-8,
Relay Control T/U(4-Circuit)
Relay Control T/U and 6A 10A Contact Output T/U (4-Circuit)...Load numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4 are fixed.
Appellation Indication Unit with T/U, Contact Input T/U for Individual Control (1-Input),Relay Control T/U(1-Circuit) and 6A Contact Output T/Us (1-Circuit)...setting <load channels + load No.> is required.
Note: The same load address cannot be used for Relay Control T/Us, 6A 10A Contact Output T/Us, Dimmer T/Us and any other T/Us.
WR3400-8 WR34169-8WR3442-8
1ch
32 16 8 4 2 1
10
1-11-2
9ch0 + 0 + 8 + 0 + 0 + 1 =
32 16 8 4 2 1
10
63ch32+16+ 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 =
32 16 8 4 2 1
10
10
No. 1
No. 2Load
Load10
10
10
10
1 2 4 81632
1 2 4 81632
1 0
@!
1 2 4 81632
Signal
0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 =
32 16 8 4 2 10 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 1 =
1 0 1 0
1 0
Load Number (Applicable to Devices for 1 unit and 1 circuit)
10
32 16 8 4 2 1
10
10
10
10
0ch 10
32 16 8 4 2 110ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 120ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 130ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 140ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 150ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 160ch
10
32 16 8 4 2 11ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 111ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 121ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 131ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 141ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 151ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 161ch
10
32 16 8 4 2 12ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 112ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 122ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 132ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 142ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 152ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 162ch
10
32 16 8 4 2 13ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 113ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 123ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 133ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 143ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 153ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 163ch
10
32 16 8 4 2 14ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 114ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 124ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 134ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 144ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 154ch
10
32 16 8 4 2 15ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 115ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 125ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 135ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 145ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 155ch
10
32 16 8 4 2 16ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 116ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 126ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 136ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 146ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 156ch
10
32 16 8 4 2 17ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 117ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 127ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 137ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 147ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 157ch
10
32 16 8 4 2 18ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 118ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 128ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 138ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 148ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 158ch
10
32 16 8 4 2 19ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 119ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 129ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 139ch
1 2 3 4
10
32 16 8 4 2 149ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 159ch
( Set Dip Switches on this side)
Caution:To avoid non-operation or malfunction, do not set the Dip switches to the positions as indicated with "-" .Do not set the Dip switches to Control Patterns.
Address setting method for Card Operation switch (8-bit Dip switch)Part number Description Individual Grope Pattern
YES YES NO
2
6
10
14
18
22
122
126
1
5
9
13
17
21
121
125
3
7
11
15
19
23
123
127
10
1248163264128
Group selection switch 0ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
1ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
2ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10 1
0
3ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
4ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
5ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
30ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
31ch -1 -2
2ch -1
-3
10
Address(Infrared I/O)
Load channel Load number
2
6
10
14
18
22
26
29
68
71
1
5
9
13
17
21
25
28
67
70
3
7
11
15
19
23
27
30
69
72
10
1248163264128
Total pattern selection switch
Floor pattern selection switch 0ch
1 2 3 4
1 2 1 2 1 210
5 6 7 8
10
10
9 10 11 12
10
10
13 14 15 16
10
10
17 18 19 20
10
10
21 22 23 24
10
10
-1 -2
1ch -1 -2
-3
-3
10
14ch -1 -2 -3
10
-3
10
10
15ch -1 -2
1 21 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
10
10
10
10
1
5
9
13
17
21
25
28
67
70
1
5
9
13
17
21
25
28
67
70
1
5
9
13
17
21
25
28
67
70
Address(Infrared I/O)
Address(Infrared I/O) (Dip Switch setting) (Dip Switch setting) (Dip Switch setting)
Load channel Load numberLoad channel Load number
¡Pattern Control¡Grope Control¡Individual Control
0-2
1-2
2-2
3-2
4-2
5-2
61-2
62-2
63-2
0-1
1-1
2-1
3-1
4-1
5-1
61-1
62-1
63-1
0-3
1-3
2-3
3-3
4-3
5-3
61-3
62-3
63-3
0-4
1-4
2-4
3-4
4-4
5-4
61-4
62-4
63-4
10
1248163264128
0chIndividual selection switch -1 -2 -3 -4
1 2 1 2 1 210
1ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
2ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
3ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
4ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
5ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
61ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
62ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
63ch
2ch-4Example2-4
ExampleGroup 9-1 -2
2ch -4
-3 -4
10
10
10
10
1 2
1248163264128 1 2
Group2ch-110
10
1248163264128 1 2
Pattern 1610
10
1248163264128 1 2Example
Pattern 16
WR3891-8 Card Operationswitch
Dip Switch Setting Reference Chart
Load Channel (ch) ( Set Dip Switches on this side)
4
8
12
16
20
24
4
8
12
16
20
24
124
Address Setting Method for Dip Switch T/UsA
pp
end
ixIn
stal
lati
on
Addi
tiona
l Fun
ctio
nsA
dd
ress
Set
tin
gD
esig
nP
rod
uct
sB
asic
Fu
nct
ion
sS
yste
m O
utl
ine
33
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
34
Signal
Signal
white
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4Load
Load
Load
Load10
! @
! @
0ch32 16 8 4 2 1
Load Address(0ch-1~4,...,63ch-1~4)
Load Channel (ch)(0~63ch)
Load Number (No.)(1~4)
Channel can be calculated byadding the number on "1" line.
63ch max.
32 16 8 4 2 1
10
(Address) (Channel) (Number)
256 circuits(64 ch X 4)
0-10-2
0-3
0-4
Load No. 4
Load No. 1
Load No. 3
Load No. 2
Load No. 4
Load No. 4Load No. 3Load No. 2Load No. 1
43241
3
2
1
Load Channel1 + 8 = 9 ch
Load channel:1 + 4 = 5 ch
Load channel:2 + 8 = 10 ch
WR3901RK-8Appellation Indication Unit(Red)
WR34169-8, WR3442-86A,10A Contact Output T/UWR3400-8,
Relay Control T/U(4-Circuit)
Relay Control T/U and 6A 10A Contact Output T/U (4-Circuit)...Load numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4 are fixed.
Appellation Indication Unit with T/U, Contact Input T/U for Individual Control (1-Input),Relay Control T/U(1-Circuit) and 6A Contact Output T/Us (1-Circuit)...setting <load channels + load No.> is required.
Note: The same load address cannot be used for Relay Control T/Us, 6A 10A Contact Output T/Us, Dimmer T/Us and any other T/Us.
WR3400-8 WR34169-8WR3442-8
1ch
32 16 8 4 2 1
10
1-11-2
9ch0 + 0 + 8 + 0 + 0 + 1 =
32 16 8 4 2 1
10
63ch32+16+ 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 =
32 16 8 4 2 1
10
10
No. 1
No. 2Load
Load10
10
10
10
1 2 4 81632
1 2 4 81632
1 0
@!
1 2 4 81632
Signal
0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 =
32 16 8 4 2 10 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 1 =
1 0 1 0
1 0
Load Number (Applicable to Devices for 1 unit and 1 circuit)
10
32 16 8 4 2 1
10
10
10
10
0ch 10
32 16 8 4 2 110ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 120ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 130ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 140ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 150ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 160ch
10
32 16 8 4 2 11ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 111ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 121ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 131ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 141ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 151ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 161ch
10
32 16 8 4 2 12ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 112ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 122ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 132ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 142ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 152ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 162ch
10
32 16 8 4 2 13ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 113ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 123ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 133ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 143ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 153ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 163ch
10
32 16 8 4 2 14ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 114ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 124ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 134ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 144ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 154ch
10
32 16 8 4 2 15ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 115ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 125ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 135ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 145ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 155ch
10
32 16 8 4 2 16ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 116ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 126ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 136ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 146ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 156ch
10
32 16 8 4 2 17ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 117ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 127ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 137ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 147ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 157ch
10
32 16 8 4 2 18ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 118ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 128ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 138ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 148ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 158ch
10
32 16 8 4 2 19ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 119ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 129ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 139ch
1 2 3 4
10
32 16 8 4 2 149ch 1
0
32 16 8 4 2 159ch
( Set Dip Switches on this side)
Caution:To avoid non-operation or malfunction, do not set the Dip switches to the positions as indicated with "-" .Do not set the Dip switches to Control Patterns.
Address setting method for Card Operation switch (8-bit Dip switch)Part number Description Individual Grope Pattern
YES YES NO
2
6
10
14
18
22
122
126
1
5
9
13
17
21
121
125
3
7
11
15
19
23
123
127
10
1248163264128
Group selection switch 0ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
1ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
2ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10 1
0
3ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
4ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
5ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
30ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
31ch -1 -2
2ch -1
-3
10
Address(Infrared I/O)
Load channel Load number
2
6
10
14
18
22
26
29
68
71
1
5
9
13
17
21
25
28
67
70
3
7
11
15
19
23
27
30
69
72
10
1248163264128
Total pattern selection switch
Floor pattern selection switch 0ch
1 2 3 4
1 2 1 2 1 210
5 6 7 8
10
10
9 10 11 12
10
10
13 14 15 16
10
10
17 18 19 20
10
10
21 22 23 24
10
10
-1 -2
1ch -1 -2
-3
-3
10
14ch -1 -2 -3
10
-3
10
10
15ch -1 -2
1 21 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
10
10
10
10
1
5
9
13
17
21
25
28
67
70
1
5
9
13
17
21
25
28
67
70
1
5
9
13
17
21
25
28
67
70
Address(Infrared I/O)
Address(Infrared I/O) (Dip Switch setting) (Dip Switch setting) (Dip Switch setting)
Load channel Load numberLoad channel Load number
¡Pattern Control¡Grope Control¡Individual Control
0-2
1-2
2-2
3-2
4-2
5-2
61-2
62-2
63-2
0-1
1-1
2-1
3-1
4-1
5-1
61-1
62-1
63-1
0-3
1-3
2-3
3-3
4-3
5-3
61-3
62-3
63-3
0-4
1-4
2-4
3-4
4-4
5-4
61-4
62-4
63-4
10
1248163264128
0chIndividual selection switch -1 -2 -3 -4
1 2 1 2 1 210
1ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
2ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
3ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
4ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
5ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
61ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
62ch -1 -2 -3 -4
10
10
63ch
2ch-4Example2-4
ExampleGroup 9-1 -2
2ch -4
-3 -4
10
10
10
10
1 2
1248163264128 1 2
Group2ch-110
10
1248163264128 1 2
Pattern 1610
10
1248163264128 1 2Example
Pattern 16
WR3891-8 Card Operationswitch
Dip Switch Setting Reference Chart
Load Channel (ch) ( Set Dip Switches on this side)
4
8
12
16
20
24
4
8
12
16
20
24
124
Address Setting Method for Dip Switch T/Us
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
33
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
34
•FULL-2WAY Signal ConnectorUsed when performing pattern and group control settings.
•Clear KeyUsed to erase input data.
•Send Key•Used to transfer the Function or an Address inputs on the LCD panel display to a Switch or T/U when setting addresses.•Used to transfer the control setting on the LCD panel display to a Transmission Unit when performing control settings.
•Changeover KeyUsed to change between screensdisplayed on the LCD.
•Enter KeyUsed to enter settings.
•Cancel KeyUsed to cancel entries.
• Initial Settings KeyUsed to make initial settings for the unit.
•Special KeyUsed for transmission unit input/output,system condition checking, editing,and other functions.
•Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Panel
•Function Setting KeysUsed to choose functions duringaddress setting.
•Backlight ON/OFF Switch
•Cursor KeyUsed to select items on the LCD.
•Sequential Advance KeyUsed when performing sequential setting ofaddresses and sequential setting of control.
•Address Setting KeyUsed when switching to address setting.
•P.G SET KeyUsed when switching to pattern andgroup control settings.
•Power Switch
WRT9600-8Wireless Programming Unit(with Address Setting Function)Rated voltage 6V DC(Four AA batteries not included)
•Photoreceptor(used for address setting)
Individual
Mode display
Address setting mode
MODE
ADDRESSSET
P.G SET
INITIAL
SPECIAL
SWITCH
CONTROLLEDLOAD TIMERADDRESS No. ON/OFF
INPUT T/U RELAY T/U DIMMER T/U
DIMMER LEVEL7654321
Low BatteryIndication
MODE
ADDRESSSET
P.G SET
INITIAL
SPECIAL
SWITCH
CONTROLLEDLOAD
FadeOSEC
ALL ON
TIMERADDRESS No. ON/OFF
INPUT T/U RELAY T/U DIMMER T/U
DIMMER LEVEL7654321
Low BatteryIndication
P
Pattern/group control setting mode
Specifications of Wireless Programming Unit (WRT9600-8) ......With wireless address setting function. Specifications of Wireless Address Setting Unit (WRT9500K-8)Features
Description and Functions
(1) One Wireless programming unit allows address setting and pattern/group control setting.(2) You can perform pattern/group settings and changes at your desk, then later at a FULL-2 WAY signal line, transfer the settings and changes to the transmission unit.
You can also input the control settings recorded in the transmission unit into Wireless Programming Unit and store it there.
(3) When setting pattern control, you can set the dimmer level for individual addresses. (4) When setting pattern control, you can set dimmer fade time. (5) You can confirm operation of individual, group, pattern, and dimmer controls, as well as
the condition of the system.
NoteAs the LCD panel displays 4 addresses maximum, for pattern/group control setting of many circuits (in excess of 50) we recommend you use a Program Setting Unit (WRT5850-8), or Central Control and Programming Unit (WRT9103K-89) to perform settings.
Description and Functions
LCD Panel Displays LCD Panel
SWITCH
ERROR
ADDRESS No. TIMER
INPUT T/U DIM T/URELAY T/U
POWER CHANGE BATTERY
NoteNo program of pattern control or group control range can be set with thisWireless Address Setting Unit.
•If no key entry is made for over 10 minutes with the power ON, a short beep sound is repeated to warn of failure to turn it off. While the unit is not in use, be sure to turn the power off to prevent unnecessary battery consumption.
•Read-out KeyUsed to confirm switch andT/U functions and to confirmpattern/group control settings.
•Displays the mode.Cursor display•Function and addresscan be set at locationof cursor.
Setting/Confirmation Indication
•Blinks during reading /sending to indicate signal emission /reception. transmission or reception.
Cursor•Function and AddressNumber where the cursoris displayed can be set.
Type Indication•Displays the type ofcomponents to be set.
Address Number Indication•Displays an Address Number.
Low Battery Indication•When this indicator lights,replace the batteries.
Timer Indication•Displays the timer functionand timer duration.
Function Indication•Displays the functions.
Error Indication•Indicates an error occurredduring reading or sendingoperation.
"Power On" Indication
Mode display•Displays themode.
P.G No. display•Displays theaddress of setpatterns andgroups.
Fade display•Displays fade timewhen setting pattern control.
Timer indication•Displays the timerfunction and time.
ON/OFF display•Displays theON/OFF settings.
Editing display•Displays the editeditems.
Cursor display•Function andaddress can beset at location ofcursor.
Type indication•Displays type ofconfirmed switchand T/U.
Function indication•Displays thefunctions of theswitch and T/U.
Address No.indication
•Displays theaddress number.
Address No.indication
•Displays theaddress number.
Timer indication•Displays the timerfunction and time.
Battery levelindication
•Displays remainingbattery power, inthree levels.
Dimmerlevel display
•Displays dimmerlevels 1 - 7.
•Liquid Crystal Display(LCD) Panel
•Photoreceptor
•Read-out KeyUsed to confirm Switch Function andAddress Number.
•Cursor KeyUsed to move the cursor to the next lineon the panel display.
•Send KeyUsed to transmit a Function or an Addressinput on the LCD panel display to a Switchor T/U.
•Backlight KeyUsed to illuminate the LCD Panel for easyviewing in dim light . The display goes out automatically
one minute after the last key is pressed.
•Timer Clear KeyUsed to clear Timer Settings.
•Timer KeyUsed to set timer duration. Off-delay: 30 seconds,
1 minute, 5 minutesOn-timer: 30 seconds,1 minute, 5 minutes, 60 minutes,120 minutes
•Switch Function KeysUsed to select Switch Function.(Individual, Dimming, Group, or Pattern)
•Numeric KeysUsed to set Address Numbers.
•Address Clear KeyUsed to clear Address Numbers.
•Sequential Advance KeyUsed to advance the AddressNumber in sequence.
•Timer Function Selection KeysOff-delay Key Used to provide the " Delayed Shutoff" function.On-timer Key Used to provide the function of turning on for a certain period of time.
•Power Switch
WRT9500K-8Wireless Address Setting UnitRated voltage 6V DC(Four AA batteries not included)
These programs can be set up by a Program Setting Unit (WRT5850-8)
on the Master Switch.
Specifications of Address Setting Unitppp
35 36
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
•FULL-2WAY Signal ConnectorUsed when performing pattern and group control settings.
•Clear KeyUsed to erase input data.
•Send Key•Used to transfer the Function or an Address inputs on the LCD panel display to a Switch or T/U when setting addresses.•Used to transfer the control setting on the LCD panel display to a Transmission Unit when performing control settings.
•Changeover KeyUsed to change between screensdisplayed on the LCD.
•Enter KeyUsed to enter settings.
•Cancel KeyUsed to cancel entries.
• Initial Settings KeyUsed to make initial settings for the unit.
•Special KeyUsed for transmission unit input/output,system condition checking, editing,and other functions.
•Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Panel
•Function Setting KeysUsed to choose functions duringaddress setting.
•Backlight ON/OFF Switch
•Cursor KeyUsed to select items on the LCD.
•Sequential Advance KeyUsed when performing sequential setting ofaddresses and sequential setting of control.
•Address Setting KeyUsed when switching to address setting.
•P.G SET KeyUsed when switching to pattern andgroup control settings.
•Power Switch
WRT9600-8Wireless Programming Unit(with Address Setting Function)Rated voltage 6V DC(Four AA batteries not included)
•Photoreceptor(used for address setting)
Individual
Mode display
Address setting mode
MODE
ADDRESSSET
P.G SET
INITIAL
SPECIAL
SWITCH
CONTROLLEDLOAD TIMERADDRESS No. ON/OFF
INPUT T/U RELAY T/U DIMMER T/U
DIMMER LEVEL7654321
Low BatteryIndication
MODE
ADDRESSSET
P.G SET
INITIAL
SPECIAL
SWITCH
CONTROLLEDLOAD
FadeOSEC
ALL ON
TIMERADDRESS No. ON/OFF
INPUT T/U RELAY T/U DIMMER T/U
DIMMER LEVEL7654321
Low BatteryIndication
P
Pattern/group control setting mode
Specifications of Wireless Programming Unit (WRT9600-8) ......With wireless address setting function. Specifications of Wireless Address Setting Unit (WRT9500K-8)Features
Description and Functions
(1) One Wireless programming unit allows address setting and pattern/group control setting.(2) You can perform pattern/group settings and changes at your desk, then later at a FULL-2 WAY signal line, transfer the settings and changes to the transmission unit.
You can also input the control settings recorded in the transmission unit into Wireless Programming Unit and store it there.
(3) When setting pattern control, you can set the dimmer level for individual addresses. (4) When setting pattern control, you can set dimmer fade time. (5) You can confirm operation of individual, group, pattern, and dimmer controls, as well as
the condition of the system.
NoteAs the LCD panel displays 4 addresses maximum, for pattern/group control setting of many circuits (in excess of 50) we recommend you use a Program Setting Unit (WRT5850-8), or Central Control and Programming Unit (WRT9103K-89) to perform settings.
Description and Functions
LCD Panel Displays LCD Panel
SWITCH
ERROR
ADDRESS No. TIMER
INPUT T/U DIM T/URELAY T/U
POWER CHANGE BATTERY
NoteNo program of pattern control or group control range can be set with thisWireless Address Setting Unit.
•If no key entry is made for over 10 minutes with the power ON, a short beep sound is repeated to warn of failure to turn it off. While the unit is not in use, be sure to turn the power off to prevent unnecessary battery consumption.
•Read-out KeyUsed to confirm switch andT/U functions and to confirmpattern/group control settings.
•Displays the mode.Cursor display•Function and addresscan be set at locationof cursor.
Setting/Confirmation Indication
•Blinks during reading /sending to indicate signal emission /reception. transmission or reception.
Cursor•Function and AddressNumber where the cursoris displayed can be set.
Type Indication•Displays the type ofcomponents to be set.
Address Number Indication•Displays an Address Number.
Low Battery Indication•When this indicator lights,replace the batteries.
Timer Indication•Displays the timer functionand timer duration.
Function Indication•Displays the functions.
Error Indication•Indicates an error occurredduring reading or sendingoperation.
"Power On" Indication
Mode display•Displays themode.
P.G No. display•Displays theaddress of setpatterns andgroups.
Fade display•Displays fade timewhen setting pattern control.
Timer indication•Displays the timerfunction and time.
ON/OFF display•Displays theON/OFF settings.
Editing display•Displays the editeditems.
Cursor display•Function andaddress can beset at location ofcursor.
Type indication•Displays type ofconfirmed switchand T/U.
Function indication•Displays thefunctions of theswitch and T/U.
Address No.indication
•Displays theaddress number.
Address No.indication
•Displays theaddress number.
Timer indication•Displays the timerfunction and time.
Battery levelindication
•Displays remainingbattery power, inthree levels.
Dimmerlevel display
•Displays dimmerlevels 1 - 7.
•Liquid Crystal Display(LCD) Panel
•Photoreceptor
•Read-out KeyUsed to confirm Switch Function andAddress Number.
•Cursor KeyUsed to move the cursor to the next lineon the panel display.
•Send KeyUsed to transmit a Function or an Addressinput on the LCD panel display to a Switchor T/U.
•Backlight KeyUsed to illuminate the LCD Panel for easyviewing in dim light . The display goes out automatically
one minute after the last key is pressed.
•Timer Clear KeyUsed to clear Timer Settings.
•Timer KeyUsed to set timer duration. Off-delay: 30 seconds,
1 minute, 5 minutesOn-timer: 30 seconds,1 minute, 5 minutes, 60 minutes,120 minutes
•Switch Function KeysUsed to select Switch Function.(Individual, Dimming, Group, or Pattern)
•Numeric KeysUsed to set Address Numbers.
•Address Clear KeyUsed to clear Address Numbers.
•Sequential Advance KeyUsed to advance the AddressNumber in sequence.
•Timer Function Selection KeysOff-delay Key Used to provide the " Delayed Shutoff" function.On-timer Key Used to provide the function of turning on for a certain period of time.
•Power Switch
WRT9500K-8Wireless Address Setting UnitRated voltage 6V DC(Four AA batteries not included)
These programs can be set up by a Program Setting Unit (WRT5850-8)
on the Master Switch.
Specifications of Address Setting Unitppp
35 36
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Address setting using the Wireless Programming Unit WRT9600-8
Address setting using the Wireless Address Setting Unit WRT9500K-8
Product No. Type ofswitch or T/U Function Address No.
Off-delay On-timer
Timer duration
Switch
Individual Control
G: Group Control
P: Pattern Control
Individual Control
G: Group Control
P: Pattern Control
Individual Control
0-1 ~ 63-4
1 ~ 127
1 ~ 72
1 ~ 16
0-1 ~ 63-4
1 ~ 127
1 ~ 72
1 ~ 16
30 sec. 1 min. 5 min.
30 sec. 1 min. 5 min.
30 sec. 1 min. 5 min.
30 sec. 1 min. 5 min. 60 min. 120 min.
30 sec. 1 min. 5 min. 60 min. 120 min.
30 sec. 1 min. 5 min. 60 min. 120 min.
0-1 ~ 63-4
1 ~ 16
D: Dimmer(ON/OFF) Control
D: Dimmer(ON/OFF) Control
Dimmer Control
WRT5551K-8, WRT5501WK-8, WRT6120WK-8,WRT5552K-8, WRT5502WK-8, WRT6144WK-8,WRT5553K-8, WRT5503WK-8, WRT6168WK-8,WRT5554K-8, WRT5504WK-8,
WRT3224-8
WRT4345-82,WRT4348-82,WRT43415-82
WRT4014-8,WRT41249-8
Input T/U
Relay T/U
Dimmer T/U
Note: •No setting can be made for a range marked with __.•Only Dimmer Control is made possible with a Dimmer Switch (WRT5771K-8, WRT5731WK-8).
Address number and timer duration setting by type of switches or T/Us (Infrared I/O)
Precautions for using the Wireless Address Setting Unit
z Turn on the Wireless Address Setting Unit.
1 Keep the photoreceptor within 1cm of the I/O point of the switches or T/Us. Then press the Read-out Key or Send Key.
2 While " " on the LCD panel display is blinking (within 5 seconds), do not move the Wireless Address Setting Unit. (Upon completion of the setting and confirmation, a long beep sounds.)
x No address setting can be made for switch or T/U (infrared I/O) unless it is connected to a FULL-2WAY signal.
c Shifting the unit to any other switch before the long beep sounds after the Send or Read-out Key has been pressed as shown below, may cause problems. Therefore, do not move the unit until the beep sounds.
¡FULL-COLOR Module (4) ¡Switch (COSMO Module) (3)
¡Contact Input T/U for Distribution Panel6A Contact Output T/U (Infrared I/O)
¡Master Switch (Surface Mount)
Sign
al
12
34
56
78
N
2N
1
AC24
V
LED lampBlinks for about 5seconds afteraddresstransmission orreception
LED lampBlinks for about 5seconds afteraddresstransmission orreception
LED lampBlinks for about 5seconds after addresstransmission or reception
I/O point
I/O point
I/O point With Appellation Cover opened
Mode Set Button
LED lamp
Blinks for about 5 seconds after address transmission or reception
With Appellation Cover opened
¡Wireless Switch (4)
I/O point
I/O point Switch or T/U (Infrared I/O)
Turn the WRT9600-8 ON and press "Address setting".
Display upon initial setting of WRT9600-8
Hold the WRT9600-8 steady, with the photoreceptor of the unit within 1 cm of the I/O point on the switch.
In case of an error, there will be a repeating beep and the message "Address confirmation unsuccessful" will appear on the LCD screen.Press the Cancel key on the WRT9600-8 and repeat operations 2 and 3 above.
Press the Read-out key.Hold the unit steady (for about 1 to 4 seconds) until it emits a long beep.
Address confirmation is complete.
1 2 3
In case of an error, there will be a repeating beep and the message "Address setting unsuccessful" will appear on the LCD screen.Press the Cancel key on the WRT9600-8 and repeat operations 1 and 2 above.
Timer setting not possible under pattern control.
In case of an error, there will be a repeating beep and the message "Error" will appear on the LCD screen.
No address can be set onthe line with "_"
Switch (3)Addressconfirmation
Address setting cannot be performed unless the infrared address setting switch and T/U are connected to the FULL-2WAY signal line from the transmission unit.
• Address setting ............... Perform steps 1, 2, and 3• Address confirmation ...... Perform step 1, and then turn the Wireless programming unit OFF• Address change .............. Perform steps 1 and 2 (Press the cursor key to go to the address you want to change, and change it.), and then step 3
Example: Switch unit (3 switches), FULL-COLOR ModelStep 1
• Keep the WRT9600-8 away from the Switch.To enter "Individual 2-1" in the first space:
• Press "Individual". • Press "Cursor " then
"Changeover ", and select address no. 2-1.
• To enter "P1" in the second space:
• Press "Cursor " to move the cursor to the second function column.
• Press "P".• Press "Cursor " then
"Changeover ", and select address no. 1.
• To enter "G3" in the third space:
• Press "Cursor " to move the cursor to the third function column.
• Press "G"• Press "Cursor " then
"Changeover ", and select address no. 3.
Hold the WRT9600-8 steady, with the photoreceptor of the unit within 1 cm of the I/O point on the switch.
1To enter "Individual 2-1" in the first space:
• Press "Individual".• Press the "2", "-", and "1"
keys.
2To enter "P1" in the second space:
• Move the cursor to the second space.
• Press "P".• Press "1".
3To enter "G3 Off-delay 5 min." in the third space.
• Move the cursor to the third space.
• Press the "G" and "1" keys.• Press the "Off-delay" and "5 min." keys.
1 2 3
• To enter "off-delay 5 min." in the third space:
• Press "Cursor " to move the cursor to the third function column.
• Press "Changeover " and select "Off-delay 5 min.".
4
Address inputto
WRT9600-8
Step 2
1
• Remove the appellation sheet from the switch and write the address on the back of the sheet.
• Turn the WRT9600-8 OFF.
32
Addresssetting
Step 3
Addressconfirmation
Same as theWRT9600-8 above
Step 1 Step 2 Address input into the Wireless Address Setting Unit Step 3
Press the Send key.Hold the unit steady (for about 1 to 4 seconds) until it emits a long beep.
Address confirmation is complete.
AddresssettingSame as the
WRT9600-8 above
Mode
Addresssetting
P/G setting
Initial
IND
IND
IND
Special
Confirm Switch
Controltype TimerAddress
number ON/OFF
T/U input Relay T/U Dimmer T/U
Dimmer level
Low BatteryIndication
7654321
7654321
Mode
Addresssetting
P/G setting
Initial
IND
IND
IND
Special
Confirm Switch
Controltype TimerAddress
number ON/OFF
T/U input Relay T/U Dimmer T/U
Dimmer level
Low BatteryIndication
P
7654321
Mode
Addresssetting
P/G setting
Initial
IND
IND
Special
Confirm Switch
Controltype TimerAddress
number ON/OFF
T/U input Relay T/U Dimmer T/U
Dimmer level
Low BatteryIndication
G
7654321
P
Mode
Addresssetting
P/G setting
Initial
IND
Special
Confirm Switch
Controltype TimerAddress
number ON/OFF
T/U input Relay T/U Dimmer T/U
Dimmer level
Low BatteryIndication
IND
WRT1511K-8,WRT1514K-8,
WRT6024WK-8WRT6048WK-8WRT6072WK-8
Address Setting Method for Infrared I/O Switches and T/Us
37 38
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Address setting using the Wireless Programming Unit WRT9600-8
Address setting using the Wireless Address Setting Unit WRT9500K-8
Product No. Type ofswitch or T/U Function Address No.
Off-delay On-timer
Timer duration
Switch
Individual Control
G: Group Control
P: Pattern Control
Individual Control
G: Group Control
P: Pattern Control
Individual Control
0-1 ~ 63-4
1 ~ 127
1 ~ 72
1 ~ 16
0-1 ~ 63-4
1 ~ 127
1 ~ 72
1 ~ 16
30 sec. 1 min. 5 min.
30 sec. 1 min. 5 min.
30 sec. 1 min. 5 min.
30 sec. 1 min. 5 min. 60 min. 120 min.
30 sec. 1 min. 5 min. 60 min. 120 min.
30 sec. 1 min. 5 min. 60 min. 120 min.
0-1 ~ 63-4
1 ~ 16
D: Dimmer(ON/OFF) Control
D: Dimmer(ON/OFF) Control
Dimmer Control
WRT5551K-8, WRT5501WK-8, WRT6120WK-8,WRT5552K-8, WRT5502WK-8, WRT6144WK-8,WRT5553K-8, WRT5503WK-8, WRT6168WK-8,WRT5554K-8, WRT5504WK-8,
WRT3224-8
WRT4345-82,WRT4348-82,WRT43415-82
WRT4014-8,WRT41249-8
Input T/U
Relay T/U
Dimmer T/U
Note: •No setting can be made for a range marked with __.•Only Dimmer Control is made possible with a Dimmer Switch (WRT5771K-8, WRT5731WK-8).
Address number and timer duration setting by type of switches or T/Us (Infrared I/O)
Precautions for using the Wireless Address Setting Unit
z Turn on the Wireless Address Setting Unit.
1 Keep the photoreceptor within 1cm of the I/O point of the switches or T/Us. Then press the Read-out Key or Send Key.
2 While " " on the LCD panel display is blinking (within 5 seconds), do not move the Wireless Address Setting Unit. (Upon completion of the setting and confirmation, a long beep sounds.)
x No address setting can be made for switch or T/U (infrared I/O) unless it is connected to a FULL-2WAY signal.
c Shifting the unit to any other switch before the long beep sounds after the Send or Read-out Key has been pressed as shown below, may cause problems. Therefore, do not move the unit until the beep sounds.
¡FULL-COLOR Module (4) ¡Switch (COSMO Module) (3)
¡Contact Input T/U for Distribution Panel6A Contact Output T/U (Infrared I/O)
¡Master Switch (Surface Mount)
Sign
al
12
34
56
78
N
2N
1
AC24
V
LED lampBlinks for about 5seconds afteraddresstransmission orreception
LED lampBlinks for about 5seconds afteraddresstransmission orreception
LED lampBlinks for about 5seconds after addresstransmission or reception
I/O point
I/O point
I/O point With Appellation Cover opened
Mode Set Button
LED lamp
Blinks for about 5 seconds after address transmission or reception
With Appellation Cover opened
¡Wireless Switch (4)
I/O point
I/O point Switch or T/U (Infrared I/O)
Turn the WRT9600-8 ON and press "Address setting".
Display upon initial setting of WRT9600-8
Hold the WRT9600-8 steady, with the photoreceptor of the unit within 1 cm of the I/O point on the switch.
In case of an error, there will be a repeating beep and the message "Address confirmation unsuccessful" will appear on the LCD screen.Press the Cancel key on the WRT9600-8 and repeat operations 2 and 3 above.
Press the Read-out key.Hold the unit steady (for about 1 to 4 seconds) until it emits a long beep.
Address confirmation is complete.
1 2 3
In case of an error, there will be a repeating beep and the message "Address setting unsuccessful" will appear on the LCD screen.Press the Cancel key on the WRT9600-8 and repeat operations 1 and 2 above.
Timer setting not possible under pattern control.
In case of an error, there will be a repeating beep and the message "Error" will appear on the LCD screen.
No address can be set onthe line with "_"
Switch (3)Addressconfirmation
Address setting cannot be performed unless the infrared address setting switch and T/U are connected to the FULL-2WAY signal line from the transmission unit.
• Address setting ............... Perform steps 1, 2, and 3• Address confirmation ...... Perform step 1, and then turn the Wireless programming unit OFF• Address change .............. Perform steps 1 and 2 (Press the cursor key to go to the address you want to change, and change it.), and then step 3
Example: Switch unit (3 switches), FULL-COLOR ModelStep 1
• Keep the WRT9600-8 away from the Switch.To enter "Individual 2-1" in the first space:
• Press "Individual". • Press "Cursor " then
"Changeover ", and select address no. 2-1.
• To enter "P1" in the second space:
• Press "Cursor " to move the cursor to the second function column.
• Press "P".• Press "Cursor " then
"Changeover ", and select address no. 1.
• To enter "G3" in the third space:
• Press "Cursor " to move the cursor to the third function column.
• Press "G"• Press "Cursor " then
"Changeover ", and select address no. 3.
Hold the WRT9600-8 steady, with the photoreceptor of the unit within 1 cm of the I/O point on the switch.
1To enter "Individual 2-1" in the first space:
• Press "Individual".• Press the "2", "-", and "1"
keys.
2To enter "P1" in the second space:
• Move the cursor to the second space.
• Press "P".• Press "1".
3To enter "G3 Off-delay 5 min." in the third space.
• Move the cursor to the third space.
• Press the "G" and "1" keys.• Press the "Off-delay" and "5 min." keys.
1 2 3
• To enter "off-delay 5 min." in the third space:
• Press "Cursor " to move the cursor to the third function column.
• Press "Changeover " and select "Off-delay 5 min.".
4
Address inputto
WRT9600-8
Step 2
1
• Remove the appellation sheet from the switch and write the address on the back of the sheet.
• Turn the WRT9600-8 OFF.
32
Addresssetting
Step 3
Addressconfirmation
Same as theWRT9600-8 above
Step 1 Step 2 Address input into the Wireless Address Setting Unit Step 3
Press the Send key.Hold the unit steady (for about 1 to 4 seconds) until it emits a long beep.
Address confirmation is complete.
AddresssettingSame as the
WRT9600-8 above
Mode
Addresssetting
P/G setting
Initial
IND
IND
IND
Special
Confirm Switch
Controltype TimerAddress
number ON/OFF
T/U input Relay T/U Dimmer T/U
Dimmer level
Low BatteryIndication
7654321
7654321
Mode
Addresssetting
P/G setting
Initial
IND
IND
IND
Special
Confirm Switch
Controltype TimerAddress
number ON/OFF
T/U input Relay T/U Dimmer T/U
Dimmer level
Low BatteryIndication
P
7654321
Mode
Addresssetting
P/G setting
Initial
IND
IND
Special
Confirm Switch
Controltype TimerAddress
number ON/OFF
T/U input Relay T/U Dimmer T/U
Dimmer level
Low BatteryIndication
G
7654321
P
Mode
Addresssetting
P/G setting
Initial
IND
Special
Confirm Switch
Controltype TimerAddress
number ON/OFF
T/U input Relay T/U Dimmer T/U
Dimmer level
Low BatteryIndication
IND
WRT1511K-8,WRT1514K-8,
WRT6024WK-8WRT6048WK-8WRT6072WK-8
Address Setting Method for Infrared I/O Switches and T/Us
37 38
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
G1
G2
G3
G4
G1
G2
G3
G4
G1
G2
G3
G4
G1
G2
G3
G4
0-1 1-1 2-1 G1
0-2 1-2 2-2 G2
0-3 1-3 2-3 G3
0-4 1-4 2-4 G4
G1
G2
G3
G4
G1
G2
G3
G4
Program Setting Unit
Setting with the Selector Switch
Prior to group and pattern setting:(1) Complete the address plan table.(2) Finish the T/U, switch, and selector switch address settings.
Notes:No loads can be controlled during group and pattern setting.
1 Open the cover of theProgram Setting Unit (WRT5850-8).
2 Press the mode set button to change the system into the setting mode.(The Red LED lights.)
3 Press the Group or Pattern switch that you want to set.(The LED above the switch changes from Green to Red.)
4 Press the reset control button before performing initial settings. (The Red LED lights.)Note: Do not perform this step 4 if you are confirming or performing changes.
5 Press individual switches to include the loads or pattern control.LED (Red) ON ........................... Load included in groupBoth LEDs (Red, Green) OFF ... Load not included in group
Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for any other group control program settings.
6 When group setting is complete, press the mode set button to change the system back to normal mode.(The Red LED will extinguish.)
7 Close the cover of the unit.
Dimmer Level Program Setting Method(1) In step 5, press the dimmer switch ON/OFF switch
and ensure the Red LED illuminates. (2) Set the brightness level with the UP and DOWN
buttons. UP: Brightnes level goes up DOWN: Brightnes level goes down(Use the six LEDs as a measure to adjust the level of brightness.)
Notes:• If the Relay Control T/U has a vacant terminal (no relay connected), whose
address is set on a switch, exclude that address from the group control range when setting group control.
• Do not operate the wireless switches during program setting.
Only the dimmer switch can be used to set the level of brightness.(Only ON/OFF dimmer control can be performed without the dimmer switch.)
Timer Duration (OFF-delay, ON-timer) Setting Method(1) Before setting pattern control, complete timer duration settings
(OFF-delay, ON-timer) for the individual switches to which you want to give timer functions using the Wireless Address Setting Unit (WRT9500K-8).
(2) In step 5, operate the individual switches for which a timer duration (OFF-delay, ON-time) was programmed. This will illuminate both LEDs (Red and Green).
A maximum of 8 ON-timer and OFF-delay circuits can be programmed for 1 pattern.
WRT5731WK-8Dimmer Switch
2
1
• Setting: Perform steps 1 to 7• Confirmation : Perform steps 1 to 3, 6, and 7• Change : Perform steps 1 to 3, and 5 to 7
Surface Mount Master Switches
Master Switches with a Program Setting Unit (WRT6120WK-8,WRT6144WK-8, WRT6168WK-8) are essentially required for program setting of the pattern and group controls.
Note:No loads can be controlled during group program setting.
1 Loosen the screw of the cover on the Program Setting Unit to open it.
2 Press the Mode Set Button to change the system into the setting mode.(The Red LED lights.)
3 Press the Group or Pattern Switch you wish to set.(The LED changes from Green to Red.)
4 At the initial setting, be sure to press the Reset Controls Button. (The Red LED lights.)
Notes:• Up to eight On-timer and Off-delay of Individual addresses can be included
per group.• No level of dimmer illumination can be controlled (set) under group control.• No level of illumination can be programmed under pattern control, without a
Dimmer Switch. (Only ON/OFF Dimmer Control is possible without a Dimmer Switch.)
• If the Relay Control T/U has a vacant terminal (no relay connected), whose address is set on a switch, exclude that address from the group control or pattern control.
• Do not operate the Wireless Switches during setting.
5 Push the Individual Switches to identify loads to be controlled.
LED (Red) on: Switches controlled by Group ProgramLEDs (Red and Green) off: Switch excluded from the Group Control
6 To set Program for the other Switches, repeat steps 3 ~ 5.
7 Upon completing the Setting, press the Mode Set Button to change the system into Normal mode again.(The Red LED goes off.)
8 Close the cover of the unit and fasten the screw.
Prior to group and pattern program settings:(1) Complete program setting plans.(2) Complete address settings for Switches, Master Switches and T/Us.
• Setting : Perform steps 1~8.• Confirmation : Perform steps 1~3, 6 and 8. • Change : Perform steps 1~3 and 5~8.
Dimmer Level Program Setting Method.
1 Before the pattern control program setting method, complete timer duration settings (Off-delay and On-timer) for the Individual Switches you wish to have time duration by using the Wireless Address Setting Unit.
2 In step 5 both LEDs (Red and Green) lights for the Individual Switches for which a timer duration (Off-delay or On-timer) was programmed.
• Up to eight On-timer and Off-delay of Individual addresses can be programmed per pattern control.
Timer Duration Setting (Off-delay and On-timer)
In step 5 set a Dimmer Switch as follows.1 Press the Dimmer Switch a and make
sure the Red LED lights.2 Set a level of illumination using the Switch
s (Push to increase brightness and to decrease it.)
(Use the six LEDs as a scale to adjust the level of illumination.)
j jii
2
1
Dimmer Switch
LED (Red) ON ........................... ONLED (Green) ON ........................ OFFBoth LEDs (Red, Green) OFF .... Override
for pattern control.LED (Red) ON ......................ONLED (Green) ON ..................OFFBoth LEDs (Red, Green) OFF ....Override
Group and Pattern Control Program Setting Method 1 Group and Pattern Control Program Setting Method 2
39 40
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
G1
G2
G3
G4
G1
G2
G3
G4
G1
G2
G3
G4
G1
G2
G3
G4
0-1 1-1 2-1 G1
0-2 1-2 2-2 G2
0-3 1-3 2-3 G3
0-4 1-4 2-4 G4
G1
G2
G3
G4
G1
G2
G3
G4
Program Setting Unit
Setting with the Selector Switch
Prior to group and pattern setting:(1) Complete the address plan table.(2) Finish the T/U, switch, and selector switch address settings.
Notes:No loads can be controlled during group and pattern setting.
1 Open the cover of theProgram Setting Unit (WRT5850-8).
2 Press the mode set button to change the system into the setting mode.(The Red LED lights.)
3 Press the Group or Pattern switch that you want to set.(The LED above the switch changes from Green to Red.)
4 Press the reset control button before performing initial settings. (The Red LED lights.)Note: Do not perform this step 4 if you are confirming or performing changes.
5 Press individual switches to include the loads or pattern control.LED (Red) ON ........................... Load included in groupBoth LEDs (Red, Green) OFF ... Load not included in group
Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for any other group control program settings.
6 When group setting is complete, press the mode set button to change the system back to normal mode.(The Red LED will extinguish.)
7 Close the cover of the unit.
Dimmer Level Program Setting Method(1) In step 5, press the dimmer switch ON/OFF switch
and ensure the Red LED illuminates. (2) Set the brightness level with the UP and DOWN
buttons. UP: Brightnes level goes up DOWN: Brightnes level goes down(Use the six LEDs as a measure to adjust the level of brightness.)
Notes:• If the Relay Control T/U has a vacant terminal (no relay connected), whose
address is set on a switch, exclude that address from the group control range when setting group control.
• Do not operate the wireless switches during program setting.
Only the dimmer switch can be used to set the level of brightness.(Only ON/OFF dimmer control can be performed without the dimmer switch.)
Timer Duration (OFF-delay, ON-timer) Setting Method(1) Before setting pattern control, complete timer duration settings
(OFF-delay, ON-timer) for the individual switches to which you want to give timer functions using the Wireless Address Setting Unit (WRT9500K-8).
(2) In step 5, operate the individual switches for which a timer duration (OFF-delay, ON-time) was programmed. This will illuminate both LEDs (Red and Green).
A maximum of 8 ON-timer and OFF-delay circuits can be programmed for 1 pattern.
WRT5731WK-8Dimmer Switch
2
1
• Setting: Perform steps 1 to 7• Confirmation : Perform steps 1 to 3, 6, and 7• Change : Perform steps 1 to 3, and 5 to 7
Surface Mount Master Switches
Master Switches with a Program Setting Unit (WRT6120WK-8,WRT6144WK-8, WRT6168WK-8) are essentially required for program setting of the pattern and group controls.
Note:No loads can be controlled during group program setting.
1 Loosen the screw of the cover on the Program Setting Unit to open it.
2 Press the Mode Set Button to change the system into the setting mode.(The Red LED lights.)
3 Press the Group or Pattern Switch you wish to set.(The LED changes from Green to Red.)
4 At the initial setting, be sure to press the Reset Controls Button. (The Red LED lights.)
Notes:• Up to eight On-timer and Off-delay of Individual addresses can be included
per group.• No level of dimmer illumination can be controlled (set) under group control.• No level of illumination can be programmed under pattern control, without a
Dimmer Switch. (Only ON/OFF Dimmer Control is possible without a Dimmer Switch.)
• If the Relay Control T/U has a vacant terminal (no relay connected), whose address is set on a switch, exclude that address from the group control or pattern control.
• Do not operate the Wireless Switches during setting.
5 Push the Individual Switches to identify loads to be controlled.
LED (Red) on: Switches controlled by Group ProgramLEDs (Red and Green) off: Switch excluded from the Group Control
6 To set Program for the other Switches, repeat steps 3 ~ 5.
7 Upon completing the Setting, press the Mode Set Button to change the system into Normal mode again.(The Red LED goes off.)
8 Close the cover of the unit and fasten the screw.
Prior to group and pattern program settings:(1) Complete program setting plans.(2) Complete address settings for Switches, Master Switches and T/Us.
• Setting : Perform steps 1~8.• Confirmation : Perform steps 1~3, 6 and 8. • Change : Perform steps 1~3 and 5~8.
Dimmer Level Program Setting Method.
1 Before the pattern control program setting method, complete timer duration settings (Off-delay and On-timer) for the Individual Switches you wish to have time duration by using the Wireless Address Setting Unit.
2 In step 5 both LEDs (Red and Green) lights for the Individual Switches for which a timer duration (Off-delay or On-timer) was programmed.
• Up to eight On-timer and Off-delay of Individual addresses can be programmed per pattern control.
Timer Duration Setting (Off-delay and On-timer)
In step 5 set a Dimmer Switch as follows.1 Press the Dimmer Switch a and make
sure the Red LED lights.2 Set a level of illumination using the Switch
s (Push to increase brightness and to decrease it.)
(Use the six LEDs as a scale to adjust the level of illumination.)
j jii
2
1
Dimmer Switch
LED (Red) ON ........................... ONLED (Green) ON ........................ OFFBoth LEDs (Red, Green) OFF .... Override
for pattern control.LED (Red) ON ......................ONLED (Green) ON ..................OFFBoth LEDs (Red, Green) OFF ....Override
Group and Pattern Control Program Setting Method 1 Group and Pattern Control Program Setting Method 2
39 40
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Note : Be sure to perform pattern and group control program setting before attempting pattern and group control.
Setting with the Wireless Programming Unit (WRT9600-8)
Group Control Program Setting Method (initial setting) Pattern Control Program Setting Method (initial setting)
Note:Do not input control settings into load addresses that you will not be using.
Before pattern/group control program setting:(1) Complete the address plan table.(2) Finish the T/U, switch, and selector switch address settings.(3) Connect the WRT9600-8 to the FULL-2WAY signal line.
1 •Connect the WirelessProgramming Unit to the FULL-2WAY signal line.
•Turn the Wireless Programming Unit ON.
•Press the function setting key "G".
2 To set "G2" control range of "0-1, 0-2, 1-1, 1-2":•Press "Cursor" then "Changeover", and select "2" for the group address.
3 Press and hold "Confirm" for more than 2 seconds to input the "G2" control data from the transmission unit. Press "Cursor" then confirm while pressing "Changeover".Note: It is not necessary to perform step 3 if confirmation is not required.
4 For initial settings, press "Cursor" then "Changeover", select "Exclude all" on the edit display, and press the execution key.Note: Do not perform this step 4 in case of confirming or performing changes.
While performing step 5 on the left after selecting "ON" for the address number of which you want to give a timer function,press "Cursor" then "Changeover" to select the timer function that you want to set in the timer display.
Note: If the Relay Control T/U has a vacant terminal (no relay connected), whose address is set on a switch, exclude that address from the group control range when setting group control.
Note: For dimmer control using individual addresses , be sure to use the WRT2050 series transmission unit.Timer Duration (OFF-delay, ON-timer) Setting Method
While performing step 5 on the left after selecting "ON" for the address number of which you want to set a dimmer level,press "Cursor" then "Changeover" to select the dimmer level 1 to 7 (Dark to Bright) that you want to set in the dimmer level display.
Dimmer Levels Program Setting Method
Note: For fade time setting, be sure to use the WRT2050 series Transmission Unit.
Note: If the Relay Control T/U has a vacant terminal (no relay connected), whose address is set on a switch, exclude that address from the group control range when setting group control.
While performing step 5 on the left press "Cursor" then "Changeover" to select the fade time that you want to set in the fade display. (Fade time: None, 3 sec., 6 sec., 1 min.)
Fade time Setting Method
While performing step 5 on the left after selecting "ON" for the address number of which you want to give a timer function,press "Cursor" then "Changeover" to select the timer function that you want to set in the timer display.
Timer Duration (OFF-delay, ON-timer)
5 Decide the loads to be used for group control.•Press "Cursor" and select the address numbers you want to use for the groups.
•Press "Cursor", then at the "0-1" ON/OFF display press "Changeover", and select "ON".Press "Cursor", then at the "0-2" ON/OFF display press "Changeover", and select "ON".
6 Press "Cursor" then"Changeover", and select "ON" for "1-1" and "1-2" as in step 5.
7 Press and hold "Setting" for more than 2 seconds to transfer the "G2" control range into the transmission unit.To set the control ranges for other groups, repeat steps 2 to 7.
8 When group setting is complete, turn the setting unit power OFF and detach it from the FULL-2 WAY signal line.
Timer function• ON-timer 30 sec., 1 min., 5 min., 60 min., 120 min.• OFF-delay 30 sec., 1 min., 5 min. Timer function
• ON-timer 30 sec., 1 min., 5 min., 60 min., 120 min.• OFF-delay 30 sec., 1 min., 5 min.A maximum of 8 ON-timer and OFF-delay circuits can be programmed
for 1 group.Setting of dimmer brightness level is not possible under group control. A maximum of 8 ON-timer and OFF-delay circuits can be programmed
for 1 pattern.
ON/OFF display "ON":Load included in groupNo display:Load not included in group
1 •Connect the WirelessProgramming Unit to the FULL-2WAY signal line.
•Turn the power of the pattern/group setting unit ON.
•Press the function setting key "P".
2 To set "P2" control data of "0-1,1-1 ON, 0-2, 1-2 OFF":•Press "Cursor" then "Changeover", and select pattern address "2".
3 Press and hold "Confirm" for more than 2 seconds to input the "P2" control data from the transmission unit. Press "Cursor" then confirm while pressing "Changeover".Note: It is not necessary to perform this step 3 if confirmation is not required.
4 For initial settings, press "Cursor" then "Changeover", select "All clear" on the edit display, and press the "execution key".Note: Do not perform this step 4 in case of confirming or performing changes.
5 Decide the loads to be used for pattern control.•Press "Cursor" and select the address
numbers you want to be used for the pattern.
•Press "Cursor", then at the "0-1" ON/OFF display press "Changeover" , and select "ON". Press "Cursor", then at the "0-2"
ON/OFF display press "Changeover", and select "OFF".
6 Press "Cursor" then "Changeover", and select "ON" for "1-1" and "OFF" for "1-2" as in step 5.
7 Press and hold "Setting" for more than 2 seconds to transfer the "P2" control data into the transmission unit.To set the control data for other patterns, repeat steps 2 to 7.
8 When group setting is completed, turn the setting unit power OFF and detach it from the FULL-2 WAY signal line.
Turn power OFF andremove connection.
Turn power OFF andremove connection.
LCD panel LCD panel
LCD panel LCD panel
LCD panel
LCD panel LCD panel
LCD panel
ON/OFF display "ON":ON setting"OFF": OFF settingNo display:Load not included in pattern
• Pattern/group control program setting: Perform steps 1, 2, and 4 to 8.• Pattern/group control program confirmation: Perform steps 1 to 3, and 8.• Pattern/group control program changes: Perform steps 1 to 3, and 5 to 8.
Group and Pattern Control Program Setting Method 3
41 42
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Note : Be sure to perform pattern and group control program setting before attempting pattern and group control.
Setting with the Wireless Programming Unit (WRT9600-8)
Group Control Program Setting Method (initial setting) Pattern Control Program Setting Method (initial setting)
Note:Do not input control settings into load addresses that you will not be using.
Before pattern/group control program setting:(1) Complete the address plan table.(2) Finish the T/U, switch, and selector switch address settings.(3) Connect the WRT9600-8 to the FULL-2WAY signal line.
1 •Connect the WirelessProgramming Unit to the FULL-2WAY signal line.
•Turn the Wireless Programming Unit ON.
•Press the function setting key "G".
2 To set "G2" control range of "0-1, 0-2, 1-1, 1-2":•Press "Cursor" then "Changeover", and select "2" for the group address.
3 Press and hold "Confirm" for more than 2 seconds to input the "G2" control data from the transmission unit. Press "Cursor" then confirm while pressing "Changeover".Note: It is not necessary to perform step 3 if confirmation is not required.
4 For initial settings, press "Cursor" then "Changeover", select "Exclude all" on the edit display, and press the execution key.Note: Do not perform this step 4 in case of confirming or performing changes.
While performing step 5 on the left after selecting "ON" for the address number of which you want to give a timer function,press "Cursor" then "Changeover" to select the timer function that you want to set in the timer display.
Note: If the Relay Control T/U has a vacant terminal (no relay connected), whose address is set on a switch, exclude that address from the group control range when setting group control.
Note: For dimmer control using individual addresses , be sure to use the WRT2050 series transmission unit.Timer Duration (OFF-delay, ON-timer) Setting Method
While performing step 5 on the left after selecting "ON" for the address number of which you want to set a dimmer level,press "Cursor" then "Changeover" to select the dimmer level 1 to 7 (Dark to Bright) that you want to set in the dimmer level display.
Dimmer Levels Program Setting Method
Note: For fade time setting, be sure to use the WRT2050 series Transmission Unit.
Note: If the Relay Control T/U has a vacant terminal (no relay connected), whose address is set on a switch, exclude that address from the group control range when setting group control.
While performing step 5 on the left press "Cursor" then "Changeover" to select the fade time that you want to set in the fade display. (Fade time: None, 3 sec., 6 sec., 1 min.)
Fade time Setting Method
While performing step 5 on the left after selecting "ON" for the address number of which you want to give a timer function,press "Cursor" then "Changeover" to select the timer function that you want to set in the timer display.
Timer Duration (OFF-delay, ON-timer)
5 Decide the loads to be used for group control.•Press "Cursor" and select the address numbers you want to use for the groups.
•Press "Cursor", then at the "0-1" ON/OFF display press "Changeover", and select "ON".Press "Cursor", then at the "0-2" ON/OFF display press "Changeover", and select "ON".
6 Press "Cursor" then"Changeover", and select "ON" for "1-1" and "1-2" as in step 5.
7 Press and hold "Setting" for more than 2 seconds to transfer the "G2" control range into the transmission unit.To set the control ranges for other groups, repeat steps 2 to 7.
8 When group setting is complete, turn the setting unit power OFF and detach it from the FULL-2 WAY signal line.
Timer function• ON-timer 30 sec., 1 min., 5 min., 60 min., 120 min.• OFF-delay 30 sec., 1 min., 5 min. Timer function
• ON-timer 30 sec., 1 min., 5 min., 60 min., 120 min.• OFF-delay 30 sec., 1 min., 5 min.A maximum of 8 ON-timer and OFF-delay circuits can be programmed
for 1 group.Setting of dimmer brightness level is not possible under group control. A maximum of 8 ON-timer and OFF-delay circuits can be programmed
for 1 pattern.
ON/OFF display "ON":Load included in groupNo display:Load not included in group
1 •Connect the WirelessProgramming Unit to the FULL-2WAY signal line.
•Turn the power of the pattern/group setting unit ON.
•Press the function setting key "P".
2 To set "P2" control data of "0-1,1-1 ON, 0-2, 1-2 OFF":•Press "Cursor" then "Changeover", and select pattern address "2".
3 Press and hold "Confirm" for more than 2 seconds to input the "P2" control data from the transmission unit. Press "Cursor" then confirm while pressing "Changeover".Note: It is not necessary to perform this step 3 if confirmation is not required.
4 For initial settings, press "Cursor" then "Changeover", select "All clear" on the edit display, and press the "execution key".Note: Do not perform this step 4 in case of confirming or performing changes.
5 Decide the loads to be used for pattern control.•Press "Cursor" and select the address
numbers you want to be used for the pattern.
•Press "Cursor", then at the "0-1" ON/OFF display press "Changeover" , and select "ON". Press "Cursor", then at the "0-2"
ON/OFF display press "Changeover", and select "OFF".
6 Press "Cursor" then "Changeover", and select "ON" for "1-1" and "OFF" for "1-2" as in step 5.
7 Press and hold "Setting" for more than 2 seconds to transfer the "P2" control data into the transmission unit.To set the control data for other patterns, repeat steps 2 to 7.
8 When group setting is completed, turn the setting unit power OFF and detach it from the FULL-2 WAY signal line.
Turn power OFF andremove connection.
Turn power OFF andremove connection.
LCD panel LCD panel
LCD panel LCD panel
LCD panel
LCD panel LCD panel
LCD panel
ON/OFF display "ON":ON setting"OFF": OFF settingNo display:Load not included in pattern
• Pattern/group control program setting: Perform steps 1, 2, and 4 to 8.• Pattern/group control program confirmation: Perform steps 1 to 3, and 8.• Pattern/group control program changes: Perform steps 1 to 3, and 5 to 8.
Group and Pattern Control Program Setting Method 3
41 42
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Circuit Design for Control Using External Devices (Timers or Sensors)
FeaturesThe Contact Input T/U receives a signal (normally open dry contact input) from external devices, enabling individual, group, and pattern control.
Individual controlSet the address of the contact Input T/U to match that of the Relay Control T/U or the T/U with 6A,10A relay to be controlled.Group controlSet the address of the contact input T/U to match that of the group switch. This will provide the same control as that of the group switch.Pattern control
Contact Input T/U (4-Input) terminal arrangement
Set the address of the contact Input T/U to match that of the pattern switch. This will provide the same control as that of the pattern switch.
Notes:To set pattern or group controls using a contact input T/U, be sure to set the pattern or group with the setting unit in the selector switch. (Pattern and group controls cannot be set using only a contact input T/U.)See pages 39, 40 for details.
SignalAC24V
Input
1Inp
ut 2
Input
3Inp
ut 4
1
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
Con
trol C
ircui
t
23
45
67
8
•Terminal numbers 2, 4, 6, and 8 areconnected internally. Do not useterminal numbers 1, 3, 5, and 7 ascommon terminals.
( )
WRT3224-8Contact Input T/U(4-Input)(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
Individual/Groupcontrol
Continuous closure of 1 sec. or more
Controlmethod
Inputsignal
ControlMethod
Applicationexample
Operation
Pattern control
WRT3211-8Contact Input T/U(1 Input)(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use) • ON with contact close
• OFF with contact open
•Contact close: Changes between set patterns
•Contact open: Indicator light condition does not change
•Turning loads either only ON or only OFF by a timer
•A load to be only turned ON by one dry contact closure and turned OFF by another dry contact closure
•The conditions for turning loads ON are different from those for turning them OFF.
Continuous closure of 0.2 sec or more
• Turning same loads ON and OFF with 1 input signal
•ON/OFF operation with a timer•ON/OFF operation with a
Photoelectric EE switch
The Contact Input T/U operates upon detecting changes in the ON/OFF status of the contact. It only operates when it detects the contact going ON or OFF in individual and group control, or when it detects the contact going ON in pattern control.
When the contact goes ON or OFF, it is possible to manually control ON/OFF with the override/manual switch.
Wiring diagram
Notes(1) When using the WRT3211-8 (Contact Input T/U
(1-input)):• Do not connect multiple contact input T/Us in parallel for
1-input signal.
(2) When connecting to external devices items like Timer Setting Unit, install a circuit that disables operation when not required; for example on weekends and holidays.
Contact output
WRT3211-8
Signal wire
Signal wire
WRT3211-8
WRT9600-8
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
0-1
0-2
0-3
0-4
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
P1
P2
P3
P4
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
G8
FULL-2WAY signal lines
RedBlue
RedBlue
RedBlue
RedBlue
Ry1
Ry3
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
Ry2
Ry4
1
3
2
4
Ry5
Ry7
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
Ry6
Ry8
12
WR2311-851Transformer
WRT2050-80Transmission Unit
0ch
1ch
Sign
al
Powersource
WRT5850-8ProgramSetting Unit
WRT5514-8Eight Free ModuleSwitch (4)(for Individual control)
WRT5514-8Eight Free ModuleSwitch (4)(for Group control) WRT5514-8
Eight Free ModuleSwitch (4)(for Pattern control)
Normally opendry contact
Timer, etc.
(e.g., installed in control room)
Relay control panel
Selector switch
3
4
WRT3224-8Contact
Input T/U(4-input)
G1
Powersource
Powersource
WR6161K-820A HID Relay
24V ACBluew
hite
WR3400-8Relay Control T/U(4-Circuit)
Powersource
Contact Input T/Us
43 44
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Circuit Design for Control Using External Devices (Timers or Sensors)
FeaturesThe Contact Input T/U receives a signal (normally open dry contact input) from external devices, enabling individual, group, and pattern control.
Individual controlSet the address of the contact Input T/U to match that of the Relay Control T/U or the T/U with 6A,10A relay to be controlled.Group controlSet the address of the contact input T/U to match that of the group switch. This will provide the same control as that of the group switch.Pattern control
Contact Input T/U (4-Input) terminal arrangement
Set the address of the contact Input T/U to match that of the pattern switch. This will provide the same control as that of the pattern switch.
Notes:To set pattern or group controls using a contact input T/U, be sure to set the pattern or group with the setting unit in the selector switch. (Pattern and group controls cannot be set using only a contact input T/U.)See pages 39, 40 for details.
SignalAC24V
Input
1Inp
ut 2
Input
3Inp
ut 4
1
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
Con
trol C
ircui
t
23
45
67
8
•Terminal numbers 2, 4, 6, and 8 areconnected internally. Do not useterminal numbers 1, 3, 5, and 7 ascommon terminals.
( )
WRT3224-8Contact Input T/U(4-Input)(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
Individual/Groupcontrol
Continuous closure of 1 sec. or more
Controlmethod
Inputsignal
ControlMethod
Applicationexample
Operation
Pattern control
WRT3211-8Contact Input T/U(1 Input)(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use) • ON with contact close
• OFF with contact open
•Contact close: Changes between set patterns
•Contact open: Indicator light condition does not change
•Turning loads either only ON or only OFF by a timer
•A load to be only turned ON by one dry contact closure and turned OFF by another dry contact closure
•The conditions for turning loads ON are different from those for turning them OFF.
Continuous closure of 0.2 sec or more
• Turning same loads ON and OFF with 1 input signal
•ON/OFF operation with a timer•ON/OFF operation with a
Photoelectric EE switch
The Contact Input T/U operates upon detecting changes in the ON/OFF status of the contact. It only operates when it detects the contact going ON or OFF in individual and group control, or when it detects the contact going ON in pattern control.
When the contact goes ON or OFF, it is possible to manually control ON/OFF with the override/manual switch.
Wiring diagram
Notes(1) When using the WRT3211-8 (Contact Input T/U
(1-input)):• Do not connect multiple contact input T/Us in parallel for 1-input signal.
(2) When connecting to external devices items like Timer Setting Unit, install a circuit that disables operation when not required; for example on weekends and holidays.
Contact output
WRT3211-8
Signal wire
Signal wire
WRT3211-8
WRT9600-8
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
0-1
0-2
0-3
0-4
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
P1
P2
P3
P4
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
G8
FULL-2WAY signal lines
RedBlue
RedBlue
RedBlue
RedBlue
Ry1
Ry3
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
Ry2
Ry4
1
3
2
4
Ry5
Ry7
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
Ry6
Ry8
12
WR2311-851Transformer
WRT2050-80Transmission Unit
0ch
1ch
Sign
al
Powersource
WRT5850-8ProgramSetting Unit
WRT5514-8Eight Free ModuleSwitch (4)(for Individual control)
WRT5514-8Eight Free ModuleSwitch (4)(for Group control) WRT5514-8
Eight Free ModuleSwitch (4)(for Pattern control)
Normally opendry contact
Timer, etc.
(e.g., installed in control room)
Relay control panel
Selector switch
3
4
WRT3224-8Contact
Input T/U(4-input)
G1
Powersource
Powersource
WR6161K-820A HID Relay
24V ACBluew
hite
WR3400-8Relay Control T/U(4-Circuit)
Powersource
Contact Input T/Us
43 44
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
LCD Appellation Touch Switch
(1) Multilingual localization. (English, Traditional Chinese , Korean.)(2) Double-row size compact switch panel capable of containing up to 24 switches.(3) User-friendly name-touch operation.(4) Finely-divided on/off groups to achieve smart energy-efficient lighting.
Operation screen (Example)
Wiring diagram
Installation specifications
Specifications
WRT92619-8FULL-2WAY LCD Appellation Touch Switch
Sign
al
WRT2050-80 Transmission Unit (Function Expansion Type)
Power source Power
source
Power source
FULL-2WAY signal wire
1
3
2
4
12
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
0ch
24V ACBlue W
hite
3
4
WR3400-8 Relay Control T/U
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
WRT92619-8LCD Appellation Touch Switch
WRT92619-8LCD Appellation Touch Switch
Switch type
Dimmer
Address setting range
Individual: 0-1 to 63-4Old dimmer: 1 to 16Group: 1 to 127
Timer function
YesYesYes
ON/OFFIndividual: 0-1 to 63-4Pattern: 1 to 72Group: 1 to 127
YesNoYes
15mA
AC24V,50/60HzWR2301,WR2311,WR2321Rated Input volyage
Rated Current ConsumptionSignal Current Consumption
200mA
The names of each switch can be displayed.
Depending on the usage, size of each switches can be adjusted.(Max 8 switches / page, Max 3 pages)
Operational error can be prevented by locking the screen, and the page displayed on the switch can be changed according to the layout.
• Switch plate: COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (1 row - 2 gangs type) • Box installation: A standard 1 row – 2 gangs embedded box can be used.
(A shallow type is acceptable.)
• Maximum number of characters for switch name20 characters (alphanumeric only)
• Maximum number of characters for page title10 characters (alphanumeric only)
• You can select the first page that appears after startup or when waking up from sleep mode from the following.• Specified page (Page 1, 2, or the previous screen)• Screen selected in accordance with the state of the full two-wire virtual terminal with a
built-in switch (Selectable address: Individual switches from 0-1 to 63-4)• The last screen viewed before the light goes off
• You can enable/disable the two-step switch operation.If you enable the two-step operation, a control dialog will appear to confirm your switch operation.
• You can lock the LCD switch operation from the full two-wire switch. (Selectable address: Individual switches from 0-1 to 63-4)
• You can read/write data using an SD memory card.Panasonic SD (HC) memory card (Normal/high speed, 4 GB or less.)
Address setting:Up to 24 Individual, Group and Pattern switches can be set in total.Up to 6 Dimmer switches can be set in total.
• Ratings
• Number of pages: 3 pages
• Switch type and address setting range
Relay control panel
24V
ACBl
ue W
hite
When performing pattern and group control, be sure to set the pattern/group content beforehand.
•The backlight stays off unless a switch operation is performed.
Available to change the switch size.
Available to use the dimmer switches.(Up to 6 Dimmer switches can be set in total.)
Available to set the name and address setting on the screen display.Available to set data on your PC by using SD Memory Card.
Remote Control Transformer: Not for U.S.A Total wire length: 100m max.
SWITCH
ADDRESS No. TIMER
INPUT T/U DIM T/URELAY T/U
POWER
IND
IND
P
P
1
2
63 - 4
1 - 2
SWITCH
ADDRESS No. TIMER
INPUT T/U DIM T/URELAY T/U
POWER
IND
IND
IND
IND 1 - 1
63 - 4
1 - 2
Circuit Design for Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit (Infrared I/O)
WRT33749-8Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit(Infrared I/O)(with Photosensor)
Features(1) Controls lighting by detecting changes in
temperature when people move.(2) Equipped with a brightness sensor to enable
lighting only when it becomes dark and people are present.
(3) The detection range can be expanded by using auxiliary units.
(4) Can also be operated from a wall switch in combination.
(5) Sensor operation can also be disabled.(6) Has two addresses, enabling the handling of
two loads, such as lighting and ventilation.(7) Lineup includes wide-angle detection types.
Wiring diagram
Address setting (Example)
Part names and functions (with cover plate removed)WRT33649-8
Detection area
• Detection angle can beadjusted by 15˚ in all directions.The detection area can benarrowed by using aspecial hood.
• Detection angle can be adjusted by 15˚ in all directions. The detection area can be narrowed by using a special hood.
WRT33749-8 WRT33649-8
9.8m
5.6m
For 2
m
3.5
m m
ax.
Adjust the detection area to 70 cm from the floor to enable detection of hand movement.
2.0m
3.5m
5.0m
2.8m1.2m
2.1m4.9m
3.2m
70˚
Use at a distance of at least 40 cm from incandescent lighting fixtures.
WRT33649-8Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit(Infrared I/O) (with Photosensor)(Wide Detection Area Type)Use at a distance of at least 40 cm from incandescent lighting fixtures.
Control for OFF-delay function duration adjustment
• Flashes (5 times) when it receivesa signal from the addresssetting unit.
• Sends and receives datafrom the addresssetting unit.
• Enables users to change the timeLoad 1 (lighting) is ON.
Control for OFF-delay function duration adjustment
Control for brightness sensor adjustment • Enables users to change the illuminance at which Load 1 operates.
10 sec(Use only for inspection)
1 min3 min
6 min10 min
20 min15 min
25 min30 min (MAX)
Brightness sensor Load 1 (lighting)
10 sec1 min3 min
6 min 10 min
20 min15 min
25 min30 min (MAX)
(10000 lx or more)
Approx. 40 lx
Approx. 5 lx or less.
Approx. 20 lx
Brighter
Darker
Specifications of WRT33749-8 and WRT33649-8
Infrared I/O
Walking speed: 0.3 to 1 m/sec
Provided
Rating
Address setting method
Detection method
Detection speed
Sensor ON/OFF function
Diameter of 0.65-1.6 mm; 0.75-2.0 mm2
Diameter of 0.5-1.0 mm; 0.5-0.75 mm2
FULL-2WAY signal line
Applicable box
Lights-OFF delay time
Mounting method Box installation, ceiling installationby clamps (30 mm max.)
Adjustable from 10 sec to30 min approx.
• Pattern address setting • Individual/group address setting
Medium square outlet box withround-holed cover
WRT9600-8Wireless Programming UnitWRT9500K-8Wireless Address Setting Unit can be used for address setting.
Necessary for address setting.
When performing pattern and group control, be sure to set the pattern/group control content beforehand.For details, see P.39~42.
Precautions
Set address when Load 1 (lighting) is ON.
Set address when Load 1 (lighting) is OFF.
Set an arbitrary unused addressfor sensor ON/OFF
Set address for Load 2 (ventilation fan) control.
Set address for Load 1(lighting) control.
Not used
Set arbitrary unused addressfor sensor ON/OFF.Set address for Load 2(lighting) control.
Max. ceiling height is5m when usingthe hood.
• Enables users to change the timeLoad 2 (ventilation fan) is ON.Load 1 time + Load 2 time
Detection of changes in thepassive infrared level
Auxiliary passiveinfrared ceiling unit
WRT2050-80TransmissonUnit
WR34169-86A Contact Output T/U(Single Pole)(4-Circuit) Address (Example)
Receiver display lamp
Address setting transceiver
Sens
or
App
licab
lew
ires
Total wire length:100m max. Total wire length:100m max.
• • •
Lighting
Ventilation fan 1-21-1 Two wires, no polarity
WRT5551K-8switch (for 1 unit)Address (Example)1-2
WRT5551K-8Switch (for 1 Unit)Address (Example)1-1
WRT5551K-8Switch (for 1 Unit)Address (Example)63-4
WRT3365K-8•WRT3367K-8WRT3375K-8
6 units max.
Auxiliary unit wiringFULL-2WAY signal line
Two wires, no polarityAuxiliary units (For extension)
Passive infrared sensor ON/OFF switch Lighting ON/OFF switch Ventilation fan ON/OFF switch
Auxiliary unit Auxiliary unit WRT3365K-8•WRT3367K-8WRT3375K-8
6 units max.• Address setting (Example)Load 1 (Lighting) Load 2 (Ventilation fan)1-1 1-263-4Passive infrared sensor ON/OFF (Example)
WRT33749-8WRT33649-8Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit
WRT3367K-8Auxiliary Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit(Wide Detection Area Type) (with Amplifier)
Power source
Power source
Power source
Lights-OFF delay duration, Load 1 (lighting) The above adjustment times are a guideline.
Load 2 (ventilation fan) operatesregardless of the brightness sensor.
Lights-OFF delay time, Load 2 (ventilation fan) The above adjustment times are a guideline.
Input signal at 24 V Signalcurrent consumption 20 mA
(1) Enter detection state approx. 50 seconds after system startup (FULL-2WAY signals are supplied), and operation can be checked. Address setting can be done during the approx. 50 sec period.
(2) Perform address setting by using the WRT9500K-8 Address Setting Unit (Sold separately), or the WRT9600-8 Wireless Programming Unit (Sold Separately).
(3) Timer settings cannot be made.(4) For individual/group address setting, set the address for the first unit only .(5) If sensor ON/OFF is not used, clear the address.(6) When using pattern/group control, be sure to set the control content separately.
Features
1ch
Can be used to automatically turn lights ON or OFF,or dim lights, upon detection of movement by people.
RedBlue
RedBlueRedBlue
RedBlueRy1
Ry3
RedB
lueRe
dBlue
Ry2
Ry4
Ry5
Ry7
RedB
lueRe
dBlue
Ry6
Ry8
Powersource
20A HID Relay
Powersource
WR6161K-8
Switches Control Passive Infrared Unit Control
45 46
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
LCD Appellation Touch Switch
(1) Multilingual localization. (English, Traditional Chinese , Korean.)(2) Double-row size compact switch panel capable of containing up to 24 switches.(3) User-friendly name-touch operation.(4) Finely-divided on/off groups to achieve smart energy-efficient lighting.
Operation screen (Example)
Wiring diagram
Installation specifications
Specifications
WRT92619-8FULL-2WAY LCD Appellation Touch Switch
Sign
al
WRT2050-80 Transmission Unit (Function Expansion Type)
Power source Power
source
Power source
FULL-2WAY signal wire
1
3
2
4
12
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
0ch
24V ACBlue W
hite
3
4
WR3400-8 Relay Control T/U
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
WRT92619-8LCD Appellation Touch Switch
WRT92619-8LCD Appellation Touch Switch
Switch type
Dimmer
Address setting range
Individual: 0-1 to 63-4Old dimmer: 1 to 16Group: 1 to 127
Timer function
YesYesYes
ON/OFFIndividual: 0-1 to 63-4Pattern: 1 to 72Group: 1 to 127
YesNoYes
15mA
AC24V,50/60HzWR2301,WR2311,WR2321Rated Input volyage
Rated Current ConsumptionSignal Current Consumption
200mA
The names of each switch can be displayed.
Depending on the usage, size of each switches can be adjusted.(Max 8 switches / page, Max 3 pages)
Operational error can be prevented by locking the screen, and the page displayed on the switch can be changed according to the layout.
• Switch plate: COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (1 row - 2 gangs type) • Box installation: A standard 1 row – 2 gangs embedded box can be used.
(A shallow type is acceptable.)
• Maximum number of characters for switch name20 characters (alphanumeric only)
• Maximum number of characters for page title10 characters (alphanumeric only)
• You can select the first page that appears after startup or when waking up from sleep mode from the following.• Specified page (Page 1, 2, or the previous screen)• Screen selected in accordance with the state of the full two-wire virtual terminal with a
built-in switch (Selectable address: Individual switches from 0-1 to 63-4)• The last screen viewed before the light goes off
• You can enable/disable the two-step switch operation.If you enable the two-step operation, a control dialog will appear to confirm your switch operation.
• You can lock the LCD switch operation from the full two-wire switch. (Selectable address: Individual switches from 0-1 to 63-4)
• You can read/write data using an SD memory card.Panasonic SD (HC) memory card (Normal/high speed, 4 GB or less.)
Address setting:Up to 24 Individual, Group and Pattern switches can be set in total.Up to 6 Dimmer switches can be set in total.
• Ratings
• Number of pages: 3 pages
• Switch type and address setting range
Relay control panel
24V
ACBl
ue W
hite
When performing pattern and group control, be sure to set the pattern/group content beforehand.
•The backlight stays off unless a switch operation is performed.
Available to change the switch size.
Available to use the dimmer switches.(Up to 6 Dimmer switches can be set in total.)
Available to set the name and address setting on the screen display.Available to set data on your PC by using SD Memory Card.
Remote Control Transformer: Not for U.S.A Total wire length: 100m max.
SWITCH
ADDRESS No. TIMER
INPUT T/U DIM T/URELAY T/U
POWER
IND
IND
P
P
1
2
63 - 4
1 - 2
SWITCH
ADDRESS No. TIMER
INPUT T/U DIM T/URELAY T/U
POWER
IND
IND
IND
IND 1 - 1
63 - 4
1 - 2
Circuit Design for Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit (Infrared I/O)
WRT33749-8Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit(Infrared I/O)(with Photosensor)
Features(1) Controls lighting by detecting changes in
temperature when people move.(2) Equipped with a brightness sensor to enable
lighting only when it becomes dark and people are present.
(3) The detection range can be expanded by using auxiliary units.
(4) Can also be operated from a wall switch in combination.
(5) Sensor operation can also be disabled.(6) Has two addresses, enabling the handling of
two loads, such as lighting and ventilation.(7) Lineup includes wide-angle detection types.
Wiring diagram
Address setting (Example)
Part names and functions (with cover plate removed)WRT33649-8
Detection area
• Detection angle can beadjusted by 15˚ in all directions.The detection area can benarrowed by using aspecial hood.
• Detection angle can be adjusted by 15˚ in all directions. The detection area can be narrowed by using a special hood.
WRT33749-8 WRT33649-8
9.8m
5.6m
For 2
m
3.5
m m
ax.
Adjust the detection area to 70 cm from the floor to enable detection of hand movement.
2.0m
3.5m
5.0m
2.8m1.2m
2.1m4.9m
3.2m
70˚
Use at a distance of at least 40 cm from incandescent lighting fixtures.
WRT33649-8Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit(Infrared I/O) (with Photosensor)(Wide Detection Area Type)Use at a distance of at least 40 cm from incandescent lighting fixtures.
Control for OFF-delay function duration adjustment
• Flashes (5 times) when it receivesa signal from the addresssetting unit.
• Sends and receives datafrom the addresssetting unit.
• Enables users to change the timeLoad 1 (lighting) is ON.
Control for OFF-delay function duration adjustment
Control for brightness sensor adjustment • Enables users to change the illuminance at which Load 1 operates.
10 sec(Use only for inspection)
1 min3 min
6 min10 min
20 min15 min
25 min30 min (MAX)
Brightness sensor Load 1 (lighting)
10 sec1 min3 min
6 min 10 min
20 min15 min
25 min30 min (MAX)
(10000 lx or more)
Approx. 40 lx
Approx. 5 lx or less.
Approx. 20 lx
Brighter
Darker
Specifications of WRT33749-8 and WRT33649-8
Infrared I/O
Walking speed: 0.3 to 1 m/sec
Provided
Rating
Address setting method
Detection method
Detection speed
Sensor ON/OFF function
Diameter of 0.65-1.6 mm; 0.75-2.0 mm2
Diameter of 0.5-1.0 mm; 0.5-0.75 mm2
FULL-2WAY signal line
Applicable box
Lights-OFF delay time
Mounting method Box installation, ceiling installationby clamps (30 mm max.)
Adjustable from 10 sec to30 min approx.
• Pattern address setting • Individual/group address setting
Medium square outlet box withround-holed cover
WRT9600-8Wireless Programming UnitWRT9500K-8Wireless Address Setting Unit can be used for address setting.
Necessary for address setting.
When performing pattern and group control, be sure to set the pattern/group control content beforehand.For details, see P.39~42.
Precautions
Set address when Load 1 (lighting) is ON.
Set address when Load 1 (lighting) is OFF.
Set an arbitrary unused addressfor sensor ON/OFF
Set address for Load 2 (ventilation fan) control.
Set address for Load 1(lighting) control.
Not used
Set arbitrary unused addressfor sensor ON/OFF.Set address for Load 2(lighting) control.
Max. ceiling height is5m when usingthe hood.
• Enables users to change the timeLoad 2 (ventilation fan) is ON.Load 1 time + Load 2 time
Detection of changes in thepassive infrared level
Auxiliary passiveinfrared ceiling unit
WRT2050-80TransmissonUnit
WR34169-86A Contact Output T/U(Single Pole)(4-Circuit) Address (Example)
Receiver display lamp
Address setting transceiver
Sens
or
App
licab
lew
ires
Total wire length:100m max. Total wire length:100m max.
• • •
Lighting
Ventilation fan 1-21-1 Two wires, no polarity
WRT5551K-8switch (for 1 unit)Address (Example)1-2
WRT5551K-8Switch (for 1 Unit)Address (Example)1-1
WRT5551K-8Switch (for 1 Unit)Address (Example)63-4
WRT3365K-8•WRT3367K-8WRT3375K-8
6 units max.
Auxiliary unit wiringFULL-2WAY signal line
Two wires, no polarityAuxiliary units (For extension)
Passive infrared sensor ON/OFF switch Lighting ON/OFF switch Ventilation fan ON/OFF switch
Auxiliary unit Auxiliary unit WRT3365K-8•WRT3367K-8WRT3375K-8
6 units max.• Address setting (Example)Load 1 (Lighting) Load 2 (Ventilation fan)1-1 1-263-4Passive infrared sensor ON/OFF (Example)
WRT33749-8WRT33649-8Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit
WRT3367K-8Auxiliary Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit(Wide Detection Area Type) (with Amplifier)
Power source
Power source
Power source
Lights-OFF delay duration, Load 1 (lighting) The above adjustment times are a guideline.
Load 2 (ventilation fan) operatesregardless of the brightness sensor.
Lights-OFF delay time, Load 2 (ventilation fan) The above adjustment times are a guideline.
Input signal at 24 V Signalcurrent consumption 20 mA
(1) Enter detection state approx. 50 seconds after system startup (FULL-2WAY signals are supplied), and operation can be checked. Address setting can be done during the approx. 50 sec period.
(2) Perform address setting by using the WRT9500K-8 Address Setting Unit (Sold separately), or the WRT9600-8 Wireless Programming Unit (Sold Separately).
(3) Timer settings cannot be made.(4) For individual/group address setting, set the address for the first unit only .(5) If sensor ON/OFF is not used, clear the address.(6) When using pattern/group control, be sure to set the control content separately.
Features
1ch
Can be used to automatically turn lights ON or OFF,or dim lights, upon detection of movement by people.
RedBlue
RedBlueRedBlue
RedBlueRy1
Ry3
RedB
lueRe
dBlue
Ry2
Ry4
Ry5
Ry7
RedB
lueRe
dBlue
Ry6
Ry8
Powersource
20A HID Relay
Powersource
WR6161K-8
Switches Control Passive Infrared Unit Control
45 46
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Caution: The passive Infrared Ceiling Unit is only available for lighting control. Do not use to control non-lighting loads such as electrical equipment,air conditioning equipment, or alarm systems. Doing so may cause malfunction and lead to accident or injury.
Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit (Auxiliary Unit)
Features(1) Line-up includes wide-angle detection types.(2) Seven or more auxiliary units can be set up
by using the auxiliary extension type. This is suitable for use in spaces such as long corri-dors.
Wiring diagram
• When not usingauxiliary unit withextension function(WRT3367K-8)
9.8m
5.6m
For 2
m
3.5
m m
ax.
2.0m
3.5m
5.0m
2.8m1.2m
2.1m4.9m
3.2m
70˚
Detection area Adjust the detection area to 70 cm from the floor to enable detection of hand movement
Notes (WRT33749-8, WRT33649-8, WRT3394-8)
Note (WRT3375K-8, WRT3365K-8, WRT3367K-8, WRT3395-8)
(1) The unit detects the change in temperature (approx. 3˚C or more) due to the movement of a person and turns the load ON automatically. A certain amount of time after the final detection of movement of people, the unit automatically turns the lights OFF.If the difference in temperature between a person and the surrounding air is less than 3˚C, the unit may fail to make a detection. Fluorescent lamps or bulb-type fluorescent lamps that are excessively turned ON and OFF will have a shorter service life. When using the unit in an area with such frequent turning ON and OFF of lights, fit incandescent lights or set the lights-OFF delay function to a longer time setting. The life of the ON/OFF remote control relays should also be considered. See P. 15, 16.
(2) WRT33749-8 and WRT33649-8 do not receive signals from the passive infrared ceiling units for approximately 50 seconds after FULL-2WAY signal connection. Address setting also cannot be done. Addresses for passive infrared unit ON/OFF cannot overlap the addresses of other devices such as the T/U for relay control, and 6A relay units with T/U.
(3) Do not install the unit in places subject to severe temperature changes, such as in direct sunlight or in proximity to light fixtures that give off excessive heat.
(4) The passive infrared ceiling unit (WRT33749-8 and WRT33649-8) has a signal power consumption of 20mA, so install an amplifier if signal power consumption exceeds 500mA.
Do not connect the FULL-2WAY signal wires and transformer power supply 24V AC wires to the auxiliary unit terminals of the auxiliary unitThe internal circuits of the auxiliary unit may cause a malfunction and fail to detect correctly.
Use at a distance of at least 40 cmfrom incandescent lighting fixtures.
Use at a distance of at least 40 cmfrom incandescent lighting fixtures.
• When usingauxiliary unit withextension function(WRT3367K-8)
• Detection angle can beadjusted by 15˚ in alldirections. The detectionarea can be narrowedby using a special hood.
• Detection angle canbe adjusted by 15˚ inall directions.The detection area canbe narrowed by usinga special hood.
WRT3375K-8 WRT3365K-8 • WRT3367K-8
FULL-2WAYremote controlsystem
Main unit Auxiliary unit 1 Auxiliary unit 2 Auxiliary unit 6
Main unit Auxiliary unit 1 Auxiliary unit 2 Auxiliary unit 6
Auxiliary unit 1' Auxiliary unit 2' Auxiliary unit 6'
WRT33749-8WRT33649-8
WRT3365K-8WRT3375K-8
Signal wires for auxiliary units, Total wiring length: 100m max.FULL-2WAYsignal wires
6 auxiliary units max.
FULL-2WAYremote controlsystem
Repeats
WRT33749-8WRT33649-8
WRT3365K-8WRT3375K-8
Auxiliary Unit with Extension EquipmentWRT3367K-8
Signal wires for auxiliary units, Total wiring length: 100m max.
FULL-2WAY signal wires
Uses FULL-2WAY signalwires as power supply.
Signal wires for auxiliary units, Total wiring length: 100m max.
WRT3365K-8 Auxiliary Unit with Extension EquipmentWRT3367K-8
Max. ceiling heightis 5 m when usingthe hood.
WRT3365K-8Auxiliary Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit(Wide Detection Area Type)
WRT3367K-8Auxiliary Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit(Wide Detection Area Type)(with Amplifier)
Part names and function (with covering plate removed)
(1) Controls lighting by detecting brightness of natural light from outdoors. (Detected illuminance guideline: 100 lx to 2000 lx)
(2) Connects directly to FULL-2WAY signal wires.(3) Daylight sensor can be disabled to enable overriding
of ON/OFF switching.(4) Can control loads in two ranges, with different illuminances.(5) Enables individual, pattern, group control.(6) Enables control based on illuminance at desk top surface.
(Stores correlation ratio of ceiling and desktop illuminance)High cost performance, and eliminates the need for contact input T/U.
WRT3657-8Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit
Wiring diagram
Address and operation
Installation points
When performing pattern and group control, be sure to set the pattern/group control content beforehand.For details, see P. 45~50.
RedBlue
RedBlue
Ry1
Ry3
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
Ry2
Ry4
1
3
2
4
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
WRT2050-80 Transmission Unit (Function Expansion Type)
0ch
Sign
al
24V ACBlue W
hite
Power source
0-1
0-3
Power source
Relay control panel
Breaker power supply
Lighting fixture
WR6161K-820A HID Relay
To turn load 0-1 ON/OFF at a threshold of 1000 lx
Illuminance setting sectionSensor section
Infrared I/OD address setting transceiver • Sends and receives data
from address setting unit
• Detects illuminanceCan be adjusted within an angle of 40˚ in all directions.Move the sensor to face the direction of incoming light.
Flashes (5 times) when an I/R signal is received from the address setting controller. (Unlit): Initial setting is finished (Lit): Ceiling surface illuminance is standard
Stores illuminance correlation in memory. To reset, hold down for more than 2 seconds.
Mode select switch • Normal: To turn ON/OFF 5 minutes after reaching the set illuminance value (110% or 90%). • Inspect: To turn ON/OFF 1 second after reaching the ON illuminance value (110% or 90%). • Initial: To store correlation in memory. • Function expansion: To perform sensor ON/OFF (non-operating) address setting
The illuminance detector in this product is directional. Due to the angle of incidence of incoming light, there may be a difference between the detected illuminance and the value actually measured with a illuminance meter. Furthermore, it is designed to detect sunlight, so the detected illuminance will change if it is affected by fluorescent or incandescent lights. To determine the illuminance at which detection actually occurs, adjust the illuminance setting control of the product and check at the point where the ON/OFF LED switches on.To control using the desktop surface as the standard: • The illuminance correlation is not stored in memory if the illuminance of the ceiling surface is 2 times or more that of the desktop surface.
• A correlation coefficient cannot be stored in memory if the illuminance of the ceiling surface exceeds 4000 lx.
Notes:
Circuit Design for Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit Enables automatic ON/OFF switching of lights by detecting brightness near windows.
Features
Individual 0-1---
Individual 63-4
For ON/OFF
(Necessary) for daylight sensor ON/OFF (non-operation)
WRT5552K-8 Switch (2)
0-1
63-4
WRT3657-8 Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit
Address setting example
Function expansion mode
Address setting requires the WRT9600-8 or WRT9500K-8 setting unit.
1000 lx
Goes out when the detected illuminance goes above 1000 lx (+10% = 1100 lx)
Illuminance
Goes on when the detected illuminance drops below 1000 lx (-10% = 900 lx)
• The sensor unit performs ON/OFF control of lighting fixtures by detecting the brightness of natural light coming in from outdoors. Install in a position where natural light can be captured, as indicated in the diagram.
• Be sure to install the sensor section so that it faces a window. (Installation at a facing-north window is recommended.)
Safety Precaution
• Individual/Group control
• (Necessary) for sensor ON/OFF (non-operation) address setting
G2 1000 lx
Illuminance
G1 500 lx
G2 lit
G1 lit
G2 unlit
G1 unlitP3•P4 1000 lx
Illuminance
P1•P2 500 lx
P4 actuation
P2 actuation
P3 actuation
P1 actuation
GG
12
Address no. TimerPPPP
1234
Address no. Timer • Pattern control
Individual 63-4Address no. Timer
Illuminance setting sectionIlluminance is indicated with white letters.In the following example: 500 lx and 1000 lx
Corresponds with illuminance setting 1Corresponds with illuminance setting 2 Corresponds with illuminance setting 1
Corresponds with illuminance setting 2
Set address after setting switch
WRT9600-8
Arbitrary unused individual address
Necessary for address setting.
WRT9600-8Wireless Programming UnitWRT9500K-8Wireless Address Setting Unit can be used for address setting.
Natural light
Outdoors IndoorsInstall with the mode select switch and the memory setting switch closest to the window.
Approx. 1 m Separate by 1 m or more
40˚-0˚Move the sensor to face the direction where it can capture light.
Facing window
Lighting fixture
Illuminance setting 1 Illuminance setting 2
NormalInspect Initial
Function expansion
Mode select switch
Daylight Sensor Ceiling Units should only be used for lighting control. Do not use to control non-lighting loads such as electrical equipment, air conditioning equipment, or alarm systems. Doing so may cause malfunction and lead to accident or injury.
Daylight Sensor Control
47 48
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Caution: The passive Infrared Ceiling Unit is only available for lighting control. Do not use to control non-lighting loads such as electrical equipment,air conditioning equipment, or alarm systems. Doing so may cause malfunction and lead to accident or injury.
Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit (Auxiliary Unit)
Features(1) Line-up includes wide-angle detection types.(2) Seven or more auxiliary units can be set up
by using the auxiliary extension type. This is suitable for use in spaces such as long corri-dors.
Wiring diagram
• When not usingauxiliary unit withextension function(WRT3367K-8)
9.8m
5.6m
For 2
m
3.5
m m
ax.
2.0m
3.5m
5.0m
2.8m1.2m
2.1m4.9m
3.2m
70˚
Detection area Adjust the detection area to 70 cm from the floor to enable detection of hand movement
Notes (WRT33749-8, WRT33649-8, WRT3394-8)
Note (WRT3375K-8, WRT3365K-8, WRT3367K-8, WRT3395-8)
(1) The unit detects the change in temperature (approx. 3˚C or more) due to the movement of a person and turns the load ON automatically. A certain amount of time after the final detection of movement of people, the unit automatically turns the lights OFF.If the difference in temperature between a person and the surrounding air is less than 3˚C, the unit may fail to make a detection. Fluorescent lamps or bulb-type fluorescent lamps that are excessively turned ON and OFF will have a shorter service life. When using the unit in an area with such frequent turning ON and OFF of lights, fit incandescent lights or set the lights-OFF delay function to a longer time setting. The life of the ON/OFF remote control relays should also be considered. See P. 15, 16.
(2) WRT33749-8 and WRT33649-8 do not receive signals from the passive infrared ceiling units for approximately 50 seconds after FULL-2WAY signal connection. Address setting also cannot be done. Addresses for passive infrared unit ON/OFF cannot overlap the addresses of other devices such as the T/U for relay control, and 6A relay units with T/U.
(3) Do not install the unit in places subject to severe temperature changes, such as in direct sunlight or in proximity to light fixtures that give off excessive heat.
(4) The passive infrared ceiling unit (WRT33749-8 and WRT33649-8) has a signal power consumption of 20mA, so install an amplifier if signal power consumption exceeds 500mA.
Do not connect the FULL-2WAY signal wires and transformer power supply 24V AC wires to the auxiliary unit terminals of the auxiliary unitThe internal circuits of the auxiliary unit may cause a malfunction and fail to detect correctly.
Use at a distance of at least 40 cmfrom incandescent lighting fixtures.
Use at a distance of at least 40 cmfrom incandescent lighting fixtures.
• When usingauxiliary unit withextension function(WRT3367K-8)
• Detection angle can beadjusted by 15˚ in alldirections. The detectionarea can be narrowedby using a special hood.
• Detection angle canbe adjusted by 15˚ inall directions.The detection area canbe narrowed by usinga special hood.
WRT3375K-8 WRT3365K-8 • WRT3367K-8
FULL-2WAYremote controlsystem
Main unit Auxiliary unit 1 Auxiliary unit 2 Auxiliary unit 6
Main unit Auxiliary unit 1 Auxiliary unit 2 Auxiliary unit 6
Auxiliary unit 1' Auxiliary unit 2' Auxiliary unit 6'
WRT33749-8WRT33649-8
WRT3365K-8WRT3375K-8
Signal wires for auxiliary units, Total wiring length: 100m max.FULL-2WAYsignal wires
6 auxiliary units max.
FULL-2WAYremote controlsystem
Repeats
WRT33749-8WRT33649-8
WRT3365K-8WRT3375K-8
Auxiliary Unit with Extension EquipmentWRT3367K-8
Signal wires for auxiliary units, Total wiring length: 100m max.
FULL-2WAY signal wires
Uses FULL-2WAY signalwires as power supply.
Signal wires for auxiliary units, Total wiring length: 100m max.
WRT3365K-8 Auxiliary Unit with Extension EquipmentWRT3367K-8
Max. ceiling heightis 5 m when usingthe hood.
WRT3365K-8Auxiliary Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit(Wide Detection Area Type)
WRT3367K-8Auxiliary Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit(Wide Detection Area Type)(with Amplifier)
Part names and function (with covering plate removed)
(1) Controls lighting by detecting brightness of natural light from outdoors. (Detected illuminance guideline: 100 lx to 2000 lx)
(2) Connects directly to FULL-2WAY signal wires.(3) Daylight sensor can be disabled to enable overriding
of ON/OFF switching.(4) Can control loads in two ranges, with different illuminances.(5) Enables individual, pattern, group control.(6) Enables control based on illuminance at desk top surface.
(Stores correlation ratio of ceiling and desktop illuminance)High cost performance, and eliminates the need for contact input T/U.
WRT3657-8Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit
Wiring diagram
Address and operation
Installation points
When performing pattern and group control, be sure to set the pattern/group control content beforehand.For details, see P. 45~50.
RedBlue
RedBlue
Ry1
Ry3
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
Ry2
Ry4
1
3
2
4
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
WRT2050-80 Transmission Unit (Function Expansion Type)
0ch
Sign
al
24V ACBlue W
hite
Power source
0-1
0-3
Power source
Relay control panel
Breaker power supply
Lighting fixture
WR6161K-820A HID Relay
To turn load 0-1 ON/OFF at a threshold of 1000 lx
Illuminance setting sectionSensor section
Infrared I/OD address setting transceiver • Sends and receives data
from address setting unit
• Detects illuminanceCan be adjusted within an angle of 40˚ in all directions.Move the sensor to face the direction of incoming light.
Flashes (5 times) when an I/R signal is received from the address setting controller. (Unlit): Initial setting is finished (Lit): Ceiling surface illuminance is standard
Stores illuminance correlation in memory. To reset, hold down for more than 2 seconds.
Mode select switch • Normal: To turn ON/OFF 5 minutes after reaching the set illuminance value (110% or 90%). • Inspect: To turn ON/OFF 1 second after reaching the ON illuminance value (110% or 90%). • Initial: To store correlation in memory. • Function expansion: To perform sensor ON/OFF (non-operating) address setting
The illuminance detector in this product is directional. Due to the angle of incidence of incoming light, there may be a difference between the detected illuminance and the value actually measured with a illuminance meter. Furthermore, it is designed to detect sunlight, so the detected illuminance will change if it is affected by fluorescent or incandescent lights. To determine the illuminance at which detection actually occurs, adjust the illuminance setting control of the product and check at the point where the ON/OFF LED switches on.To control using the desktop surface as the standard: • The illuminance correlation is not stored in memory if the illuminance of the ceiling surface is 2 times or more that of the desktop surface.
• A correlation coefficient cannot be stored in memory if the illuminance of the ceiling surface exceeds 4000 lx.
Notes:
Circuit Design for Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit Enables automatic ON/OFF switching of lights by detecting brightness near windows.
Features
Individual 0-1---
Individual 63-4
For ON/OFF
(Necessary) for daylight sensor ON/OFF (non-operation)
WRT5552K-8 Switch (2)
0-1
63-4
WRT3657-8 Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit
Address setting example
Function expansion mode
Address setting requires the WRT9600-8 or WRT9500K-8 setting unit.
1000 lx
Goes out when the detected illuminance goes above 1000 lx (+10% = 1100 lx)
Illuminance
Goes on when the detected illuminance drops below 1000 lx (-10% = 900 lx)
• The sensor unit performs ON/OFF control of lighting fixtures by detecting the brightness of natural light coming in from outdoors. Install in a position where natural light can be captured, as indicated in the diagram.
• Be sure to install the sensor section so that it faces a window. (Installation at a facing-north window is recommended.)
Safety Precaution
• Individual/Group control
• (Necessary) for sensor ON/OFF (non-operation) address setting
G2 1000 lx
Illuminance
G1 500 lx
G2 lit
G1 lit
G2 unlit
G1 unlitP3•P4 1000 lx
Illuminance
P1•P2 500 lx
P4 actuation
P2 actuation
P3 actuation
P1 actuation
GG
12
Address no. TimerPPPP
1234
Address no. Timer • Pattern control
Individual 63-4Address no. Timer
Illuminance setting sectionIlluminance is indicated with white letters.In the following example: 500 lx and 1000 lx
Corresponds with illuminance setting 1Corresponds with illuminance setting 2 Corresponds with illuminance setting 1
Corresponds with illuminance setting 2
Set address after setting switch
WRT9600-8
Arbitrary unused individual address
Necessary for address setting.
WRT9600-8Wireless Programming UnitWRT9500K-8Wireless Address Setting Unit can be used for address setting.
Natural light
Outdoors IndoorsInstall with the mode select switch and the memory setting switch closest to the window.
Approx. 1 m Separate by 1 m or more
40˚-0˚Move the sensor to face the direction where it can capture light.
Facing window
Lighting fixture
Illuminance setting 1 Illuminance setting 2
NormalInspect Initial
Function expansion
Mode select switch
Daylight Sensor Ceiling Units should only be used for lighting control. Do not use to control non-lighting loads such as electrical equipment, air conditioning equipment, or alarm systems. Doing so may cause malfunction and lead to accident or injury.
Daylight Sensor Control
47 48
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
1
3
2
4
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
WRT2050-80 Transmission Unit (Function Expansion Type)
Sign
al
24V ACBlue W
hite
Power source
Power source
2nd row near window 1st row near window
Blue
Whi
te
Power supply terminalDimmer terminal
Power supply terminalDimmer terminal
Relay control panel
FULL-2WAY signal wire
Power supply WRT42444-8Dimmer Unit
WR6161K-820A HID Relay
Breaker power supply
0-4
1-2
0-2
1-1
1-11-2
63-4
For dimmer signal ON/OFF
For daylight sensor ON/OFF (non-operation)
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
WR3400-8 Relay Control T/U
Red
BlueR
edBlue
Ry1
Ry3
Red
Blu
eR
ed B
lue
Ry2
Ry4
0-1
0-3
Breaker power supply
0ch
2nd row lights up at 70%
1st row lights up at 30%
When bright P1 When dark P2
Lights up at 100%
For manual dimming
Daylight SensorWRT3657-8
For load ON/OFF0-40-2
1-1 1-2
Example of using Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit
Wiring diagram
Individual 63-4
Address setting
When brightWhen dark
Function expansion mode
PP
12
1-1 ON 70%1-2 ON 30%
1-1 ON 100%1-2 ON 100%
Address no.
Dims when outdoor light is bright, and lights up 100% when dark.
1
3
2
4
Red
BlueR
edBlue
Ry1
Ry3
Red
Blu
eR
ed B
lue
Ry2
Ry4
0-1
0-3
Breaker power supply
0ch
Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit (with Separate Setting Unit)
Features
Outline of operation
(1) The sensor detects the outside light brightness to control interior lighting.Unnecessary lighting can be avoided while it is light outside.(Rough guide for illuminance setting: 60 lx to 9080 lx)
(2) You can set the illuminance from the illuminance/address setting unit installed on the wall of a control room.
(3) Installation in a high ceiling of a station platform, factory, warehouse, etc. is recom-mended.
Wiring diagram
Names and Functions
WRT3655-8FULL-2WAYDaylight Sensor Ceiling Unit (with Separate Setting Unit) Plate [Optional]
Applicable Transmission Unit is WRT2050 and WRT2040 Series.
Sign
al
WRT2050 series etc.(Transmission Unit)
WR2301-811 etc.(Remote Control Transformer:Not for U.S.A)
WRT5554K-8 etc.(Switch)
WR6161K-84 etc.(20A HID Relay)
24V ACBlue W
hite
Power source Power
source
Lighting fixture
• Not used
Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit Separate Setting UnitLCD Display
BACK key • Return to the former setting.
MODE key • To select the mode.
PRG key • To select
the illuminanceprogram.
SET key • To fix the settings.
(1)Method of Setting a Sensor Address•Open the cover plate of the separate setting unit. Press the "MODE" button twice to align the"-" mark with "SENS."
•Press the " " or " " button to display the same number as the sensor address that was set in "Settings/ 1. Setting a Sensor Address (Sensor Unit) ".The value can increment or decrement faster by pressing and holding " " or " " continuously.
•Press the "SET" button to fix the data.•Press the "MODE" button three times to move the cursor (-) to the "NML" position.Setting mode will return to normal mode in no key is pressed for more than 10 minutes.
If you press the "MODE" button or no key is pressed for more than 10 minutes, all settings after pressing the "SET" button last will not be stored.
(2)Method of Setting a Control Address•Open the cover plate of the separate setting unit. Press the "MODE" button third to align the "-" mark with "CTRL."
•Press the " " or " " button to display "Individual" for the "Illuminance level 1 address."
•Press the "SET" button.•Press the " " or " " button to display load channel "0."The value can be forward faster by pressing and holding " " or " " continuously.
•Press the "SET" button to fix the data.•Press the " " or " " button to display load No. "1."•Press the "SET" button to fix the data.•Set individual 0-2 to illuminance level 2 address by the same way.
•Press the "MODE" button three times to move the cursor(-) to the "NML" position.Setting mode will return to normal mode in no key is pressed for more than 10 minutes.If you press the "MODE" button or no key is pressed for more than 10 minutes, all settings after pressing the "SET" button last will not be stored.
(3)Setting Illuminance•Open the cover plate of the separate setting unit. Press the "MODE" button once to align the "-" mark with "lx SET."The "PRG No." blinks.
•Select the "PRG No." with " " or " ", press the "SET" button to the data.•The allowable PRG No. is 1 to 6.•Adjust the illuminance level (60 lx - 9080 lx) with " " or " ", press the "SET" button to the data.The set value advances by 10 lx each time the " " or " " button is pressed.The value can be forward faster by pressing and holding " " or " " continuously.When "50 lx" is set, the system does not operate correctly because the non-operating area is below the lowest detectable illuminance level of 50 lx.Also, the system does not operate correctly when "9090 lx to 9990 lx" is set because the non-operating area exceeds the highest limit of detectable illuminance level of 9990 lx.
•Repeat the procedure for setting illuminance level 2.Setting "Illuminance level 1" only or "Illuminance level 2" only is also possible.
•Press the "MODE" button four times to move the cursor (-) to the "NML" position.Setting mode will return to normal mode in no key is pressed for more than 10 minutes.If you press the "MODE" button or no key is pressed for more than 10 minutes, all settings after pressing the "SET" button last will not be stored.
Button
Rotary Switches
Illuminance Detector
• To set the sensor address
• Illuminance is detected.It is adjustable within an angle of 40°in all directions
Move the illuminance detectorto face the direction of observation.
FULL-2WAY signal wire
0-2
60-4
WRT3655-8(Separate Setting Unit)Installed at the control room
WRT3655-8(Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit)
For ON/OFF
(Necessary)for daylight sensor ON/OFF(non-operation)
Illuminance DetectorControl Signal
(When it is based on 500lx. )
500 lx
Illuminance
Factories Warehouses
Recommended cases
Sensor
Can be operated by Separate Setting Unit is built into the wall.
Relay control panel
(-10%=450 lx) ON(+10%=550 lx) OFF
60ch
Can control sensorDisable/Enable from this unit.
Example:Setting Illuminance : 500 lxSensor Address : 60chControl Address : 0-2
To turn load 0-2 ON/OFF at a threshold of 500 lx
key • To increase( ) or
decrease( ) the value.
Sensor Unit Setting a Sensor AddressTurn the rotary switch to the sensor address to be used.(ex:60ch) Separate Setting Unit
49 50
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
1
3
2
4
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
WRT2050-80 Transmission Unit (Function Expansion Type)
Sign
al
24V ACBlue W
hite
Power source
Power source
2nd row near window 1st row near window
Blue
Whi
te
Power supply terminalDimmer terminal
Power supply terminalDimmer terminal
Relay control panel
FULL-2WAY signal wire
Power supply WRT42444-8Dimmer Unit
WR6161K-820A HID Relay
Breaker power supply
0-4
1-2
0-2
1-1
1-11-2
63-4
For dimmer signal ON/OFF
For daylight sensor ON/OFF (non-operation)
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
WR3400-8 Relay Control T/U
Red
BlueR
edBlue
Ry1
Ry3
Red
Blu
eR
ed B
lue
Ry2
Ry4
0-1
0-3
Breaker power supply
0ch
2nd row lights up at 70%
1st row lights up at 30%
When bright P1 When dark P2
Lights up at 100%
For manual dimming
Daylight SensorWRT3657-8
For load ON/OFF0-40-2
1-1 1-2
Example of using Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit
Wiring diagram
Individual 63-4
Address setting
When brightWhen dark
Function expansion mode
PP
12
1-1 ON 70%1-2 ON 30%
1-1 ON 100%1-2 ON 100%
Address no.
Dims when outdoor light is bright, and lights up 100% when dark.
1
3
2
4
Red
BlueR
edBlue
Ry1
Ry3
Red
Blu
eR
ed B
lue
Ry2
Ry4
0-1
0-3
Breaker power supply
0ch
Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit (with Separate Setting Unit)
Features
Outline of operation
(1) The sensor detects the outside light brightness to control interior lighting.Unnecessary lighting can be avoided while it is light outside.(Rough guide for illuminance setting: 60 lx to 9080 lx)
(2) You can set the illuminance from the illuminance/address setting unit installed on the wall of a control room.
(3) Installation in a high ceiling of a station platform, factory, warehouse, etc. is recom-mended.
Wiring diagram
Names and Functions
WRT3655-8FULL-2WAYDaylight Sensor Ceiling Unit (with Separate Setting Unit) Plate [Optional]
Applicable Transmission Unit is WRT2050 and WRT2040 Series.
Sign
al
WRT2050 series etc.(Transmission Unit)
WR2301-811 etc.(Remote Control Transformer:Not for U.S.A)
WRT5554K-8 etc.(Switch)
WR6161K-84 etc.(20A HID Relay)
24V ACBlue W
hite
Power source Power
source
Lighting fixture
• Not used
Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit Separate Setting UnitLCD Display
BACK key • Return to the former setting.
MODE key • To select the mode.
PRG key • To select
the illuminanceprogram.
SET key • To fix the settings.
(1)Method of Setting a Sensor Address•Open the cover plate of the separate setting unit. Press the "MODE" button twice to align the"-" mark with "SENS."
•Press the " " or " " button to display the same number as the sensor address that was set in "Settings/ 1. Setting a Sensor Address (Sensor Unit) ".The value can increment or decrement faster by pressing and holding " " or " " continuously.
•Press the "SET" button to fix the data.•Press the "MODE" button three times to move the cursor (-) to the "NML" position.Setting mode will return to normal mode in no key is pressed for more than 10 minutes.
If you press the "MODE" button or no key is pressed for more than 10 minutes, all settings after pressing the "SET" button last will not be stored.
(2)Method of Setting a Control Address•Open the cover plate of the separate setting unit. Press the "MODE" button third to align the "-" mark with "CTRL."
•Press the " " or " " button to display "Individual" for the "Illuminance level 1 address."
•Press the "SET" button.•Press the " " or " " button to display load channel "0."The value can be forward faster by pressing and holding " " or " " continuously.
•Press the "SET" button to fix the data.•Press the " " or " " button to display load No. "1."•Press the "SET" button to fix the data.•Set individual 0-2 to illuminance level 2 address by the same way.
•Press the "MODE" button three times to move the cursor(-) to the "NML" position.Setting mode will return to normal mode in no key is pressed for more than 10 minutes.If you press the "MODE" button or no key is pressed for more than 10 minutes, all settings after pressing the "SET" button last will not be stored.
(3)Setting Illuminance•Open the cover plate of the separate setting unit. Press the "MODE" button once to align the "-" mark with "lx SET."The "PRG No." blinks.
•Select the "PRG No." with " " or " ", press the "SET" button to the data.•The allowable PRG No. is 1 to 6.•Adjust the illuminance level (60 lx - 9080 lx) with " " or " ", press the "SET" button to the data.The set value advances by 10 lx each time the " " or " " button is pressed.The value can be forward faster by pressing and holding " " or " " continuously.When "50 lx" is set, the system does not operate correctly because the non-operating area is below the lowest detectable illuminance level of 50 lx.Also, the system does not operate correctly when "9090 lx to 9990 lx" is set because the non-operating area exceeds the highest limit of detectable illuminance level of 9990 lx.
•Repeat the procedure for setting illuminance level 2.Setting "Illuminance level 1" only or "Illuminance level 2" only is also possible.
•Press the "MODE" button four times to move the cursor (-) to the "NML" position.Setting mode will return to normal mode in no key is pressed for more than 10 minutes.If you press the "MODE" button or no key is pressed for more than 10 minutes, all settings after pressing the "SET" button last will not be stored.
Button
Rotary Switches
Illuminance Detector
• To set the sensor address
• Illuminance is detected.It is adjustable within an angle of 40°in all directions
Move the illuminance detectorto face the direction of observation.
FULL-2WAY signal wire
0-2
60-4
WRT3655-8(Separate Setting Unit)Installed at the control room
WRT3655-8(Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit)
For ON/OFF
(Necessary)for daylight sensor ON/OFF(non-operation)
Illuminance DetectorControl Signal
(When it is based on 500lx. )
500 lx
Illuminance
Factories Warehouses
Recommended cases
Sensor
Can be operated by Separate Setting Unit is built into the wall.
Relay control panel
(-10%=450 lx) ON(+10%=550 lx) OFF
60ch
Can control sensorDisable/Enable from this unit.
Example:Setting Illuminance : 500 lxSensor Address : 60chControl Address : 0-2
To turn load 0-2 ON/OFF at a threshold of 500 lx
key • To increase( ) or
decrease( ) the value.
Sensor Unit Setting a Sensor AddressTurn the rotary switch to the sensor address to be used.(ex:60ch) Separate Setting Unit
49 50
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Wireless Control Dimmer Control for Incandescent lamps
51 52
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Wireless Control Dimmer Control for Incandescent lamps
51 52
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
WRT42444-8Dimmer Unit
1ch
Power source
Powersource
Powersource
Power source
WRT42444-8Dimmer Unit (0-10V DC)(4-Circuit)
WRT4741-82LED Dimmer Unit(Phase Control) (360VA, 220V AC)(Panel Use)
(1) Enables control of the continuous dimming of Dimmeable Ballastand LED Power Supply (0-10V DC Type).
(2) Enables step-free brightness adjustment to suit the situation from a local switch.
(3) Enables the handling of a large number of dimming circuits: Uses individual addresses.(Circuits used for dimming control) = (256 circuits) - (Circuits used for individual control) - (Circuits used for anotherlamps dimming control)
(4) Enables group dimming.Dimming circuits using load (individual) addresses can be controlled as a group using a single dimming switch.Be sure to perform group control content setting. For details, see P.40.
(5) WRT42444-8 can set upper and lower limit of dimming range to prevent flickers of the lamp.
0 - 10V DC Type Phase Control Type
(1) When pressing UP/DOWN button of the Dimmer Switch(WRT5771K-8, WRT5731WK-8), the dimmer voltage goes higher/lower and results in higher/lower brightness of the load.
(2) Enables step-free brightness adjustment to suit the situation from a local switch.
(3) Enables the handling of a large number of dimming circuits: Uses individual addresses. (Circuits used for dimming control) = (256 circuits) - (Circuits used for individual control) - (Circuits used for anotherlamps dimming control)
(4) The overload indicator LED flashes and the loads are repeating to turn on and turn off in 3.0 sec periods, when overload protection works. After the overload condition is restored, it is possible to control the dimmer of the LED lamps and the LED of the overload sensing function turns off.
(5) WRT42444-8 can set upper and lower limit of dimming range to prevent flickers of the lamp.
It is possible to change the dimmer range, if the setting of the Upper Trim or Lower Trim has been changed.
It is possible to change turn-on method for the appli-cable load by setting the Lower Trim.
Features Features
Wiring diagram
G1: 1-1, 1-2(Enables group dimming using theG2: 0-2, 0-4
1
3
2
4
Sign
al
24V ACBlue W
hite
Blue
Whi
te
Dimmable ballast(0-10V DC Type)Power supply
Dimming terminalsPower supply
Dimming terminalsPower supply
Dimming terminalsPower supply
Dimming terminals
Relay control panel
• When conducting continuous dimming of load addresses 0-2 and 0-4• Maintain dimming level
The load operate with the dimmer level before turn-off.
Lower Trim(Maintain dimming level, 0 %)
Lower Trim(MAX level lighting → Fade, 0 %)
After the load operates with MAX level lighting, the load operates with he dimmer level before turn-off.
FULL-2WAY signal line
0-40-2
1-1 1-2
0-10-20-30-41-21-1
1-1 1-2 G1
G1
For brightness adjustment
For load ON/OFF(individual or group)
0-40-2
1-1 1-2
Red
BlueR
edBlue
Ry1
Ry3
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
Ry2
Ry40ch
Operation Setting
Wiring diagram
Notes on dimmer control1-1
1-2
Step 1:
Unlit
Step 2: Press Load ON/OFFswitch.
Step 3:
Lit Red(load ON)
Brightnessguidance LED
Lit Green(load OFF)
Lit GreenLED display inset state
Lit at set brightness
Adjust brightness bypressingthe and of the Brightness adjustmentswitches.
Press the Load ON/OFFswitch.
Stays Lit Red
Lights up at adjusted brightness
Press 1-1 of the Dimmer signal ON/OFF switchbeforehand.
For dimmer signal ON/OFF
Step 4:
Unlit
Turns ON/OFF at theadjusted brightness.
Dimmer switchDimmer switchDimmer switch Dimmer switch
0-2 0-2
1-11-1 1-1 1-1
For loadON/OFF
0-2 0-2
For dimming signal ON/OFF
G1
G2Select switch section
Local switch
Necessary for address setting.
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
WR3400-8Relay Control T/U
WR6161K-820A HID Relay
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
WRT5850-8Program SettingUnit
WRT5771K-8Dimmer SwitchX 3
WRT5554K-8Switch(4)
WRT5771K-8Dimmer SwitchX 3
WRT2050-80Transmisson Unit
Power source
WRT9600-8Wireless Programming UnitWRT9500K-8Wireless Address Setting Unit can be used for address setting.
Necessary for address setting.
WRT9600-8Wireless Programming UnitWRT9500K-8Wireless Address Setting Unit can be used for address setting.
0-10V output max 100mA
The brightness control switch cannot be adjusted up and down when the dimmer signal is OFF, so install a dimmer signal ON/OFF switch. If the settings are all OFF in pattern control, do not apply to dimmer signal OFF. Install one remote control transformer for four Dimmer units.
(1) When connecting multiple LED lamps, keep the peak current at less than 7A.The overload detection function of the dimmer unit operate, if peak current has been used more than 7A and within applicable loads. It is not possible to control the dimmer of the LED lamps.(Vnknown pf : 180W 220V AC) In case of unknown peak current, confirm the peak current to LED lamp manufacturer.
(2) Take care of the output rating within 360 VA, when exchangethe incandescent lamps for the LED lamps.It becomes the cause of damaged, if the dimmer unit has been used more
Dimming signal lines 0.9- 1.2 wire, wiring length 100m max.
Push to turn off Push to turn on
• MAX level lighting Fade
FULL-2WAY signal line
0-10-20-30-40-2
Power source
Powersource
220V AC
1
3
2
4
Sign
al
24V ACBlue W
hite
Relay control panel
Red
BlueR
edBlue
Ry1
Ry3
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
Ry2
Ry40ch
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
WR3400-8Relay Control T/U WR6161K-8
20A HID Relay
WRT2050-80Transmisson Unit
WRT4741-82Dimmer Unit
than the maximum rated capacity.(3) When closely installing multiple dimmer units, installing multiple mounting
dimmer units, keep the load capacity at 80% or less in order to prevent overheating.
(4) The minimum load capacity of dimmer circuits is more than 16W per LED lamp. It becomes the cause of the flicker of LED lamp by using less than 16 W per LED lamp.
(5) Low-voltage mini halogen lamps cannot be used.
• Lower side limit: 0 % to 30 %, by 5% step• Upper side limit: 60% to 100%, by 5% step
1-1
Dimmer Control for LED
53 54
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
bright
Lower TrimSettingEx.) 0%
Dimmer level 1 Dimmer level 7
Upper TrimSettingEx.) 100%
dark
Dimmable Range
95%
10%Dimmer level 1 Dimmer level 7
Lower TrimSettingEx.) 20%
Upper TrimSettingEx.) 90%
dark
bright
Dimmable Range
95%
10%
Upper Trim(100%)
Lower Trim(0%)
Upper Trim(90%)
Lower Trim(20%)
95%
0%
Power supply
Push to turn off Push to turn on
95%
0%
bright
dark
bright
dark
LED Lamp
Fluorescent
Local Switch
WRT42444-8Dimmer Unit
1ch
Power source
Powersource
Powersource
Power source
WRT42444-8Dimmer Unit (0-10V DC)(4-Circuit)
WRT4741-82LED Dimmer Unit(Phase Control) (360VA, 220V AC)(Panel Use)
(1) Enables control of the continuous dimming of Dimmeable Ballastand LED Power Supply (0-10V DC Type).
(2) Enables step-free brightness adjustment to suit the situation from a local switch.
(3) Enables the handling of a large number of dimming circuits: Uses individual addresses.(Circuits used for dimming control) = (256 circuits) - (Circuits used for individual control) - (Circuits used for anotherlamps dimming control)
(4) Enables group dimming.Dimming circuits using load (individual) addresses can be controlled as a group using a single dimming switch.Be sure to perform group control content setting. For details, see P.40.
(5) WRT42444-8 can set upper and lower limit of dimming range to prevent flickers of the lamp.
0 - 10V DC Type Phase Control Type
(1) When pressing UP/DOWN button of the Dimmer Switch(WRT5771K-8, WRT5731WK-8), the dimmer voltage goes higher/lower and results in higher/lower brightness of the load.
(2) Enables step-free brightness adjustment to suit the situation from a local switch.
(3) Enables the handling of a large number of dimming circuits: Uses individual addresses. (Circuits used for dimming control) = (256 circuits) - (Circuits used for individual control) - (Circuits used for anotherlamps dimming control)
(4) The overload indicator LED flashes and the loads are repeating to turn on and turn off in 3.0 sec periods, when overload protection works. After the overload condition is restored, it is possible to control the dimmer of the LED lamps and the LED of the overload sensing function turns off.
(5) WRT42444-8 can set upper and lower limit of dimming range to prevent flickers of the lamp.
It is possible to change the dimmer range, if the setting of the Upper Trim or Lower Trim has been changed.
It is possible to change turn-on method for the appli-cable load by setting the Lower Trim.
Features Features
Wiring diagram
G1: 1-1, 1-2(Enables group dimming using theG2: 0-2, 0-4
1
3
2
4
Sign
al
24V ACBlue W
hite
Blue
Whi
te
Dimmable ballast(0-10V DC Type)Power supply
Dimming terminalsPower supply
Dimming terminalsPower supply
Dimming terminalsPower supply
Dimming terminals
Relay control panel
• When conducting continuous dimming of load addresses 0-2 and 0-4• Maintain dimming level
The load operate with the dimmer level before turn-off.
Lower Trim(Maintain dimming level, 0 %)
Lower Trim(MAX level lighting → Fade, 0 %)
After the load operates with MAX level lighting, the load operates with he dimmer level before turn-off.
FULL-2WAY signal line
0-40-2
1-1 1-2
0-10-20-30-41-21-1
1-1 1-2 G1
G1
For brightness adjustment
For load ON/OFF(individual or group)
0-40-2
1-1 1-2
Red
BlueR
edBlue
Ry1
Ry3
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
Ry2
Ry40ch
Operation Setting
Wiring diagram
Notes on dimmer control1-1
1-2
Step 1:
Unlit
Step 2: Press Load ON/OFFswitch.
Step 3:
Lit Red(load ON)
Brightnessguidance LED
Lit Green(load OFF)
Lit GreenLED display inset state
Lit at set brightness
Adjust brightness bypressingthe and of the Brightness adjustmentswitches.
Press the Load ON/OFFswitch.
Stays Lit Red
Lights up at adjusted brightness
Press 1-1 of the Dimmer signal ON/OFF switchbeforehand.
For dimmer signal ON/OFF
Step 4:
Unlit
Turns ON/OFF at theadjusted brightness.
Dimmer switchDimmer switchDimmer switch Dimmer switch
0-2 0-2
1-11-1 1-1 1-1
For loadON/OFF
0-2 0-2
For dimming signal ON/OFF
G1
G2Select switch section
Local switch
Necessary for address setting.
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
WR3400-8Relay Control T/U
WR6161K-820A HID Relay
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
WRT5850-8Program SettingUnit
WRT5771K-8Dimmer SwitchX 3
WRT5554K-8Switch(4)
WRT5771K-8Dimmer SwitchX 3
WRT2050-80Transmisson Unit
Power source
WRT9600-8Wireless Programming UnitWRT9500K-8Wireless Address Setting Unit can be used for address setting.
Necessary for address setting.
WRT9600-8Wireless Programming UnitWRT9500K-8Wireless Address Setting Unit can be used for address setting.
0-10V output max 100mA
The brightness control switch cannot be adjusted up and down when the dimmer signal is OFF, so install a dimmer signal ON/OFF switch. If the settings are all OFF in pattern control, do not apply to dimmer signal OFF. Install one remote control transformer for four Dimmer units.
(1) When connecting multiple LED lamps, keep the peak current at less than 7A.The overload detection function of the dimmer unit operate, if peak current has been used more than 7A and within applicable loads. It is not possible to control the dimmer of the LED lamps.(Vnknown pf : 180W 220V AC) In case of unknown peak current, confirm the peak current to LED lamp manufacturer.
(2) Take care of the output rating within 360 VA, when exchangethe incandescent lamps for the LED lamps.It becomes the cause of damaged, if the dimmer unit has been used more
Dimming signal lines 0.9- 1.2 wire, wiring length 100m max.
Push to turn off Push to turn on
• MAX level lighting Fade
FULL-2WAY signal line
0-10-20-30-40-2
Power source
Powersource
220V AC
1
3
2
4
Sign
al
24V ACBlue W
hite
Relay control panel
Red
BlueR
edBlue
Ry1
Ry3
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
Ry2
Ry40ch
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
WR3400-8Relay Control T/U WR6161K-8
20A HID Relay
WRT2050-80Transmisson Unit
WRT4741-82Dimmer Unit
than the maximum rated capacity.(3) When closely installing multiple dimmer units, installing multiple mounting
dimmer units, keep the load capacity at 80% or less in order to prevent overheating.
(4) The minimum load capacity of dimmer circuits is more than 16W per LED lamp. It becomes the cause of the flicker of LED lamp by using less than 16 W per LED lamp.
(5) Low-voltage mini halogen lamps cannot be used.
• Lower side limit: 0 % to 30 %, by 5% step• Upper side limit: 60% to 100%, by 5% step
1-1
Dimmer Control for LED
53 54
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
bright
Lower TrimSettingEx.) 0%
Dimmer level 1 Dimmer level 7
Upper TrimSettingEx.) 100%
dark
Dimmable Range
95%
10%Dimmer level 1 Dimmer level 7
Lower TrimSettingEx.) 20%
Upper TrimSettingEx.) 90%
dark
bright
Dimmable Range
95%
10%
Upper Trim(100%)
Lower Trim(0%)
Upper Trim(90%)
Lower Trim(20%)
95%
0%
Power supply
Push to turn off Push to turn on
95%
0%
bright
dark
bright
dark
LED Lamp
Fluorescent
Local Switch
PAGE
P
0
1
4
7
G
2
5
8
CPATTERN GROUP
CHANGE ADDRESS
CLEAR
3
6
9
NML P • G SP
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
BACK
ENT
MODE
Using and , set to EDIT,
and press .
Central Control and Programming Unit (WRT9103K-89) Setting Method
Part identification and function
Basic Setting Method
Step For Pattern Setting For Group Setting
2
3
4
5
1
PAGE
P
0
1
4
7
G
2
5
8
CPATTERN GROUP
CHANGE ADDRESS
CLEAR
3
6
9
NML P.G SP
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Mode key • Switches between normal, P/G and special mode.
Selector switch section
Back key • Switches back to menu, and cancels setting.
Change key • Use for menu switching.
ENT key • Executes setting, etc.
Numeric keypad • For inputting numeric values.
Pattern and Group key • Selects pattern/group.
Clear key • Clears setting values.
Change address key • Increment and decrement addresses.
Using , set the mark to P • G.MODE
1.2. 3.
Press (pattern). Press (group).P G
Input the address to be edited by using the numeric keypad or and .
• The control setting for that address is displayed on the selector display. • Set the fade time or use the edit functions if necessary.
CTo re-enter input, clear with .
Use the selector keys to select the data. • The channel display can be selected with PAGE . • The status changes each time the key is pressed. • During selection, the cursor (_) is displayed on the selector display.<Selector display>Display
XNone
StatusON (TO: Timer set, LO: Dimming level set)OFFOutside area
Use the selector keys to select the data. • The channel display can be selected with PAGE . • The status changes each time the key is pressed. • During selection, the cursor (_) is displayed on the selector display.<Selector display>Display
None
StatusLoad included in group (TO: Timer setting)Load not included in group
0 ch to 15 ch
You can input the control setting for the displayed address from the transmission unit by holding down at this time (for approx. 3 seconds).
You can output the control setting for the displayed address from the transmission unit by holding down at this time (for approx. 3 seconds). (It is stored in memory of this unit at the same time.)
Setting switch section
Page keys • Chage address for selector switch
• Displays address and status.
• Use for setting and control.
Selector display(LCD panel)
• Use for displaying menus, etc.
Main display(LCD panel)Selector key
ENT
X O
0 ch to 15 ch
16 ch to 31 ch
32 ch to 47 ch48 ch to 63 ch
D1 to D16
1
1 1
O1
BACK
EDIT DATA
NML P • G SP
ADD.COPY DATAREV. DATAERASE DATA
PEDIT DATA
NML P • G SP
ADD.COPY DATAREV. DATAERASE DATA
EDIT
NML P • G SP
INPUT FROM CPU
OUTPUT TO CPU
16 ch to 31 ch
32 ch to 47 ch48 ch to 63 ch
D1 to D16
ENT
MODE
The main display and the selector display automatically turn off if there are no key inputs for 10 minutes. Press any key to restore the original display. (The key operation at this time only restores the display.)
If the transmission unit setting is WR3212 series, there are no menu options for OUTPUT TO CPU, COPY DATA, REV. DATA and ERASE DATA.
TO is displayed only when the transmission unit setting is WRT2050 series or WRT2040 series or WRT2000 series.
TO and LO are displayed only when the transmission unit setting is WRT2050 series
The control settings for the address being edited are not stored as is in memory of the unit, so store in memory by switching the address or switching the menu after editing.
PAGE
P
0
1
4
7
G
2
5
8
CPATTERN GROUP
CHANGE ADDRESS
CLEAR
3
6
9
NML P.G SPECIAL
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
BACK
ENT
MODE
PAGE
P
0
1
4
7
G
2
5
8
CPATTERN GROUP
CHANGE ADDRESS
CLEAR
3
6
9
NML P.G SPECIAL
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
BACK
ENT
MODE
PAGE
P
0
1
4
7
G
2
5
8
CPATTERN GROUP
CHANGE ADDRESS
CLEAR
3
6
9
NML P.G SPECIAL
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
BACK
ENT
MODE
PAGE
P
0
1
4
7
G
2
5
8
CPATTERN GROUP
CHANGE ADDRESS
CLEAR
3
6
9
NML P.G SPECIAL
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
BACK
ENT
MODE
STOP BACK
If the displayed content is correct, press .
If the displayed content is correct, press .
Input the start address with the numeric keypad or and , and press .
Input the end address with the numeric keypad or and , and press .
(1).(2) (3) (4)
Pattern/Group Control Setting Output (To Transmission Unit)
(1) To ensure correct input/output of setting content, do not perform switch operation using the FULL-2WAY system when outputting from this unit to a transmission unit, or when inputting to this unit.
(2) If all pattern and group addresses have been set, to input to this unit or to output from this unit to a transmission unit will take a maximum of approx. 30 minutes.
(3) The setting content, or the setting content input from a transmission unit to this unit, is not erased even if the power supply is turned off.(4) Setting content is input or output for all 256 circuits, even if T/U for all channels have not been connected to the FULL-2WAY system.
Notes:
Pattern/Group Control Setting Input (From Transmission Unit)
If an address range is selected If all patterns, all groups or all P/G are selected
(1) MODEUsing , set the mark to P.G.
(2)
(3)
<Input methods>
ADD. AREAALL P DATAALL G DATAALL DATA
Input methodMenuInput only desired address rangeInput all patternsInput all groupsInput all patterns/groups
• For the output method procedure, see "Pattern/Group Control Setting Input."
(1) MODEUsing , set the mark to P.G.
(2)
(3) Using and , select the output method, and press .
<Output method>
ADD. AREAALL P DATAALL G DATAALL DATA
Output methodMenuOutput only desired address rangeOutput all patternsOutput all groupsOutput all patterns/groups
(1).(2) (3)
Select P (Pattern) or G (Group) with or .(1)
ENT
P G
(2)
ENT(3)
To re-enter an input in steps (2) and (3), clear with .C
If the displayed content is correct, press . • Input will begin, and "COMPLETED" will be displayed when it is finished. • To cancel input while it is in progress, press .
Input will be canceled after input of the current address is finished.
(4)
BACK
ENT • Output will begin, and "COMPLETED" will be displayed when it is finished. • To cancel output while it is in progress, press .
Output will be canceled after output of the current address is finished.
(4)
BACK
ENT • Input will begin, and "COMPLETED" will
be displayed when it is finished. • To cancel input while it is in progress, press .
Input will be canceled after input of the current address is finished.
BACK
If you wish to quit at this point, with either input method, press . To continue editing, press . • In editing; the system will switch to the edit screen for the first address.
BACK
P12 P12
P12 P34P12 P34
P 12 LOAD
P
(3)
(1) (2)
(4)
P 1 LOAD
ALL G DATAI-P DATA
ALL G DATAI-P DATA
ALL G DATAI-P DATA
ALL DATAI-P DATA
ALL DATAI-P DATA
ALL DATAI-P DATA
Using and , select the input method, and press .
EDIT
NML P.G SP
INPUT FROM CPU
OUTPUTTO CPU
I-P DATA
NML P.G SP
All P DATAAll G DATAAll DATA
ADD. AREA
I-P DATA
NML P.G SP
ADD. AREAI-P DATA
NML P.G SP
ADD. AREA
I-P DATA
NML P.G SP
ADD. AREAI-P DATA
NML P.G SP
P12 P34I-P DATA
NML P.G SP
P12 P34I-P DATA
NML P.G SP
I-P DATA
NML P.G SP
ALL P DATAI-P DATA
NML P.G SP
ALL P DATAI-P DATA
NML P.G SP
STOP BACKENT
ALL P DATA
EDIT
NML P.G SP NML P.G SP NML P.G SP
NML P.G SP NML P.G SP NML P.G SP
EDIT
NML P.G SP
INPUTFROM CPU
OUTPUTTO CPU
O-P INPUT
NML P.G SP
ALL P DATAALL G DATAALL DATA
ADD. AREA P12 P34
P 12 LOAD
O-P INPUT
NML P.G SP
P12 P34O-P INPUT
NML P.G SP
P12 P34O-P INPUT
NML P.G SP
BACK
COMPLETEDENDSET
Using and , set to INPUT FROM CPU
unit, and press .
Using and , set to OUTPUT TO CPU, and press .
ENT
ENT
STOP BACK BACKENT
ENT
ENT
STOP BACKENTSET
STOP BACKENTSET
STOP BACKENTSET STOP BACK END BACK
ENTEDIT
COMPLETED
ENT
ENT
STOP BACKENTSET
COMPLETEDEND BACK
ENTEDITSTOP
Output takes approx. 30 minutes when done with all P.G.If you are using a transmission unit other than the WRT2050 series or WRT2040 series, then to ensure correct setting, do not perform switch operation using the FULL-2WAY system during output.
Outputs pattern/group control settings in this unit to a transmission unit. This can only be done with WRT2050 series or WRT2040 series or WRT2000 series transmission units. Set to the transmission unit to which to be connected.
Input takes approx. 30 minutes when done with all P.G.If you are using a transmission unit other than the WRT2040 series or WRT2050 series, then to ensure correct setting, do not perform switch operation using the FULL-2WAY system during input.
The information at the bottom of the display is the same as when all patterns is selected.
The information at the bottom of the display is the same as when all patterns is selected.
If all groups are selected
If all P/G are selected
Basic Setting Method (Continued)
Input the pattern/group control setting from transmission unit to this unit. Set to the transmission unit to be connected to.
If the transmission unit setting is WR3212 series, there is no "OUTPUT TO CPU" menu option.
If all patterns are selected
Central Control and Programming Unit
55 56
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
PAGE
P
0
1
4
7
G
2
5
8
CPATTERN GROUP
CHANGE ADDRESS
CLEAR
3
6
9
NML P • G SP
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
BACK
ENT
MODE
Using and , set to EDIT,
and press .
Central Control and Programming Unit (WRT9103K-89) Setting Method
Part identification and function
Basic Setting Method
Step For Pattern Setting For Group Setting
2
3
4
5
1
PAGE
P
0
1
4
7
G
2
5
8
CPATTERN GROUP
CHANGE ADDRESS
CLEAR
3
6
9
NML P.G SP
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Mode key • Switches between normal, P/G and special mode.
Selector switch section
Back key • Switches back to menu, and cancels setting.
Change key • Use for menu switching.
ENT key • Executes setting, etc.
Numeric keypad • For inputting numeric values.
Pattern and Group key • Selects pattern/group.
Clear key • Clears setting values.
Change address key • Increment and decrement addresses.
Using , set the mark to P • G.MODE
1.2. 3.
Press (pattern). Press (group).P G
Input the address to be edited by using the numeric keypad or and .
• The control setting for that address is displayed on the selector display. • Set the fade time or use the edit functions if necessary.
CTo re-enter input, clear with .
Use the selector keys to select the data. • The channel display can be selected with PAGE . • The status changes each time the key is pressed. • During selection, the cursor (_) is displayed on the selector display.<Selector display>Display
XNone
StatusON (TO: Timer set, LO: Dimming level set)OFFOutside area
Use the selector keys to select the data. • The channel display can be selected with PAGE . • The status changes each time the key is pressed. • During selection, the cursor (_) is displayed on the selector display.<Selector display>Display
None
StatusLoad included in group (TO: Timer setting)Load not included in group
0 ch to 15 ch
You can input the control setting for the displayed address from the transmission unit by holding down at this time (for approx. 3 seconds).
You can output the control setting for the displayed address from the transmission unit by holding down at this time (for approx. 3 seconds). (It is stored in memory of this unit at the same time.)
Setting switch section
Page keys • Chage address for selector switch
• Displays address and status.
• Use for setting and control.
Selector display(LCD panel)
• Use for displaying menus, etc.
Main display(LCD panel)Selector key
ENT
X O
0 ch to 15 ch
16 ch to 31 ch
32 ch to 47 ch48 ch to 63 ch
D1 to D16
1
1 1
O1
BACK
EDIT DATA
NML P • G SP
ADD.COPY DATAREV. DATAERASE DATA
PEDIT DATA
NML P • G SP
ADD.COPY DATAREV. DATAERASE DATA
EDIT
NML P • G SP
INPUT FROM CPU
OUTPUT TO CPU
16 ch to 31 ch
32 ch to 47 ch48 ch to 63 ch
D1 to D16
ENT
MODE
The main display and the selector display automatically turn off if there are no key inputs for 10 minutes. Press any key to restore the original display. (The key operation at this time only restores the display.)
If the transmission unit setting is WR3212 series, there are no menu options for OUTPUT TO CPU, COPY DATA, REV. DATA and ERASE DATA.
TO is displayed only when the transmission unit setting is WRT2050 series or WRT2040 series or WRT2000 series.
TO and LO are displayed only when the transmission unit setting is WRT2050 series
The control settings for the address being edited are not stored as is in memory of the unit, so store in memory by switching the address or switching the menu after editing.
PAGE
P
0
1
4
7
G
2
5
8
CPATTERN GROUP
CHANGE ADDRESS
CLEAR
3
6
9
NML P.G SPECIAL
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
BACK
ENT
MODE
PAGE
P
0
1
4
7
G
2
5
8
CPATTERN GROUP
CHANGE ADDRESS
CLEAR
3
6
9
NML P.G SPECIAL
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
BACK
ENT
MODE
PAGE
P
0
1
4
7
G
2
5
8
CPATTERN GROUP
CHANGE ADDRESS
CLEAR
3
6
9
NML P.G SPECIAL
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
BACK
ENT
MODE
PAGE
P
0
1
4
7
G
2
5
8
CPATTERN GROUP
CHANGE ADDRESS
CLEAR
3
6
9
NML P.G SPECIAL
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
BACK
ENT
MODE
STOP BACK
If the displayed content is correct, press .
If the displayed content is correct, press .
Input the start address with the numeric keypad or and , and press .
Input the end address with the numeric keypad or and , and press .
(1).(2) (3) (4)
Pattern/Group Control Setting Output (To Transmission Unit)
(1) To ensure correct input/output of setting content, do not perform switch operation using the FULL-2WAY system when outputting from this unit to a transmission unit, or when inputting to this unit.
(2) If all pattern and group addresses have been set, to input to this unit or to output from this unit to a transmission unit will take a maximum of approx. 30 minutes.
(3) The setting content, or the setting content input from a transmission unit to this unit, is not erased even if the power supply is turned off.(4) Setting content is input or output for all 256 circuits, even if T/U for all channels have not been connected to the FULL-2WAY system.
Notes:
Pattern/Group Control Setting Input (From Transmission Unit)
If an address range is selected If all patterns, all groups or all P/G are selected
(1) MODEUsing , set the mark to P.G.
(2)
(3)
<Input methods>
ADD. AREAALL P DATAALL G DATAALL DATA
Input methodMenuInput only desired address rangeInput all patternsInput all groupsInput all patterns/groups
• For the output method procedure, see "Pattern/Group Control Setting Input."
(1) MODEUsing , set the mark to P.G.
(2)
(3) Using and , select the output method, and press .
<Output method>
ADD. AREAALL P DATAALL G DATAALL DATA
Output methodMenuOutput only desired address rangeOutput all patternsOutput all groupsOutput all patterns/groups
(1).(2) (3)
Select P (Pattern) or G (Group) with or .(1)
ENT
P G
(2)
ENT(3)
To re-enter an input in steps (2) and (3), clear with .C
If the displayed content is correct, press . • Input will begin, and "COMPLETED" will be displayed when it is finished. • To cancel input while it is in progress, press .
Input will be canceled after input of the current address is finished.
(4)
BACK
ENT • Output will begin, and "COMPLETED" will be displayed when it is finished. • To cancel output while it is in progress, press .
Output will be canceled after output of the current address is finished.
(4)
BACK
ENT • Input will begin, and "COMPLETED" will
be displayed when it is finished. • To cancel input while it is in progress, press .
Input will be canceled after input of the current address is finished.
BACK
If you wish to quit at this point, with either input method, press . To continue editing, press . • In editing; the system will switch to the edit screen for the first address.
BACK
P12 P12
P12 P34P12 P34
P 12 LOAD
P
(3)
(1) (2)
(4)
P 1 LOAD
ALL G DATAI-P DATA
ALL G DATAI-P DATA
ALL G DATAI-P DATA
ALL DATAI-P DATA
ALL DATAI-P DATA
ALL DATAI-P DATA
Using and , select the input method, and press .
EDIT
NML P.G SP
INPUT FROM CPU
OUTPUTTO CPU
I-P DATA
NML P.G SP
All P DATAAll G DATAAll DATA
ADD. AREA
I-P DATA
NML P.G SP
ADD. AREAI-P DATA
NML P.G SP
ADD. AREA
I-P DATA
NML P.G SP
ADD. AREAI-P DATA
NML P.G SP
P12 P34I-P DATA
NML P.G SP
P12 P34I-P DATA
NML P.G SP
I-P DATA
NML P.G SP
ALL P DATAI-P DATA
NML P.G SP
ALL P DATAI-P DATA
NML P.G SP
STOP BACKENT
ALL P DATA
EDIT
NML P.G SP NML P.G SP NML P.G SP
NML P.G SP NML P.G SP NML P.G SP
EDIT
NML P.G SP
INPUTFROM CPU
OUTPUTTO CPU
O-P INPUT
NML P.G SP
ALL P DATAALL G DATAALL DATA
ADD. AREA P12 P34
P 12 LOAD
O-P INPUT
NML P.G SP
P12 P34O-P INPUT
NML P.G SP
P12 P34O-P INPUT
NML P.G SP
BACK
COMPLETEDENDSET
Using and , set to INPUT FROM CPU
unit, and press .
Using and , set to OUTPUT TO CPU, and press .
ENT
ENT
STOP BACK BACKENT
ENT
ENT
STOP BACKENTSET
STOP BACKENTSET
STOP BACKENTSET STOP BACK END BACK
ENTEDIT
COMPLETED
ENT
ENT
STOP BACKENTSET
COMPLETEDEND BACK
ENTEDITSTOP
Output takes approx. 30 minutes when done with all P.G.If you are using a transmission unit other than the WRT2050 series or WRT2040 series, then to ensure correct setting, do not perform switch operation using the FULL-2WAY system during output.
Outputs pattern/group control settings in this unit to a transmission unit. This can only be done with WRT2050 series or WRT2040 series or WRT2000 series transmission units. Set to the transmission unit to which to be connected.
Input takes approx. 30 minutes when done with all P.G.If you are using a transmission unit other than the WRT2040 series or WRT2050 series, then to ensure correct setting, do not perform switch operation using the FULL-2WAY system during input.
The information at the bottom of the display is the same as when all patterns is selected.
The information at the bottom of the display is the same as when all patterns is selected.
If all groups are selected
If all P/G are selected
Basic Setting Method (Continued)
Input the pattern/group control setting from transmission unit to this unit. Set to the transmission unit to be connected to.
If the transmission unit setting is WR3212 series, there is no "OUTPUT TO CPU" menu option.
If all patterns are selected
Central Control and Programming Unit
55 56
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Circuit Design for Simplified Appellation Indication System Modbus Lighting Control Interface
Circuit Design for Card Operation Switch (Dip switch)
Features
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
Notes
(1) ON/OFF display example with appellation indication unit (dip switch). (2) Reduces wiring by using only the FULL-2WAY signal line feed wire to
flash ON and OFF. (3) Indication unit cover can be removed for the writing of names of
items under control. (4) Can have relay (load) ON state display using switch operation.
(1) Neither a Relay control T/U nor a 6A, 10A contact output T/U should be used at the same load address as a Appellation indication unit with a T/U function (WR3901RK-8). In such an application use a WR3900RK-8 Appellation Indication Unit.
(2) To have multiple indicators at the same load address when using a Appellation indication unit with T/U function, use a WR3900RK-8 Appellation Indication Unit for the second location and beyond.
WRT2050-80Transmission Unit
100V-242V AC
Sign
al
WR34169-86A ContactOutput T/U
WR3900RK-8AppellationIndication Unit
Power source
Power source
Sign
alAC
24V
1ch 1-1WR3900RK-8AppellationIndication Unit(Multiplelocation display)
1-1WRT5551K-8Switch (1)
WR3901RK-8AppellationIndication Unitwith T/U
WR3900RK-8AppellationIndication Unit(Multiplelocation display)
WRT5551K-8Switch (1)
1-1
WRT2050-80Transmission Unit
100V-242V AC
Sign
al
1-1 1-1 1-1
FULL-2WAY signal line
FULL-2WAY signal line
Red
BlueR
edBlue
G1
WRT2050-80Transmission Unit
WR2311-851Transformer
WRT5554K-8Switch (4)
FULL-2WAY signal line
G1
WRT5850-8Program Setting Unit
WR6161K-820A HID Relay
Power source
Powersource Power source
Ry
Ry0ch2
4
WR3400-8Relay ControlT/U
WR3891-8Card Operation Switch
Switch
Lighting fixture Lighting fixture
0-2
Switch
0-4
Selector switch
Group control
WRT5554K-8Switch (4)
Individual control
0-10-20-30-4
Card status display LEDCard in (ON): Red OFF Card out (OFF):Red ON
Appellation indication for relay (load) ON state
For designation display without Relay control T/U with the same load address
Use WR3900RK-8Appellation Indication Unit (Relay State Display Model)
Can control lights in each room of a hotel, for example, and automatically turn lights OUT when nobody is in.
Use a WR3901RK-8 Appellation Indication Unit with T/U
WR3891-8Card Operation Switch (Individual/Group Controls)
• With power source control of multiple circuits (group control)
Design tips for circuit division(1) Match to the card operation switch address.
For group control (Pattern control not possible)Match the addresses for the selector switch "group control" switch and the card operation switch.For individual controlMatch the addresses of the relay control T/U and the card operation switch.
(1) Use a card specifically intended for an electronic key card reader. (Card not included.)
(2) Do not use magnetized cards such as telephone cards, nor transparent or metallic cards.
WR3900RK-8Appellation Indication Unit (Red)
IP version
LAN Interface
Load control/monitor
System state monitor
Signal wiring
Signal transmission
Signal transmit freq
Error detecting
Signal format
Applicable transmission unit
Full-2Way address setting
Full-2Way Remote Lighting Control System
WRT2645K-8WRT2648-8
Ethernet
F2-BUS
GW
Transmission Unit
WRT2050-80
IPv4 only
100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T
455 points (Individual 256 + Group 127 + Pattern 72)
1 point
Non-pole 2wires
Cyclic time division multiplex transmission
10 kHz + 1 kHz
Odd parity Sum check
Start / Channel / Load / control / Monitor / End
WRT2050-80
Individual : 0-1~63-4Group : 1~127Pattern : 1~72
Unnecessary (Address number is fixed for each object)
Circuit type
Transmission format
Synchronization format
Communication control Process
Communication speed
Transmission code
Error control system
Slave address / Setting range
Network bus SpecificationRS485, 2-wire shielded (Total extension 1200m)
Half-Duplex communication
Start-Stop synchronization format Start bit 1 bit, Stop bit 1 bit
Modbus protocol format (RTU Mode)
9600bps
8 bit + parity (None/EVEN/ODD) Stop bit 1 bit
CRC
1~31
Address range
Max client connection
Port
Open Communication System1
TCP/502
Rating
WRT2645K-8 (TCP/IP) SpecificationRated input voltageRated current consumptionRated input signal voltageRated signal current consumption
24V AC300mA maximum±24V15mA maximum
Rating
WRT2648-8 SpecificationRated input voltageRated current consumptionRated input signal voltageRated signal current consumption
24V AC150mA maximum±24V15mA maximum
Applicable Transmission Unit : WRT2050-80
Modbus I/FWRT2645K-8
Net work
RS485
F2-BUS
Transmission Unit
WRT2050-80
Modbus I/FWRT2648-8
GW
Notes
The card operation switch LED also lights when turned OFFby another switch with the same address.
Appellation Indication System & Card Operation Switchppp Open Protocol Interface Unitppp
57 58
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Circuit Design for Simplified Appellation Indication System Modbus Lighting Control Interface
Circuit Design for Card Operation Switch (Dip switch)
Features
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
Notes
(1) ON/OFF display example with appellation indication unit (dip switch). (2) Reduces wiring by using only the FULL-2WAY signal line feed wire to
flash ON and OFF. (3) Indication unit cover can be removed for the writing of names of
items under control. (4) Can have relay (load) ON state display using switch operation.
(1) Neither a Relay control T/U nor a 6A, 10A contact output T/U should be used at the same load address as a Appellation indication unit with a T/U function (WR3901RK-8). In such an application use a WR3900RK-8 Appellation Indication Unit.
(2) To have multiple indicators at the same load address when using a Appellation indication unit with T/U function, use a WR3900RK-8 Appellation Indication Unit for the second location and beyond.
WRT2050-80Transmission Unit
100V-242V AC
Sign
al
WR34169-86A ContactOutput T/U
WR3900RK-8AppellationIndication Unit
Power source
Power source
Sign
alAC
24V
1ch 1-1WR3900RK-8AppellationIndication Unit(Multiplelocation display)
1-1WRT5551K-8Switch (1)
WR3901RK-8AppellationIndication Unitwith T/U
WR3900RK-8AppellationIndication Unit(Multiplelocation display)
WRT5551K-8Switch (1)
1-1
WRT2050-80Transmission Unit
100V-242V AC
Sign
al
1-1 1-1 1-1
FULL-2WAY signal line
FULL-2WAY signal line
Red
BlueR
edBlue
G1
WRT2050-80Transmission Unit
WR2311-851Transformer
WRT5554K-8Switch (4)
FULL-2WAY signal line
G1
WRT5850-8Program Setting Unit
WR6161K-820A HID Relay
Power source
Powersource Power source
Ry
Ry0ch2
4
WR3400-8Relay ControlT/U
WR3891-8Card Operation Switch
Switch
Lighting fixture Lighting fixture
0-2
Switch
0-4
Selector switch
Group control
WRT5554K-8Switch (4)
Individual control
0-10-20-30-4
Card status display LEDCard in (ON): Red OFF Card out (OFF):Red ON
Appellation indication for relay (load) ON state
For designation display without Relay control T/U with the same load address
Use WR3900RK-8Appellation Indication Unit (Relay State Display Model)
Can control lights in each room of a hotel, for example, and automatically turn lights OUT when nobody is in.
Use a WR3901RK-8 Appellation Indication Unit with T/U
WR3891-8Card Operation Switch (Individual/Group Controls)
• With power source control of multiple circuits (group control)
Design tips for circuit division(1) Match to the card operation switch address.
For group control (Pattern control not possible)Match the addresses for the selector switch "group control" switch and the card operation switch.For individual controlMatch the addresses of the relay control T/U and the card operation switch.
(1) Use a card specifically intended for an electronic key card reader. (Card not included.)
(2) Do not use magnetized cards such as telephone cards, nor transparent or metallic cards.
WR3900RK-8Appellation Indication Unit (Red)
IP version
LAN Interface
Load control/monitor
System state monitor
Signal wiring
Signal transmission
Signal transmit freq
Error detecting
Signal format
Applicable transmission unit
Full-2Way address setting
Full-2Way Remote Lighting Control System
WRT2645K-8WRT2648-8
Ethernet
F2-BUS
GW
Transmission Unit
WRT2050-80
IPv4 only
100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T
455 points (Individual 256 + Group 127 + Pattern 72)
1 point
Non-pole 2wires
Cyclic time division multiplex transmission
10 kHz + 1 kHz
Odd parity Sum check
Start / Channel / Load / control / Monitor / End
WRT2050-80
Individual : 0-1~63-4Group : 1~127Pattern : 1~72
Unnecessary (Address number is fixed for each object)
Circuit type
Transmission format
Synchronization format
Communication control Process
Communication speed
Transmission code
Error control system
Slave address / Setting range
Network bus SpecificationRS485, 2-wire shielded (Total extension 1200m)
Half-Duplex communication
Start-Stop synchronization format Start bit 1 bit, Stop bit 1 bit
Modbus protocol format (RTU Mode)
9600bps
8 bit + parity (None/EVEN/ODD) Stop bit 1 bit
CRC
1~31
Address range
Max client connection
Port
Open Communication System1
TCP/502
Rating
WRT2645K-8 (TCP/IP) SpecificationRated input voltageRated current consumptionRated input signal voltageRated signal current consumption
24V AC300mA maximum±24V15mA maximum
Rating
WRT2648-8 SpecificationRated input voltageRated current consumptionRated input signal voltageRated signal current consumption
24V AC150mA maximum±24V15mA maximum
Applicable Transmission Unit : WRT2050-80
Modbus I/FWRT2645K-8
Net work
RS485
F2-BUS
Transmission Unit
WRT2050-80
Modbus I/FWRT2648-8
GW
Notes
The card operation switch LED also lights when turned OFFby another switch with the same address.
Appellation Indication System & Card Operation Switchppp Open Protocol Interface Unitppp
57 58
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
(1) To operate the same address twice in one day, set by changing the program no. (1 to 30)(Example) Program no. 1: G1 8:00 to 12:00
Program no. 2: G1 13:00 to 17:00(2) If two or more astronomical clock type program timer units
are installed, and control is performed at the same time with different units, a discrepancy will arise in the controlled time by the amount of difference between the current time of each unit.
Automatic correction can be done by making one unit a master, and synchronizing with the master time every hour, on the hour.
(3) Special day 1 and special day 2 timer operation can be set/canceled by using a switch on the FULL-2WAY system after setting an address in the program timer unit using the special mode function. If using this function, select a channel and address that are not used by another T/U, etc.
(4) When using the solar function, setting is done with a region no. (12 regions), so there may be some discrepancy in the sunrise or sunset time.
Adjustment can be done in one minute units, in the range from a 90-minute delay, to a 90-minute advance.Set to a value appropriate for the exact location.
(1) Enables lighting control using a timer set to correspond to a scheduleEnables timer-based lighting control (in one minute units) using a maximum of 30 programs.
(2) Enables operation according to an annual scheduleEnables settings that repeat every year (month X, day Y; X-day of Yth week of month Z), or setting of a date up to 13 months in advance (1 time only).
(3) Equipped with a solar timer function to determine sunrise and sunsetEnables tasks such as exterior lighting control to be done using the solar timer, with the sunrise and sunset times for 12 regions throughout the country stored in memory.
(4) Holidays (special days) can be set or canceled from FULL-2WAY switchesSpecial day 1, Special day 2 and timer on/off setting/cancel can be done from a FULL-2WAY switch by setting an address in the timer unit.
(5) Model for direct connection with FULL-2WAY signalsContact input T/U and timer functions are integrated into a single unit, and the timer has been miniaturized, so relay control panel space can be conserved. For the setting method, see P. 61.
When performing pattern and group control, be sure to set the pattern/group control content beforehand.For details, see P. 39, 40, 41, 42.
Rated voltage and FrequencyRated current consumptionSignal current consumptionSynch outputSynch inputPower failure backupUsable periodTime precisionAmbient temperature rangeNumber of programsApplicable transmission units
Control range
Ratings and Specifications
Notes
Wiring Diagram
WRT35409-8Program Timer Unit(Astronomical Clock Type,24V AC)
WRT9600-8
Red
BlueR
edBlue
Red
BlueR
edBlue
Ry1
Ry3
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
Ry2
Ry4
1
3
2
4
Ry5
Ry7
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
Ry6
Ry8
12
WRT2050-80Transmisson Unit
0ch
1ch
Sign
al
AC24V
Blue White
0-10-20-30-4
1-11-21-31-4
2-12-22-32-4
3-13-23-33-4
G1G2G3G4
G5G6G7G8
P1P2P3P4WRT5554K-8
Switch(4) For group control
WRT5554K-8Switch(4)
WRT5554K-8Switch(4)For pattern control
WRT5850-8Program SettingUnit
Special day 1
Special day 2Timer non-operation
Power source AC220V
Power source
Installed in manager's office, etc.
Relay control panel
Selector switch
3
4
24V ACBlue W
hite
WR3400-8Relay ControlT/U
63-1
63-2
63-3
WRT35409-8
Master
Output
Program Timer UnitAstronomical Clock Type
Slave (In synch) Slave (In synch)
Input Input
Features
24V AC, 50/60 Hz (specially for WR2301-821/WR2311-821 Remote Control Transformer)350mA15mA12V DC, 0.5 sec, 50/60 Hz (output on the hour)3 to 30 V DC, 0.2 sec min., 50/60 Hz (effective only for 10 seconds before and after each hour, on the hour)72 hours (after power has been on for at least 12 hours at 25˚C)2001 to 2098 15 sec/month (at 25˚C)-10 to +50˚C30 programsWRT2050-80 WRT2040series, WRT2000seriesIndividual: 0-1 to 63-4 Group: 1 to 127Pattern: 1 to 72 (Dimming): 1 to 16 (ON/OFF only)
Circuit Design for Program Timer Unit (Astronomical Clock Type)
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
For individual control
Power source
Power source
Power source
WR6161K-820A HID Relay
WRT35409-8Program Timer Unit
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
FULL-2WAY signal wire
FULL-2WAY signal wire
Red
BlueR
edBlue
Ry1
Ry3
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
Ry2
Ry4
1
3
2
4
WRT2050-80Transmisson Unit
0ch
Sign
al
24V ACBlue W
hite
Power source
0-10-20-30-4
G1G2
WRT5554K-8Switch(4) X 2
WRT5850-8Program SettingUnit
WRT5551K-8Switch(1)
Holiday set/cancel switch
Power source AC220V
Power source AC220V
Manager's officeSelector switch
24V ACBlue W
hite
WRT35409-8Program Timer Unit
63-1
• Common area lights are automatically lit from 8:00 to 21:00 on weekdays and turned off on holidays.• Exterior lights are automatically lit in the evening and turned off at 23:00 on both weekdays and holidays.• When employees work on holidays, common area lights are automatically turned on by switch operation in the manager's office the previous day.
G1
G2
0-1,0-3
0-2,0-4
Group setting content
G1
G2
Special 1
Special 2
8:00 ON - 21:00 OFFMon.-Fri., Special day 1.30 minutes before sunset - 23:00 OFFMon.-Sun., Special day 1 and Special day 2
Set Sat., Sun., holiday
Set Sat., Sun., holiday
Timer setting content
ON (Red) display: Sets holiday for following dayOFF (Green) display: Cancels holiday for following day(
WR3400-8Relay Control T/U
Weekdays (Mon. to Fri.) and Special work day (Special day 1)
Ex of Programming
Holidays (Sat., Sun.) and Holidays (Special day 2)
Common areaG1 (0-1, 0-3)
Exterior lightG2 (0-2, 0-4)
OFF OFFON8:00 21:00
OFF OFFON30 minutes before sunset
23:00OFF OFFON
30 minutes before sunset
23:00
OFF (non-operation)
Relay control panel
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
WR6161K-820A HID Relay
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
Powersource
Powersource
Common area lighting
Exterior lights
G1 G2
Example of Using a Program Timer UnitExample of control of common area and exterior lights using the Program Timer Unit
Timer input
More than 1 sec.
Group G1
Load
ON OFF ON OFF
ON OFF ON OFF
Group G1Switch operation
ON/OFF control with a timer
You can control contact input and switch operation by giving priority to override input settings, such as those from the selector switch.
Time Schedule Control
59 60
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
(1) To operate the same address twice in one day, set by changing the program no. (1 to 30)(Example) Program no. 1: G1 8:00 to 12:00
Program no. 2: G1 13:00 to 17:00(2) If two or more astronomical clock type program timer units
are installed, and control is performed at the same time with different units, a discrepancy will arise in the controlled time by the amount of difference between the current time of each unit.
Automatic correction can be done by making one unit a master, and synchronizing with the master time every hour, on the hour.
(3) Special day 1 and special day 2 timer operation can be set/canceled by using a switch on the FULL-2WAY system after setting an address in the program timer unit using the special mode function. If using this function, select a channel and address that are not used by another T/U, etc.
(4) When using the solar function, setting is done with a region no. (12 regions), so there may be some discrepancy in the sunrise or sunset time.
Adjustment can be done in one minute units, in the range from a 90-minute delay, to a 90-minute advance.Set to a value appropriate for the exact location.
(1) Enables lighting control using a timer set to correspond to a scheduleEnables timer-based lighting control (in one minute units) using a maximum of 30 programs.
(2) Enables operation according to an annual scheduleEnables settings that repeat every year (month X, day Y; X-day of Yth week of month Z), or setting of a date up to 13 months in advance (1 time only).
(3) Equipped with a solar timer function to determine sunrise and sunsetEnables tasks such as exterior lighting control to be done using the solar timer, with the sunrise and sunset times for 12 regions throughout the country stored in memory.
(4) Holidays (special days) can be set or canceled from FULL-2WAY switchesSpecial day 1, Special day 2 and timer on/off setting/cancel can be done from a FULL-2WAY switch by setting an address in the timer unit.
(5) Model for direct connection with FULL-2WAY signalsContact input T/U and timer functions are integrated into a single unit, and the timer has been miniaturized, so relay control panel space can be conserved. For the setting method, see P. 61.
When performing pattern and group control, be sure to set the pattern/group control content beforehand.For details, see P. 39, 40, 41, 42.
Rated voltage and FrequencyRated current consumptionSignal current consumptionSynch outputSynch inputPower failure backupUsable periodTime precisionAmbient temperature rangeNumber of programsApplicable transmission units
Control range
Ratings and Specifications
Notes
Wiring Diagram
WRT35409-8Program Timer Unit(Astronomical Clock Type,24V AC)
WRT9600-8
Red
BlueR
edBlue
Red
BlueR
edBlue
Ry1
Ry3
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
Ry2
Ry4
1
3
2
4
Ry5
Ry7
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
Ry6
Ry8
12
WRT2050-80Transmisson Unit
0ch
1ch
Sign
al
AC24V
Blue White
0-10-20-30-4
1-11-21-31-4
2-12-22-32-4
3-13-23-33-4
G1G2G3G4
G5G6G7G8
P1P2P3P4WRT5554K-8
Switch(4) For group control
WRT5554K-8Switch(4)
WRT5554K-8Switch(4)For pattern control
WRT5850-8Program SettingUnit
Special day 1
Special day 2Timer non-operation
Power source AC220V
Power source
Installed in manager's office, etc.
Relay control panel
Selector switch
3
4
24V ACBlue W
hite
WR3400-8Relay ControlT/U
63-1
63-2
63-3
WRT35409-8
Master
Output
Program Timer UnitAstronomical Clock Type
Slave (In synch) Slave (In synch)
Input Input
Features
24V AC, 50/60 Hz (specially for WR2301-821/WR2311-821 Remote Control Transformer)350mA15mA12V DC, 0.5 sec, 50/60 Hz (output on the hour)3 to 30 V DC, 0.2 sec min., 50/60 Hz (effective only for 10 seconds before and after each hour, on the hour)72 hours (after power has been on for at least 12 hours at 25˚C)2001 to 2098 15 sec/month (at 25˚C)-10 to +50˚C30 programsWRT2050-80 WRT2040series, WRT2000seriesIndividual: 0-1 to 63-4 Group: 1 to 127Pattern: 1 to 72 (Dimming): 1 to 16 (ON/OFF only)
Circuit Design for Program Timer Unit (Astronomical Clock Type)
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
For individual control
Power source
Power source
Power source
WR6161K-820A HID Relay
WRT35409-8Program Timer Unit
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
FULL-2WAY signal wire
FULL-2WAY signal wire
Red
BlueR
edBlue
Ry1
Ry3
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
Ry2
Ry4
1
3
2
4
WRT2050-80Transmisson Unit
0ch
Sign
al
24V ACBlue W
hite
Power source
0-10-20-30-4
G1G2
WRT5554K-8Switch(4) X 2
WRT5850-8Program SettingUnit
WRT5551K-8Switch(1)
Holiday set/cancel switch
Power source AC220V
Power source AC220V
Manager's officeSelector switch
24V ACBlue W
hite
WRT35409-8Program Timer Unit
63-1
• Common area lights are automatically lit from 8:00 to 21:00 on weekdays and turned off on holidays.• Exterior lights are automatically lit in the evening and turned off at 23:00 on both weekdays and holidays.• When employees work on holidays, common area lights are automatically turned on by switch operation in the manager's office the previous day.
G1
G2
0-1,0-3
0-2,0-4
Group setting content
G1
G2
Special 1
Special 2
8:00 ON - 21:00 OFFMon.-Fri., Special day 1.30 minutes before sunset - 23:00 OFFMon.-Sun., Special day 1 and Special day 2
Set Sat., Sun., holiday
Set Sat., Sun., holiday
Timer setting content
ON (Red) display: Sets holiday for following dayOFF (Green) display: Cancels holiday for following day(
WR3400-8Relay Control T/U
Weekdays (Mon. to Fri.) and Special work day (Special day 1)
Ex of Programming
Holidays (Sat., Sun.) and Holidays (Special day 2)
Common areaG1 (0-1, 0-3)
Exterior lightG2 (0-2, 0-4)
OFF OFFON8:00 21:00
OFF OFFON30 minutes before sunset
23:00OFF OFFON
30 minutes before sunset
23:00
OFF (non-operation)
Relay control panel
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
WR6161K-820A HID Relay
WR2311-851Remote Control Transformer
Powersource
Powersource
Common area lighting
Exterior lights
G1 G2
Example of Using a Program Timer UnitExample of control of common area and exterior lights using the Program Timer Unit
Timer input
More than 1 sec.
Group G1
Load
ON OFF ON OFF
ON OFF ON OFF
Group G1Switch operation
ON/OFF control with a timer
You can control contact input and switch operation by giving priority to override input settings, such as those from the selector switch.
Time Schedule Control
59 60
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
RESETPOWER
SP-D2
STBY
SP-D1
D.S.T CLRSET
LIGHT BACK
MODE - +
D.S.T SYNCHRONIZE
ADDRESS SP-D1 STBY AUTO OFF LOCALSP-D2
Input the address of the FULL-2WAY wall switch to activatethe Special day 1 feature remotely.
Program Timer Unit (WRT35409-8) Setting Method
Identifying Control Features LCD Panel
•24 V AC input power OK.
Power indicator light•Choose a mode function.
Mode key•Reset all the configuration parameters to default settings.
Reset key
•Set your selection and or advance selection to the next item.
Set key
•Cancel the last input.Clear key
•Return selection to the previous item.
Backspace key
•Scroll up or down+/- keys
•Tum the backlight on. The backlight automati- cally switches off if there is no key activity for a period of 5 minutes.
Backlight key
•Advance a clock by 1 hour from present time.
Daylight Saving Time key
•Program or clear the next day for Special day 1.
Special Day 1 key
•Program or clear the next day for Special day 2.
Special Day 2 key
•Enter standby mode.Standby key
•Day of week/Special day
•D.S.T (daylitght saving time)
•Sunset/Sunrise time adjustment
•Date,month,and year
•Sec./Error/Earlier /Later time
•Auto Off ON/OFF/ Load status
•Time synchronization (correction)complete
•Control mode in astronomic control mode
•Address No.•Load type
•Mode
•Displays the program(PRG)No. now being set up.•Operation type
•Hour/minute
•Special day 1 registration•Special day 2 registration
•Special day set up
•Lit when the fallwing day is a special day.
•Lit if the unit is in standby.
•Control method
Mode FunctionsNML
PRG
SP-D
SPECIAL
MODE
MODE
MODEMODE
Timer modescrolls when keyis pressed.
AboutPressing the keywhile setting, verifying,changing clock, regionprogram or special settingwill save all changes tothat point.
The values entered will not be saved unless the key is pressed.
The timer mode changeseach item the keyis pressed
NORMAL mode
Program the unit,modify existing programming,or verify programming just entered.
Program special days(holidays).
Set the present time and date.The unit defaults to this mode when it is turned On for the first time.
Select the appropriate Mode before setting the clock or the program.
SP-D1
Input the address of the FULL-2WAY wall switch to activatethe Special day 2 feature remotely.SP-D2
Input the address of the FULL-2WAY wall switch to activatethe Timer On/Standby feature remotely.STBY
To program the LCD display ON/OFF for auto offAUTO OFF
Set the location for the ASTRO , LAT,LON and GMT.Set the date and time for D.S.T(Daylight Saving Time)LOCAL
Caution! SET
Timer Modes and their FunctionsThe pointer " " or " " in the top or bottom area of the LCD display indicates which timer mode has been selected.The timer mode changes each time the key is pressed.
Names and Functions
Before Use Modes Explanation
TIME
MODE NML SPD SPECIALPRG
SEC
CTL LAT TIME
PRG NO LOAD
MODE NML
INDDIM G
SPD SPECIALPRG
ADDRESS NO
SPD-1
TYPE CTL MODENML
ON OFF
CTL DAYSPD-2 SuM Tu W Th F Sa
CTL LAT TIME
SPD-1
NML
ON OFF
CTL DAYSPD-2 SuM Tu W Th F Sa
MODE
CLR
CLR
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
Error Display
MODEMove the pointer " " to the potision with the key.
Adjust the month, date, hour, minute, and second digits in the same way.Adjust the Year digit with the keys,then press the key.•The allowable range of calendar years is 2001 or 2098.•The clock starts after you set the seconds digit,when the key is pressed.When all clock setting is finished, move the pointer " " back to the NML (Normal)position,with the key. The Timer will not function correctly unless the Normal mode is selected.
2 Assign a program number to the program you are settingThe allowable range of PRG No.(Program No.) is 1 to 30.Select with ,press .
SET5 Selecting Operation type
Select NML(Nomal) with , press .
SET
SET
SET
SET
SETSET
6 Setting On TimeSet the hour digits with , press .Set the minute digits with , press .
7 Setting Off TimeSet hour digits with , press .Set minute digits with , press .
9 To set another stage, repeat the above procedure from step 1.
Error Display Error description Inspection Corrective Action
Error related toFULL-2WAY system
FULL-2WAY signal lines connected?Are FULL-2WAY Signal lines shorted to each other?Is Transmission Unit power turned On?Is Output of amplifier shorted?Is Transformer fuse bumed out?Are Sync. output terminals shorted together?
10 No FULL-2WAY signal
11 Uncontrollable
20 No synchrorized output
Connect the FULL-2WAY signal lines.Check the FULL-2WAY signal lines.Turn the transmission Unit Power On.Check the Output wirings of amplifier.Replace Transformers fuse.Check connections for Sync. output terminals.Error retated to time synchrorization
3 Selecting a LOAD TypeSelect the desired LOAD type from IND(Individual),P(pattern), G(group), and DIM(Dimmer)with , press .
4 Setting ADDRESS No.Using the keys, select the ADDRESS No.you wish to control,press .
Verifying the control programSelect a program number.If a program is already assigned to that number,the contents will be displayed 2 seconeds later.
CLR
Advance day using the key.
MODE
The digit that will be set, flashes!
The digit that will be set, flashes!
MODE
Setting Present Time
1 Move the pointer " " to the PRG(Program)position with the key
If you press and hold for more than 2 sec., in program mode, all the control program date associated with the PRG No. now on the display will be cleared.
If no On time setting is required, leave the digits blank (--:--).The time digits will be cleared (--:--) with the key.
If no Off time setting is required, leave the digits blank (--:--).The time digits will be cleared (--:--) with the key.
8 Setting Days of Week to Enable TimerMark the Special day(s) or day(s) of week with the pointer
" " on which the timer is to be enabled.Change ON/OFF status using the keys press .By default, Monday through Friday are marked with dots.
10 When finished finished, move pointer " " back to the NML(Normal) position with the key.The timer will not function correctly unless the Normal mode is selected.
Basic Operating Steps
61 62
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
RESETPOWER
SP-D2
STBY
SP-D1
D.S.T CLRSET
LIGHT BACK
MODE - +
D.S.T SYNCHRONIZE
ADDRESS SP-D1 STBY AUTO OFF LOCALSP-D2
Input the address of the FULL-2WAY wall switch to activatethe Special day 1 feature remotely.
Program Timer Unit (WRT35409-8) Setting Method
Identifying Control Features LCD Panel
•24 V AC input power OK.
Power indicator light•Choose a mode function.
Mode key•Reset all the configuration parameters to default settings.
Reset key
•Set your selection and or advance selection to the next item.
Set key
•Cancel the last input.Clear key
•Return selection to the previous item.
Backspace key
•Scroll up or down+/- keys
•Tum the backlight on. The backlight automati- cally switches off if there is no key activity for a period of 5 minutes.
Backlight key
•Advance a clock by 1 hour from present time.
Daylight Saving Time key
•Program or clear the next day for Special day 1.
Special Day 1 key
•Program or clear the next day for Special day 2.
Special Day 2 key
•Enter standby mode.Standby key
•Day of week/Special day
•D.S.T (daylitght saving time)
•Sunset/Sunrise time adjustment
•Date,month,and year
•Sec./Error/Earlier /Later time
•Auto Off ON/OFF/ Load status
•Time synchronization (correction)complete
•Control mode in astronomic control mode
•Address No.•Load type
•Mode
•Displays the program(PRG)No. now being set up.•Operation type
•Hour/minute
•Special day 1 registration•Special day 2 registration
•Special day set up
•Lit when the fallwing day is a special day.
•Lit if the unit is in standby.
•Control method
Mode FunctionsNML
PRG
SP-D
SPECIAL
MODE
MODE
MODEMODE
Timer modescrolls when keyis pressed.
AboutPressing the keywhile setting, verifying,changing clock, regionprogram or special settingwill save all changes tothat point.
The values entered will not be saved unless the key is pressed.
The timer mode changeseach item the keyis pressed
NORMAL mode
Program the unit,modify existing programming,or verify programming just entered.
Program special days(holidays).
Set the present time and date.The unit defaults to this mode when it is turned On for the first time.
Select the appropriate Mode before setting the clock or the program.
SP-D1
Input the address of the FULL-2WAY wall switch to activatethe Special day 2 feature remotely.SP-D2
Input the address of the FULL-2WAY wall switch to activatethe Timer On/Standby feature remotely.STBY
To program the LCD display ON/OFF for auto offAUTO OFF
Set the location for the ASTRO , LAT,LON and GMT.Set the date and time for D.S.T(Daylight Saving Time)LOCAL
Caution! SET
Timer Modes and their FunctionsThe pointer " " or " " in the top or bottom area of the LCD display indicates which timer mode has been selected.The timer mode changes each time the key is pressed.
Names and Functions
Before Use Modes Explanation
TIME
MODE NML SPD SPECIALPRG
SEC
CTL LAT TIME
PRG NO LOAD
MODE NML
INDDIM G
SPD SPECIALPRG
ADDRESS NO
SPD-1
TYPE CTL MODENML
ON OFF
CTL DAYSPD-2 SuM Tu W Th F Sa
CTL LAT TIME
SPD-1
NML
ON OFF
CTL DAYSPD-2 SuM Tu W Th F Sa
MODE
CLR
CLR
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
Error Display
MODEMove the pointer " " to the potision with the key.
Adjust the month, date, hour, minute, and second digits in the same way.Adjust the Year digit with the keys,then press the key.•The allowable range of calendar years is 2001 or 2098.•The clock starts after you set the seconds digit,when the key is pressed.When all clock setting is finished, move the pointer " " back to the NML (Normal)position,with the key. The Timer will not function correctly unless the Normal mode is selected.
2 Assign a program number to the program you are settingThe allowable range of PRG No.(Program No.) is 1 to 30.Select with ,press .
SET5 Selecting Operation type
Select NML(Nomal) with , press .
SET
SET
SET
SET
SETSET
6 Setting On TimeSet the hour digits with , press .Set the minute digits with , press .
7 Setting Off TimeSet hour digits with , press .Set minute digits with , press .
9 To set another stage, repeat the above procedure from step 1.
Error Display Error description Inspection Corrective Action
Error related toFULL-2WAY system
FULL-2WAY signal lines connected?Are FULL-2WAY Signal lines shorted to each other?Is Transmission Unit power turned On?Is Output of amplifier shorted?Is Transformer fuse bumed out?Are Sync. output terminals shorted together?
10 No FULL-2WAY signal
11 Uncontrollable
20 No synchrorized output
Connect the FULL-2WAY signal lines.Check the FULL-2WAY signal lines.Turn the transmission Unit Power On.Check the Output wirings of amplifier.Replace Transformers fuse.Check connections for Sync. output terminals.Error retated to time synchrorization
3 Selecting a LOAD TypeSelect the desired LOAD type from IND(Individual),P(pattern), G(group), and DIM(Dimmer)with , press .
4 Setting ADDRESS No.Using the keys, select the ADDRESS No.you wish to control,press .
Verifying the control programSelect a program number.If a program is already assigned to that number,the contents will be displayed 2 seconeds later.
CLR
Advance day using the key.
MODE
The digit that will be set, flashes!
The digit that will be set, flashes!
MODE
Setting Present Time
1 Move the pointer " " to the PRG(Program)position with the key
If you press and hold for more than 2 sec., in program mode, all the control program date associated with the PRG No. now on the display will be cleared.
If no On time setting is required, leave the digits blank (--:--).The time digits will be cleared (--:--) with the key.
If no Off time setting is required, leave the digits blank (--:--).The time digits will be cleared (--:--) with the key.
8 Setting Days of Week to Enable TimerMark the Special day(s) or day(s) of week with the pointer
" " on which the timer is to be enabled.Change ON/OFF status using the keys press .By default, Monday through Friday are marked with dots.
10 When finished finished, move pointer " " back to the NML(Normal) position with the key.The timer will not function correctly unless the Normal mode is selected.
Basic Operating Steps
61 62
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Features of a system
Plan
Components1. A Master switch is installed in a living room or a dining room to centrally monitor and control all the lights in a house.2. Dimming control for the living room is achieved by selecting the ideal lighting level to suit the situation.3. Pattern control of "going out" scene is convenient when going out. WRT6144WK-8 1
1
1
1
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WRT5502WK-8
WRT5504WK-8
WRT2050-80
WRT41429-8
WRT4345-82
WRT5731WK-8
WRT5504WK-8
WRT5504WK-8
WRT5501WK-8
WRT5502WK-8
WRT5502WK-8
WRT5502WK-8
WRT5503WK-8
WRT5501WK-8
WRT5501WK-8
WRT5502WK-8
WRT5502WK-8
WRT5502WK-8
WRT5501WK-8
WRT9600-8
Location DescriptionComponent
Product name Product No.Legend Quantity Function
Dining room
Kitchen
Living room
Wall Mount switch
Wireless Address Setting Unit
Bathroom
Washstand
Lighting control panel
Relay panel
Toilet
Corridor
Entrance
Staircase
Wide porch
Others
Bed room
Switch (2)
Master Switch 44(with Program Setting Unit)
Switch (4)
Transmission Unit
6A Contact Output T/U (4-Circuit)
Dimmer Switch
Switch (4)
Switch (4)
Switch (1)
Switch (2)
Switch (2)
Switch (2)
Switch (3)
Switch (1)
Switch (1)
Switch (2)
Switch (2)
Switch (2)
Switch (1)
Wireless Programming Unit
Dimmer Unit (500W Incandescent Lamps)
• Central monitor and control of all house lights from a single location
• Pattern Control programming
• Transmission Unit installed• Relays installed for the number of circuits to be
controlled• Dimmer Unit installed for incandescent lamps
• Dimmer Switch installed to control brightness of incandescent lamps
• Pattern Switch installed for Dimmer Control, making desirable lighting scene
• "On-timer" Control function for ventilating fan
• "Off-delay" Control function for ventilating fan
• Corridor lighting to be individually turned on and off
• Pattern Control when going out
• Lighting to be individually turned on and off
• Lighting to be individually turned on and off
• For Address assignment to Switches and the other I/O components
R44
TU
MR
MR
MR
MR
MR
MR
RT
RD
MR
RP
RP
RP
RP
R PR PR PR P
MR
MR
MR
MR
MR
MR
RT
MR
MR
MR
RD
MR
MR
RD
RP
MR
MR
MR
MR
Wide porch
Entrance
Corridor
Toilet
WashstandBathroom
Bed room
Living room Dining room
Kitchen
T U
WP
3-1
4-3
4-3 RP
RP
RP
RP
P1P2P3P4
4-1
4-2
220V AC
3-23-33-4
T/U
MR
MR
MR
4-14-2
3-4
3-2 3-2
5-25-1
M MR R
1-3
1-4 1-31-4
MR 3-2
3-2MR
RDM
R
P8
2-4
2-3 2-32-4
2-12-2
MRMR
2-1
2-2
220V AC
0-4
MRMRRTRD
0-10-20-30-4
MR1-1MR1-2
0-2
0-1
0-3
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1 1-1
1-2
Dimmer switch 1Dimmer switch 2Dimmer switch 3
Dimmer Switch 3
Dimmer Switch 3
P1P2P3P4
RPRPRPRP
MR
MR
MR
R44
Dimmer Switch 2
Dimmer Switch 2
Dimmer Switch 1
Dimmer Switch 1
Dimmer Switch 2
Dimmer Switch 2
Dimmer Switch 2
Dimmer Switch 2
MR3-1
3-3
Dimmer Switch 3
MR
RT
44
RD RP 3-4
MR
MR
MR
Residence
VV–F 2.0–2C
VV–F 2.0–3C
VV-F 2.0–2C+3C
CPEV1.2–1P
Individual Switch
Pattern Switch
Group Switch
On-timer Switch
Off-delay Switch
Dimmer Switch
Master Switch
MR
RP
RG
RT
RD
MR
R
¡Legends
System Design Examplesyyy
63 64
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Features of a system
Plan
Components1. A Master switch is installed in a living room or a dining room to centrally monitor and control all the lights in a house.2. Dimming control for the living room is achieved by selecting the ideal lighting level to suit the situation.3. Pattern control of "going out" scene is convenient when going out. WRT6144WK-8 1
1
1
1
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WRT5502WK-8
WRT5504WK-8
WRT2050-80
WRT41429-8
WRT4345-82
WRT5731WK-8
WRT5504WK-8
WRT5504WK-8
WRT5501WK-8
WRT5502WK-8
WRT5502WK-8
WRT5502WK-8
WRT5503WK-8
WRT5501WK-8
WRT5501WK-8
WRT5502WK-8
WRT5502WK-8
WRT5502WK-8
WRT5501WK-8
WRT9600-8
Location DescriptionComponent
Product name Product No.Legend Quantity Function
Dining room
Kitchen
Living room
Wall Mount switch
Wireless Address Setting Unit
Bathroom
Washstand
Lighting control panel
Relay panel
Toilet
Corridor
Entrance
Staircase
Wide porch
Others
Bed room
Switch (2)
Master Switch 44(with Program Setting Unit)
Switch (4)
Transmission Unit
6A Contact Output T/U (4-Circuit)
Dimmer Switch
Switch (4)
Switch (4)
Switch (1)
Switch (2)
Switch (2)
Switch (2)
Switch (3)
Switch (1)
Switch (1)
Switch (2)
Switch (2)
Switch (2)
Switch (1)
Wireless Programming Unit
Dimmer Unit (500W Incandescent Lamps)
• Central monitor and control of all house lights from a single location
• Pattern Control programming
• Transmission Unit installed• Relays installed for the number of circuits to be
controlled• Dimmer Unit installed for incandescent lamps
• Dimmer Switch installed to control brightness of incandescent lamps
• Pattern Switch installed for Dimmer Control, making desirable lighting scene
• "On-timer" Control function for ventilating fan
• "Off-delay" Control function for ventilating fan
• Corridor lighting to be individually turned on and off
• Pattern Control when going out
• Lighting to be individually turned on and off
• Lighting to be individually turned on and off
• For Address assignment to Switches and the other I/O components
R44
TU
MR
MR
MR
MR
MR
MR
RT
RD
MR
RP
RP
RP
RP
R PR PR PR P
MR
MR
MR
MR
MR
MR
RT
MR
MR
MR
RD
MR
MR
RD
RP
MR
MR
MR
MR
Wide porch
Entrance
Corridor
Toilet
WashstandBathroom
Bed room
Living room Dining room
Kitchen
T U
WP
3-1
4-3
4-3 RP
RP
RP
RP
P1P2P3P4
4-1
4-2
220V AC
3-23-33-4
T/U
MR
MR
MR
4-14-2
3-4
3-2 3-2
5-25-1
M MR R
1-3
1-4 1-31-4
MR 3-2
3-2MR
RDM
R
P8
2-4
2-3 2-32-4
2-12-2
MRMR
2-1
2-2
220V AC
0-4
MRMRRTRD
0-10-20-30-4
MR1-1MR1-2
0-2
0-1
0-3
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1 1-1
1-2
Dimmer switch 1Dimmer switch 2Dimmer switch 3
Dimmer Switch 3
Dimmer Switch 3
P1P2P3P4
RPRPRPRP
MR
MR
MR
R44
Dimmer Switch 2
Dimmer Switch 2
Dimmer Switch 1
Dimmer Switch 1
Dimmer Switch 2
Dimmer Switch 2
Dimmer Switch 2
Dimmer Switch 2
MR3-1
3-3
Dimmer Switch 3
MR
RT
44
RD RP 3-4
MR
MR
MR
Residence
VV–F 2.0–2C
VV–F 2.0–3C
VV-F 2.0–2C+3C
CPEV1.2–1P
Individual Switch
Pattern Switch
Group Switch
On-timer Switch
Off-delay Switch
Dimmer Switch
Master Switch
MR
RP
RG
RT
RD
MR
R
¡Legends
System Design Examplesyyy
63 64
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Outline of Lighting Control System
System Diagram
Components
Outline of Remote Lighting Control SystemThis remote lighting control system uses a multiplex transmission.1. A master switch is installed on a panel board in a control room to perform pattern control on each
floor (all lights on, some lights on, and all lights off for public areas and all lights off for offices). Pattern and group controls shall be programmed by a Master Switch.
2. Group switches are used to collectively turn on and off lights for each department in the office.3. Lighting can be controlled automatically by a Timer Setting Unit.4. Relays and a Relay Control T/U shall be installed in a distribution panel.
Panel List
Floor Plan Example
Relay No.
Distribution Panel
Group Switch (2)
Group Switch (4)
VV–F 2.0–2C
VV–F 2.0–3C
VV–F 2.0–2C 2
VV–F 2.0–2C 3C
VV–F 2.0–2C 2 3C
VV–F 2.0–2C 3 3C
VV–F 2.0–2C 5 3C
VV–F 2.0–2C 6 3C
VV–F 2.0–2C 7 3C
CPEV 1.2–1P
MR2
MR4
RG2
RG4
R
7
9
13
15
17
¡Legends
Individual Switch (2)
Individual Switch (4)
Lobby
Corridor
Conference room A
1F
Office
MR4 MR4
94
RG49RG4 RG2 RG2
3
2
9 9
13
7
7
9
9 69 1
9
13
9
9R 26
517
15
1L - 1
7
13
MR2MR2
7
MR4 MR4
R 32
R 31
R 32
R 28
R 30
R 29
R 23
R 27
R 24
R 25
R 21
R31
R 22
R
R38 R37
R36 R35
Group control range
1
R 18R 20 R 16 R 2 R 4R 6R 8R 10R 12R 14
R 1 R 3R 19 R 17 R 15 R 13 R11 R 9 R 7 R 5
R 34 R 33 R 34 R 32 R 34 R 33
R32 R31 R32 R31 R32 R31
Control room
Machineroom
Panel Main Breaker Circuit No. Circuit Breaker RelaysPower SupplyType of Load
Capacity (VA) DescriptionRemarks
Flush Mount &Self-contained
Type
1L–1
2 W110V DC
1128
1128
1128
752
2090
684
640
63
R1~R6
R7~R12
R13~R18
R19~R22
R23~R30
R31~R34
R35~R38
3P
2P
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
1
2
1
¡Circuit No.
1
1
Guide lamp
Receptacle
AC110V
AC220V
Emergency lamp DC110V
Relay (double pole)
AC110V
1
D
Transmission Unit (Expansion Type), Amplifier (Expansion Type)
2P20/20
2P50/20
ELB2P50/20
2P50/20
D 6
D 6
D 6
D 4
D 8
D 4
D 4
Relay Control T/U 10Contact Input T/U 2Timer Setting Unit 1
1 , 3 W110/220V AC
Guide lamp
Lights
Transformer 2
Receptacle
Emergency lamp
MR MR RG RG3 L - 1 3 L - 22
3F
MR MR RG RG
2F2 L - 1 2 L - 2
MR MR RG RG1F1 L - 1 1 L - 2
R
[Control Room on 1st Floor][Corridor] [Conference Room] [Office]
2
1
Location Description LegendComponent
Product NameQuantity Function
Control room
Machineryroom
DistributionPanel
Master SwitchSwitch (4)
Program Setting Unit
Transmission Unit
Transformer
20A HID Relay (Double Pole)
Relay Control T/U
Contact Input T/U
Program Timer Unit
Amplifier
Corridor
Conference room
Office
Others
Wall MountSwitch
Address Setting Unit
Individual Switch (1 - 4)
Individual Switch (1 - 4)
Group Switch (1 - 4)
Wireless Programming Unit
Transformer
20A HID Relay (Double Pole)
Relay Control T/U
Amplifier
Transformer
20A HID Relay (Double Pole)
Relay Control T/U
Model No.
WRT5514-8
WRT5850-8
WRT2050-80
WR2311-851
WR6166-8
WR3400-8
WRT3224-8
WRT35409-8
WR3913K-80
WRT5511~4-8
WRT5511~4-8
WRT5511~4-8
WRT9600-8
WR2311-851
WR6166-8
WR3400-8
WR3913K-80
WR2311-851
WR6166-8
WR3400-8
As required
1
1
2
As required
Number of relays / 4
2
1
1
As required
As required
As required
1
1
As required
Number of relays / 4
1
1
As required
Number of relays / 4
Central monitor and control of an entire building
¡Transmission Unit (CPU) installed¡Timer Setting Unit installed¡Amplifier installed for amplification of signal current (Required per 500mA)¡Relays installed for the required number of circuits to be controlled on 1st floor
Corridor lights to be individually turned on and off
Conference room lights to be individually turned on and off
Office lights to be turned on and off collectively per department
To assign addresses for switches and Contact Input T/Us
¡Relays installed for the required number of circuits to be controlled per floor¡Amplifier installed for amplification of signal current (Required per 500mA)
¡Relays for the required number of circuits to be controlled per floor
R
1
2
MR
MR
RG
CPEV1.2–1P
Distribution Panel
Master Switch
Individual Switch
Group Switch
2
1
R
MR
RG
¡Legends
Distribution Panel(Transmission Units, Amplifiers inside)Distribution Panel(Amplifiers inside)
Office
System Design Examplesyyy
65 66
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Outline of Lighting Control System
System Diagram
Components
Outline of Remote Lighting Control SystemThis remote lighting control system uses a multiplex transmission.1. A master switch is installed on a panel board in a control room to perform pattern control on each
floor (all lights on, some lights on, and all lights off for public areas and all lights off for offices). Pattern and group controls shall be programmed by a Master Switch.
2. Group switches are used to collectively turn on and off lights for each department in the office.3. Lighting can be controlled automatically by a Timer Setting Unit.4. Relays and a Relay Control T/U shall be installed in a distribution panel.
Panel List
Floor Plan Example
Relay No.
Distribution Panel
Group Switch (2)
Group Switch (4)
VV–F 2.0–2C
VV–F 2.0–3C
VV–F 2.0–2C 2
VV–F 2.0–2C 3C
VV–F 2.0–2C 2 3C
VV–F 2.0–2C 3 3C
VV–F 2.0–2C 5 3C
VV–F 2.0–2C 6 3C
VV–F 2.0–2C 7 3C
CPEV 1.2–1P
MR2
MR4
RG2
RG4
R
7
9
13
15
17
¡Legends
Individual Switch (2)
Individual Switch (4)
Lobby
Corridor
Conference room A
1F
Office
MR4 MR4
94
RG49RG4 RG2 RG2
3
2
9 9
13
7
7
9
9 69 1
9
13
9
9R 26
517
15
1L - 1
7
13
MR2MR2
7
MR4 MR4
R 32
R 31
R 32
R 28
R 30
R 29
R 23
R 27
R 24
R 25
R 21
R31
R 22
R
R38 R37
R36 R35
Group control range
1
R 18R 20 R 16 R 2 R 4R 6R 8R 10R 12R 14
R 1 R 3R 19 R 17 R 15 R 13 R11 R 9 R 7 R 5
R 34 R 33 R 34 R 32 R 34 R 33
R32 R31 R32 R31 R32 R31
Control room
Machineroom
Panel Main Breaker Circuit No. Circuit Breaker RelaysPower SupplyType of Load
Capacity (VA) DescriptionRemarks
Flush Mount &Self-contained
Type
1L–1
2 W110V DC
1128
1128
1128
752
2090
684
640
63
R1~R6
R7~R12
R13~R18
R19~R22
R23~R30
R31~R34
R35~R38
3P
2P
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
1
2
1
¡Circuit No.
1
1
Guide lamp
Receptacle
AC110V
AC220V
Emergency lamp DC110V
Relay (double pole)
AC110V
1
D
Transmission Unit (Expansion Type), Amplifier (Expansion Type)
2P20/20
2P50/20
ELB2P50/20
2P50/20
D 6
D 6
D 6
D 4
D 8
D 4
D 4
Relay Control T/U 10Contact Input T/U 2Timer Setting Unit 1
1 , 3 W110/220V AC
Guide lamp
Lights
Transformer 2
Receptacle
Emergency lamp
MR MR RG RG3 L - 1 3 L - 22
3F
MR MR RG RG
2F2 L - 1 2 L - 2
MR MR RG RG1F1 L - 1 1 L - 2
R
[Control Room on 1st Floor][Corridor] [Conference Room] [Office]
2
1
Location Description LegendComponent
Product NameQuantity Function
Control room
Machineryroom
DistributionPanel
Master SwitchSwitch (4)
Program Setting Unit
Transmission Unit
Transformer
20A HID Relay (Double Pole)
Relay Control T/U
Contact Input T/U
Program Timer Unit
Amplifier
Corridor
Conference room
Office
Others
Wall MountSwitch
Address Setting Unit
Individual Switch (1 - 4)
Individual Switch (1 - 4)
Group Switch (1 - 4)
Wireless Programming Unit
Transformer
20A HID Relay (Double Pole)
Relay Control T/U
Amplifier
Transformer
20A HID Relay (Double Pole)
Relay Control T/U
Model No.
WRT5514-8
WRT5850-8
WRT2050-80
WR2311-851
WR6166-8
WR3400-8
WRT3224-8
WRT35409-8
WR3913K-80
WRT5511~4-8
WRT5511~4-8
WRT5511~4-8
WRT9600-8
WR2311-851
WR6166-8
WR3400-8
WR3913K-80
WR2311-851
WR6166-8
WR3400-8
As required
1
1
2
As required
Number of relays / 4
2
1
1
As required
As required
As required
1
1
As required
Number of relays / 4
1
1
As required
Number of relays / 4
Central monitor and control of an entire building
¡Transmission Unit (CPU) installed¡Timer Setting Unit installed¡Amplifier installed for amplification of signal current (Required per 500mA)¡Relays installed for the required number of circuits to be controlled on 1st floor
Corridor lights to be individually turned on and off
Conference room lights to be individually turned on and off
Office lights to be turned on and off collectively per department
To assign addresses for switches and Contact Input T/Us
¡Relays installed for the required number of circuits to be controlled per floor¡Amplifier installed for amplification of signal current (Required per 500mA)
¡Relays for the required number of circuits to be controlled per floor
R
1
2
MR
MR
RG
CPEV1.2–1P
Distribution Panel
Master Switch
Individual Switch
Group Switch
2
1
R
MR
RG
¡Legends
Distribution Panel(Transmission Units, Amplifiers inside)Distribution Panel(Amplifiers inside)
Office
System Design Examplesyyy
65 66
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
46
Insulatedmounting strap
Metalmounting strap
Metalmounting strap
Insulatedmounting strap
Mountingpitch increase
If the metal mounting is installed on the left side (as in the illustration on the right),the fastening pitch of the strap is too large and the plate cannot be installed.
Keep both wires at least 30 cm apart.signal line
Power line
Ry Ry1 24
3
WR3400-8
To transformer
Resistance of 5 to 7 K ,1/4W min.Resistance
of 5 to 7 K , 1/4W min.
LED shows the same status for loads 1 and 3. Only load 1 is operating.
LED shows the same status for loads 2 and 4. Only load 2 is operating.
T/U switchTransmissionUnit
TransmissionUnit
T/U switch
FULL-2WAYsignal lines
FULL-2WAYsignal lines
T/U switch
T/U switch
1
2
3
Panasonic products are not compatible with other companies' remote control systems. Do not combine our products with systems from other companies.Use only Panasonic remote control relays, circuit breakers, and transformers.
For multiplex transmission signal wire, use only that made especially for FULL-2WAY remote control.
Cautions for wiring
8
9
Apply grounding to the Transmission unit, amplifier, signal line monitor T/U, and Computer Interface Unit.
Avoid the following connections to Transmission units, amplifiers.
10
11
Do not connect inappropriate types of electric wire to the screw terminals (signal terminals, etc.). (Doing so cloud cause electric wires to become detached.) If this type of connection is unavoidable, use pressure terminals instead.
When using the All-ON setting switch for setting the pattern control program
12 When a WN3700-8 FULL-COLOR Metal Mounting Strap, or a Device with a Metal Mounting Strap, is connected next to a WN3710-8 FULL-COLOR Insulated Mounting Strap or a Device with an Insulated Mounting Strap, install the WN3710-8 on the left side of the WN3700-8 as shown in the diagram.
4
5
6
7
For signal lines installed outside, use steel conduit pipes to house them to prevent the effects of induced lightning surges, etc.
FULL-2WAY type remote control products (except 20A HID relays) installed in distribution panels should be kept at least 10cm away from wires carrying a current of 15A or above.
If an electromagnetic switch is used as the load for the 20A HID Relay or the 6A, 10A Contact Output T/U Unit, ensure the switch has an input surge current of no more than 500 mA.Also, to prevent malfunction or equipment damage due to surge voltage, fit a surge damper or similar to the electromagnetic switch.
Keep the power circuits for products requiring a 110/220V AC power supply-such as the transmission unit, transformer, and amplifier, separate from the load. Furthermore, if power is supplied from a generator, prevent flickering by including an AC/GC circuit.
• Although general purpose electrical wire can be used, it is recommended that communication cable (CPEV) be used for signal lines to differentiate them from power lines and prevent their mis-wiring.
• Avoid wiring signal and power lines in parallel. This may damage system components or cause those connected to signal lines to malfunction. If such parallel wiring is unavoidable, keep both wires at least 30 cm apart, or house them in separate conduit pipes.
• Connecting signal wires from multiple transmission units or amplifiers to each other;
• Connecting a signal wire from a transmission unit to an output signal wire from an amplifier;
• If there is a terminal not connected to a relay (in the case of 3 or fewer relays connected) in the relay control T/U (4-Circuit), the pattern switch condition display lamp will not light up.
(1) Connect a relay to the vacant terminal.(2) Use a Relay Control T/U (1-Circuit) (WR3430-8).(3) Connect a resistor as in the diagram. (4) When using the All-ON setting switch for setting the pattern
control program, either follow steps (1) to (3) above, or, after pressing the All-ON switch when performing pattern settings, press the individual address switch corresponding to the open terminal to exclude it from the pattern.
• Signal and power lines can be run in parallel less than 30cm apart inside a distribution panel.However, install signal wire at least 5cm away from a main line (100 A or above).
• The maximum length of a control wire (0.8 to 1.4mm diameter) from a relay control T/U to a 20A HID remote control relay is 50m using single-core cable. Keep signal and power lines at least 30cm apart.
• Apply grounding to Transmission Units from the grounding terminal.
13 Signal line short-circuit indication 17
18
19
20
21
A Transmission Unit is under initialization for approximately the first 20 seconds after it is turned on (the status of the relays are being matched to switch indications). During this time, loads will not operate even if a switch is pressed.
The life span of the electronic components used in FULL-2WAY remote control system is approximately 8 years, dependant on use. When replacing the Transmission Unit, pattern and group settings must be reset. Therefore, be sure to keep a copy of the pattern and group control program settings in a suitable location, such as in the distribution panel.
If you choose to install an uninterruptable power supply as backup in case of power failure, select a sine wave output model. Rectangular wave output models will not work with this equipment.
Use the WR3913K-80 Amplifier with the WRT2050 series Transmission Unit.
As Remote control relays (both 20A and 6A, 10A) are self-holding, after a power failure they will return to the state held just prior to the power failure.
14
15
16
Be sure to contact a mega test on wiring after disconnecting a power line to the system components (Including a Transmission Unit and an Amplifier, etc.).Never attempt any mega testing for signal lines.
To set addresses for switches and T/Us, connect them to a FULL-2WAY signal wire from a Transmission Unit and use a Wireless Address Setting Unit (WRT9600-8 or WRT9500K-8).
Remove the cover from the switch (Infrared I/O) and use a pencil to write the load addresses. Use a name plate less than 0.3mm thick.
• Transmission Units and Amplifiers have signal line short-circuit indication LEDs. These LEDs light up when the signal line is short-circuited. Momentary flashing indicates the signal line is normal. Any short-circuit occurring in a signal line between multiple amplifiers is indicated by an LED continuing to flash in the nearest amplifier. (See diagram.)
Transmission unit Amplifier AmplifierShort circuit
Short circuit indication LED ON
1 2
Notes on Design1
2
3
Because of its incompatibility with other manufacturers' remote lighting control systems, this system cannot be used in combination with any other system.
For Infrared I/O Switches and Terminal Units, be sure to use WRT2050 series or WRT2040 series Transmission Unit.
Load addresses must not be duplicated
• Dip switch fixtures can also be connected to WRT2000 series Transmission Unit.
• Do not set the same load addresses for more than two Relay Control T/Us (Including 6A, 10A Contact Output T/Us and Appellation Indication Units with T/U Function). Doing so may result in malfunction of the system.
4 Transformer Capacity• Power supply to all the 20A HID Relays can be provided by one
Transformer per Transmission Unit.A Transmission Unit sequentially controls Relay Control T/Us, which simultaneously operate four 20A HID Relays, at intervals of 15m sec.(Under the pattern control, group control, etc.) The momental current consumption of National relay is 0.35A x 4 pcs, and the transformer capacity is 1.5A. Therefore, up to four 20A HID Relays are controlled by a Transformer per transmission unit.
• For easier wiring, it is recommended that a Transformer be installed to each relay control panel.
• When a Transformer capacity exceeds 1.5A, such as when using Contact Input T/Us, be sure to add another Transformer to the system.
• Be sure to use feed wiring or star wiring for signal lines, and avoid loop wiring that may cause malfunctions.
Notes on InstallationA
pp
end
ixIn
stal
lati
on
Addi
tiona
l Fun
ctio
nsA
dd
ress
Set
tin
gD
esig
nP
rod
uct
sB
asic
Fu
nct
ion
sS
yste
m O
utl
ine
67
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
68
46
Insulatedmounting strap
Metalmounting strap
Metalmounting strap
Insulatedmounting strap
Mountingpitch increase
If the metal mounting is installed on the left side (as in the illustration on the right),the fastening pitch of the strap is too large and the plate cannot be installed.
Keep both wires at least 30 cm apart.signal line
Power line
Ry Ry1 24
3
WR3400-8
To transformer
Resistance of 5 to 7 K ,1/4W min.Resistance
of 5 to 7 K , 1/4W min.
LED shows the same status for loads 1 and 3. Only load 1 is operating.
LED shows the same status for loads 2 and 4. Only load 2 is operating.
T/U switchTransmissionUnit
TransmissionUnit
T/U switch
FULL-2WAYsignal lines
FULL-2WAYsignal lines
T/U switch
T/U switch
1
2
3
Panasonic products are not compatible with other companies' remote control systems. Do not combine our products with systems from other companies.Use only Panasonic remote control relays, circuit breakers, and transformers.
For multiplex transmission signal wire, use only that made especially for FULL-2WAY remote control.
Cautions for wiring
8
9
Apply grounding to the Transmission unit, amplifier, signal line monitor T/U, and Computer Interface Unit.
Avoid the following connections to Transmission units, amplifiers.
10
11
Do not connect inappropriate types of electric wire to the screw terminals (signal terminals, etc.). (Doing so cloud cause electric wires to become detached.) If this type of connection is unavoidable, use pressure terminals instead.
When using the All-ON setting switch for setting the pattern control program
12 When a WN3700-8 FULL-COLOR Metal Mounting Strap, or a Device with a Metal Mounting Strap, is connected next to a WN3710-8 FULL-COLOR Insulated Mounting Strap or a Device with an Insulated Mounting Strap, install the WN3710-8 on the left side of the WN3700-8 as shown in the diagram.
4
5
6
7
For signal lines installed outside, use steel conduit pipes to house them to prevent the effects of induced lightning surges, etc.
FULL-2WAY type remote control products (except 20A HID relays) installed in distribution panels should be kept at least 10cm away from wires carrying a current of 15A or above.
If an electromagnetic switch is used as the load for the 20A HID Relay or the 6A, 10A Contact Output T/U Unit, ensure the switch has an input surge current of no more than 500 mA.Also, to prevent malfunction or equipment damage due to surge voltage, fit a surge damper or similar to the electromagnetic switch.
Keep the power circuits for products requiring a 110/220V AC power supply-such as the transmission unit, transformer, and amplifier, separate from the load. Furthermore, if power is supplied from a generator, prevent flickering by including an AC/GC circuit.
• Although general purpose electrical wire can be used, it is recommended that communication cable (CPEV) be used for signal lines to differentiate them from power lines and prevent their mis-wiring.
• Avoid wiring signal and power lines in parallel. This may damage system components or cause those connected to signal lines to malfunction. If such parallel wiring is unavoidable, keep both wires at least 30 cm apart, or house them in separate conduit pipes.
• Connecting signal wires from multiple transmission units or amplifiers to each other;
• Connecting a signal wire from a transmission unit to an output signal wire from an amplifier;
• If there is a terminal not connected to a relay (in the case of 3 or fewer relays connected) in the relay control T/U (4-Circuit), the pattern switch condition display lamp will not light up.
(1) Connect a relay to the vacant terminal.(2) Use a Relay Control T/U (1-Circuit) (WR3430-8).(3) Connect a resistor as in the diagram. (4) When using the All-ON setting switch for setting the pattern
control program, either follow steps (1) to (3) above, or, after pressing the All-ON switch when performing pattern settings, press the individual address switch corresponding to the open terminal to exclude it from the pattern.
• Signal and power lines can be run in parallel less than 30cm apart inside a distribution panel.However, install signal wire at least 5cm away from a main line (100 A or above).
• The maximum length of a control wire (0.8 to 1.4mm diameter) from a relay control T/U to a 20A HID remote control relay is 50m using single-core cable. Keep signal and power lines at least 30cm apart.
• Apply grounding to Transmission Units from the grounding terminal.
13 Signal line short-circuit indication 17
18
19
20
21
A Transmission Unit is under initialization for approximately the first 20 seconds after it is turned on (the status of the relays are being matched to switch indications). During this time, loads will not operate even if a switch is pressed.
The life span of the electronic components used in FULL-2WAY remote control system is approximately 8 years, dependant on use. When replacing the Transmission Unit, pattern and group settings must be reset. Therefore, be sure to keep a copy of the pattern and group control program settings in a suitable location, such as in the distribution panel.
If you choose to install an uninterruptable power supply as backup in case of power failure, select a sine wave output model. Rectangular wave output models will not work with this equipment.
Use the WR3913K-80 Amplifier with the WRT2050 series Transmission Unit.
As Remote control relays (both 20A and 6A, 10A) are self-holding, after a power failure they will return to the state held just prior to the power failure.
14
15
16
Be sure to contact a mega test on wiring after disconnecting a power line to the system components (Including a Transmission Unit and an Amplifier, etc.).Never attempt any mega testing for signal lines.
To set addresses for switches and T/Us, connect them to a FULL-2WAY signal wire from a Transmission Unit and use a Wireless Address Setting Unit (WRT9600-8 or WRT9500K-8).
Remove the cover from the switch (Infrared I/O) and use a pencil to write the load addresses. Use a name plate less than 0.3mm thick.
• Transmission Units and Amplifiers have signal line short-circuit indication LEDs. These LEDs light up when the signal line is short-circuited. Momentary flashing indicates the signal line is normal. Any short-circuit occurring in a signal line between multiple amplifiers is indicated by an LED continuing to flash in the nearest amplifier. (See diagram.)
Transmission unit Amplifier AmplifierShort circuit
Short circuit indication LED ON
1 2
Notes on Design1
2
3
Because of its incompatibility with other manufacturers' remote lighting control systems, this system cannot be used in combination with any other system.
For Infrared I/O Switches and Terminal Units, be sure to use WRT2050 series or WRT2040 series Transmission Unit.
Load addresses must not be duplicated
• Dip switch fixtures can also be connected to WRT2000 series Transmission Unit.
• Do not set the same load addresses for more than two Relay Control T/Us (Including 6A, 10A Contact Output T/Us and Appellation Indication Units with T/U Function). Doing so may result in malfunction of the system.
4 Transformer Capacity• Power supply to all the 20A HID Relays can be provided by one
Transformer per Transmission Unit.A Transmission Unit sequentially controls Relay Control T/Us, which simultaneously operate four 20A HID Relays, at intervals of 15m sec.(Under the pattern control, group control, etc.) The momental current consumption of National relay is 0.35A x 4 pcs, and the transformer capacity is 1.5A. Therefore, up to four 20A HID Relays are controlled by a Transformer per transmission unit.
• For easier wiring, it is recommended that a Transformer be installed to each relay control panel.
• When a Transformer capacity exceeds 1.5A, such as when using Contact Input T/Us, be sure to add another Transformer to the system.
• Be sure to use feed wiring or star wiring for signal lines, and avoid loop wiring that may cause malfunctions.
Notes on Installation
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
67
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
68
Load (lights) do not work even when a switch is pressed (when using the WRT2040 series or WRT2000 series or WRT2050 series Transmission Units)
Check1 Check2 Check3
TroubleshootingCheck the status of theoperated switch LED.
Check the indicatorlamp LED on thepattern/groupsetting switch.
Check the status ofthe short indicator LEDon the TransmissionUnit and Amplifier.
LED statusbefore operation
LED statusafter operation
Bot
h R
ed a
nd G
reen
OFF
LED
OFF
LED
OFF
Red
ON
LED
flas
hing
LED
OFF
No change(both Red andGreen OFF)Press
once
After a fewseconds,automatically
After a fewseconds,automatically
Does the transmission unit short indicator LED go OFF when the signal wire is removed from the FULL-2WAY signal wire terminal on the transmission unit?
Is the total signal current consumption of the switch T/U connected to the FULL-2WAY signal wire 500mA or less?(See P.18 for the calculating method for current consumption of FULL-2WAY signals.)
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Is Transmission Unit power on?
Is an address set in the switch?
Is primary power for the remote control transformer (115V or 230V) ON?
Is power being output at the remote control transformer secondary (24V AC)? (Check by measuring with a tester.)
There may be a transmission unit malfunction. Replace the transmission unit.
Signal current consumption is too high.Install an amplifier in the system to limit the current to less than 500mA. (See P. 18 for the amplifier installation method.)
There is a short-circuit in the FULL-2WAY signal wire. Find and fix it.
There is a discontinuity in the FULL-2WAY signal wire due to a disconnected wire or loose terminal screw. Find and fix it.
Set an address in the switch.(For the address setting method, see P. 38.)
There are several T/Us set to the same address. Assign only one address per T/U.
Check supply power and voltage to transmission unit.
There is no T/U corresponding to the load address of an individual switch. (This applies when using the WRT2000 series.)
Pattern and group control contents have not been set for pattern/group switches. (Enter and store pattern/group control settings.)
There is no T/U corresponding to the load address of an individual switch. (This applies when using the WRT2050 series and WRT2040 series.)
Check supply power and voltage to the remote control transformer.
Check secondary (24V AC) wiring and wiring connections to terminal screws of the remote control transformer, remote control relay and T/U etc. Fix any problems.
A load address not connected by the T/U to a remote control relay is set ON under pattern control. Exclude that address from the pattern program settings.
A load address not in the T/U is set under pattern control. Exclude that address from the pattern program settings.
The remote control relay is malfunctioning, and the contact state will not switch from OFF to ON. Replace the remote control relay.
The fuse for the remote control transformer is blown. Check secondary (24V AC) wiring of the remote control transformer, remote control relay, and T/U etc. After fixing the problem, replace the fuse.
The remote control relay is not connected to a T/U with the same address as the address set in the individual switch. Clear the address of the individual switch, or connect a remote control relay.
Both
Red a
nd
Gree
n OFF
Pressonce
Pressonce
LED
OFF
Red
ON
Gree
n ON
Gre
en O
N
OtherProblems with RelayControl T/Us
(1) The wire of a relay control T/U has come into contact with the blue terminal of a remote control relay due to a wire whisker, etc.(2) High voltage (115V or 230V AC) is being applied to a relay control T/U.
No change (both Red andGreen flashing)
Pressing the switch doesnot change the LED display
LED
flas
hes
whe
nsw
itch
is O
FF
NO
NO
YES
YES
Is the total signal current consumption of the switch T/U connected to the FULL-2WAY signal wire 500mA or less?(See P.18 for the calculating method for current consumption of FULL-2WAY signals.)
Does the remote control relay corresponding to the switch operate normally in accordance with switch operation?
Wiring length of FULL-2WAY signal wire from the transmission unit exceeds 500 m. Install an amplifier in the system to limit the current to less than 500 mA. (See P.18 for the amplifier installation method.)
Signal current consumption is too high. Install an amplifier in the system to limit the current to less than 500mA. (See P.18 for the amplifier installation method.)
The FULL-2WAY signal wire has been connected to the input/output terminals of the amplifier in the opposite order. Reconnect them correctly.
Signal lines are connected to multiple transmission units. Connect them to one unit only.
The secondary (24V AC) of the remote control transformer is connected to the signal line. Remove the signal line from the remote control transformer.
The life of the transmission unit has expired. Replace the transmission unit.
Wire connections in the operation circuit of the remote control relay are reversed. Find and fix the fault.
There is a problem with the system. Contact our company.
There is no power to the loads. Supply power to the loads, or fix the fault in the electrical supply circuit.
The load fixtures are faulty. Check for a burnt out lamp, etc.
When the Indicator lamp LED of the Program Setting Unit (WRT5850-8) is lit "Red," the load will not operate even if the switch is pressed.Return to normal by pressing the Setting/Normal selection switch.
The remote control relay is malfunctioning, and the state of the main contact will not switch from ON to OFF. Replace the remote control relay. (The contact may be fused. Check the load capacity.)
When LED is Red: Load is OFFWhen LED is Green: Load is ON
When the switch is pressed, the LED switches normally between Red and Green, but the state of the load and the switch LED are opposite.
When the switch is pressed, the LED switches normally between Red and Green, but the load does not go ON.
LEDON
Check1 Check2 Check3
TroubleshootingCheck the status of theoperated switch LED.
Check the indicatorlamp LED on thepattern/groupsetting switch.
Check the status ofthe short indicator LEDon the transmissionunit and amplifier.
LED statusbefore operation
LED statusafter operation
Both Red andGreen OFF
Pressonce
Pressonce
Pressonce
Pressonce After a few
seconds,automatically
Gre
en O
NR
ed O
NBo
th Re
d and
Gr
een O
FF
LED
OFF
LED
OFF
LED
OFF
LED
OFF
LED
OFF
LED f
lashin
g
Red
ON
Red
ON
Gree
n ON
Trouble ShootingA
pp
end
ixIn
stal
lati
on
Addi
tiona
l Fun
ctio
nsA
dd
ress
Set
tin
gD
esig
nP
rod
uct
sB
asic
Fu
nct
ion
sS
yste
m O
utl
ine
69
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
70
Load (lights) do not work even when a switch is pressed (when using the WRT2040 series or WRT2000 series or WRT2050 series Transmission Units)
Check1 Check2 Check3
TroubleshootingCheck the status of theoperated switch LED.
Check the indicatorlamp LED on thepattern/groupsetting switch.
Check the status ofthe short indicator LEDon the TransmissionUnit and Amplifier.
LED statusbefore operation
LED statusafter operation
Bot
h R
ed a
nd G
reen
OFF
LED
OFF
LED
OFF
Red
ON
LED
flas
hing
LED
OFF
No change(both Red andGreen OFF)Press
once
After a fewseconds,automatically
After a fewseconds,automatically
Does the transmission unit short indicator LED go OFF when the signal wire is removed from the FULL-2WAY signal wire terminal on the transmission unit?
Is the total signal current consumption of the switch T/U connected to the FULL-2WAY signal wire 500mA or less?(See P.18 for the calculating method for current consumption of FULL-2WAY signals.)
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Is Transmission Unit power on?
Is an address set in the switch?
Is primary power for the remote control transformer (115V or 230V) ON?
Is power being output at the remote control transformer secondary (24V AC)? (Check by measuring with a tester.)
There may be a transmission unit malfunction. Replace the transmission unit.
Signal current consumption is too high.Install an amplifier in the system to limit the current to less than 500mA. (See P. 18 for the amplifier installation method.)
There is a short-circuit in the FULL-2WAY signal wire. Find and fix it.
There is a discontinuity in the FULL-2WAY signal wire due to a disconnected wire or loose terminal screw. Find and fix it.
Set an address in the switch.(For the address setting method, see P. 38.)
There are several T/Us set to the same address. Assign only one address per T/U.
Check supply power and voltage to transmission unit.
There is no T/U corresponding to the load address of an individual switch. (This applies when using the WRT2000 series.)
Pattern and group control contents have not been set for pattern/group switches. (Enter and store pattern/group control settings.)
There is no T/U corresponding to the load address of an individual switch. (This applies when using the WRT2050 series and WRT2040 series.)
Check supply power and voltage to the remote control transformer.
Check secondary (24V AC) wiring and wiring connections to terminal screws of the remote control transformer, remote control relay and T/U etc. Fix any problems.
A load address not connected by the T/U to a remote control relay is set ON under pattern control. Exclude that address from the pattern program settings.
A load address not in the T/U is set under pattern control. Exclude that address from the pattern program settings.
The remote control relay is malfunctioning, and the contact state will not switch from OFF to ON. Replace the remote control relay.
The fuse for the remote control transformer is blown. Check secondary (24V AC) wiring of the remote control transformer, remote control relay, and T/U etc. After fixing the problem, replace the fuse.
The remote control relay is not connected to a T/U with the same address as the address set in the individual switch. Clear the address of the individual switch, or connect a remote control relay.
Both
Red a
nd
Gree
n OFF
Pressonce
Pressonce
LED
OFF
Red
ON
Gree
n ON
Gre
en O
N
OtherProblems with RelayControl T/Us
(1) The wire of a relay control T/U has come into contact with the blue terminal of a remote control relay due to a wire whisker, etc.(2) High voltage (115V or 230V AC) is being applied to a relay control T/U.
No change (both Red andGreen flashing)
Pressing the switch doesnot change the LED display
LED
flas
hes
whe
nsw
itch
is O
FF
NO
NO
YES
YES
Is the total signal current consumption of the switch T/U connected to the FULL-2WAY signal wire 500mA or less?(See P.18 for the calculating method for current consumption of FULL-2WAY signals.)
Does the remote control relay corresponding to the switch operate normally in accordance with switch operation?
Wiring length of FULL-2WAY signal wire from the transmission unit exceeds 500 m. Install an amplifier in the system to limit the current to less than 500 mA. (See P.18 for the amplifier installation method.)
Signal current consumption is too high. Install an amplifier in the system to limit the current to less than 500mA. (See P.18 for the amplifier installation method.)
The FULL-2WAY signal wire has been connected to the input/output terminals of the amplifier in the opposite order. Reconnect them correctly.
Signal lines are connected to multiple transmission units. Connect them to one unit only.
The secondary (24V AC) of the remote control transformer is connected to the signal line. Remove the signal line from the remote control transformer.
The life of the transmission unit has expired. Replace the transmission unit.
Wire connections in the operation circuit of the remote control relay are reversed. Find and fix the fault.
There is a problem with the system. Contact our company.
There is no power to the loads. Supply power to the loads, or fix the fault in the electrical supply circuit.
The load fixtures are faulty. Check for a burnt out lamp, etc.
When the Indicator lamp LED of the Program Setting Unit (WRT5850-8) is lit "Red," the load will not operate even if the switch is pressed.Return to normal by pressing the Setting/Normal selection switch.
The remote control relay is malfunctioning, and the state of the main contact will not switch from ON to OFF. Replace the remote control relay. (The contact may be fused. Check the load capacity.)
When LED is Red: Load is OFFWhen LED is Green: Load is ON
When the switch is pressed, the LED switches normally between Red and Green, but the state of the load and the switch LED are opposite.
When the switch is pressed, the LED switches normally between Red and Green, but the load does not go ON.
LEDON
Check1 Check2 Check3
TroubleshootingCheck the status of theoperated switch LED.
Check the indicatorlamp LED on thepattern/groupsetting switch.
Check the status ofthe short indicator LEDon the transmissionunit and amplifier.
LED statusbefore operation
LED statusafter operation
Both Red andGreen OFF
Pressonce
Pressonce
Pressonce
Pressonce After a few
seconds,automatically
Gre
en O
NR
ed O
NBo
th Re
d and
Gr
een O
FF
LED
OFF
LED
OFF
LED
OFF
LED
OFF
LED
OFF
LED f
lashin
g
Red
ON
Red
ON
Gree
n ON
Trouble Shooting
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
69
Ap
pen
dix
Inst
alla
tio
nAd
ditio
nal F
unct
ions
Ad
dre
ss S
etti
ng
Des
ign
Pro
du
cts
Bas
ic F
un
ctio
ns
Sys
tem
Ou
tlin
e
70
WRT
INDEX
WR21
21
22
15,16,24
15,16,24
22
22
16,17,24
30
28,57
28,57
28
18,21
26
28
28
15,16,23
15,16,23
15,16,23
15,16,23
15,16,23
15,16,23
15,16,23
15,16,24
24
24
28
WR2301-811
WR2311-851
WR3400-8
WR34169-8
WR3426K-8
WR3430-8
WR3440K-8
WR3442-8
WR35 -8
WR3891-8
WR3900RK-8
WR3901RK-8
WR3913K-80
WR39319-8
WR3990-8
WR3991-8
WR61613K-8
WR61613K-84
WR6161K-8
WR6161K-84
WR6166-8
WR6166-84
WR61663-8
WR61663-84
WR6172K-84
WR61723K-84
WR9910-8
Transformer(Panel Use)(115V AC)
Transformer(Panel Use)(220V AC)(Output 24V Type)
Relay Control T/U (4-Circuit)
6A Contact Output T/U (Single Pole)(4-Circuit)(Panel Use)
6A Contact Output T/U (Single Pole)(1-Circuit)(Panel Use)
Relay Control T/U (1-Circuit)
Relay Control T/U (4-Circuit)
10A Contact Output T/U (Single Pole)(4 circuits)(Panel Use)
Special Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum)
Card Operation Switch (for Individual and Group Control)
Appellation Indication Unit (Relay Status Indication Type)(Red)
Appellation Indication Unit with T/U Function (Switch/Individual Contact Input T/U-linked Type) (Red)
Amplifier (Panel Use) (100~242V AC)
Signal Line Monitoring Unit (Panel Use)
DIN Rail Mounter (Panel Use for Relay)
DIN Rail Mounter (for Relay Control T/U)
DIN Type 20A HID Relay (Single Pole)(Panel Use)
DIN Type 20A HID Relay (Single Pole)(Panel Use)
20A HID Relay (Single Pole)(Panel Use)
20A HID Relay (Single Pole)(Panel Use)
20A HID Relay (Double Pole)(JIS-Approved Dimensions(1), Panel Use)
20A HID Relay (Double Pole)(Panel Use)
DIN Type 20A HID Relay (Double Pole)(Panel Use)
DIN Type 20A HID Relay (Double Pole)(Panel Use)
480V 20A HID Relay (Double Pole) (Panel Use)
480V DIN Type 20A HID Relay (Double Pole)(Panel Use)
Mounting Strap (Panel Use for 10 Relays)
Product No. Product Name Page Product No. Product Name Page Product No. Product Name Page Product No. Product Name Page
WRVSwitch (1)(Infrared I/O)(GLACIER series)(Silver Gray)
Switch (2)(Infrared I/O)(GLACIER series)(Silver Gray)
Switch (3)(Infrared I/O)(GLACIER series)(Silver Gray)
Switch (4)(Infrared I/O)(GLACIER series)(Silver Gray)
Dimmer Switch(Infrared I/O)(GLACIER series)(Silver Gray)
WRV5601S1-8
WRV5602S1-8
WRV5603S1-8
WRV5604S1-8
WRV5831S1-8
20
20
20
20
20
WTC
Plates
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (White) (1-Gang)
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (White) (2-Gang)
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (White) (2-Gang)
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum) (1-Gang)
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum) (2-Gang)
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum) (3-Gang)
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum) (4-Gang)
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum) (5-Gang)
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum) (6-Gang)
WTC7101W-8
WTC7102W-8
WTC7122W-8
WTC9201K-8
WTC9202-8
WTC9203-8
WTC9204-8
WTC9205-8
WTC9206-8
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
WTVGLACIER Series Plates applicable to Switches (GLACIER Type) (1-Gang)
GLACIER Series Plates applicable to Switches (GLACIER Type) (2-Gang)
GLACIER Series Plates applicable to Switches (GLACIER Type) (3-Gang)
WTV6101S1-8
WTV6102S1-8
WTV6103S1-8
292929
WTFDecorative Plates
Decorative Plates
Decorative Plates
Insulated Mounting Strap(COSMO Module)
WTF3111W
WTF3112W
WTF3113W
WTF3710
30
30
30
28
WNWN3020-8
WN3710-8
WN60 W-8
WN65 K-8
WN65 9-8
WN75 -8
WN76 -8
Blank Chip
Insulated Mounting Strap
FULL-COLOR Module Plates Applicable to Switches (White)
FULL-COLOR Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum)
FULL-COLOR Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum)
FULL-COLOR Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum)
FULL-COLOR Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Stainless Steel)
28,31
28
30
30
30
30
30
WRT4345-82
WRT4348-82
WRT4741-82
WRT5501WK-8
WRT5502WK-8
WRT5503WK-8
WRT5504WK-8
WRT5511-8
WRT5512-8
WRT5513-8
WRT5514-8
WRT5518-8
WRT5551K-8
WRT5552K-8
WRT5553K-8
WRT5554K-8
WRT5731WK-8
WRT5771K-8
WRT5850-8
WRT6024WK-8
WRT6048WK-8
WRT6072WK-8
WRT6120WK-8
WRT6144WK-8
WRT6168WK-8
WRT9103K-89
WRT9500K-8
WRT9600-8
WRT92619-8
Dimmer Unit for 500W Incandescent Lamp (Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
Dimmer Unit for 800W Incandescent Lamp (Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
LED Dimmer Unit(Phase Control) (360VA, 220V AC)(Panel Use)
Switch (1) (Infrared I/O)(COSMO Module) (White)
Switch (2) (Infrared I/O)(COSMO Module) (White)
Switch (3) (Infrared I/O)(COSMO Module) (White)
Switch (4) (Infrared I/O)(COSMO Module) (White)
Switch (1)(Infrared I/O)(Eight Free Module)
Switch (2)(Infrared I/O)(Eight Free Module)
Switch (3)(Infrared I/O)(Eight Free Module)
Switch (4)(Infrared I/O)(Eight Free Module)
Switch (8)(Infrared I/O)(Eight Free Module)
Switch (1)(Infrared I/O)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Switch (2)(Infrared I/O)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Switch (3)(Infrared I/O)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Switch (4)(Infrared I/O)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Dimmer Switch(Infrared I/O Type) (COSMO Module) (White)
Dimmer Switch(Infrared I/O Type)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Program Setting Unit(FULL-COLOR Module)
Master Switch (24)(Infrared I/O)
Master Switch (48)(Infrared I/O)
Master Switch (72)(Infrared I/O)
Master Switch (20)(Infrared I/O)(with Program Setting Unit)
Master Switch (44)(Infrared I/O)(with Program Setting Unit)
Master Switch (68)(Infrared I/O)(with Program Setting Unit)
Central Control and Programming Unit(24V AC)
Wireless Address Setting Unit
Wireless Programming Unit(With Address Setting Function)
LCD Appellation Touch Swich
25,52
25,52
25,54
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19,26,52
19,26
20,39
20
20
20
20
20
20
21,55
21,36
21,35
20,45
WRT1320-8
WRT13906-8
WRT1511K-8
WRT1514K-8
WRT1561K-8
WRT15919-8
WRT2050-80
WRT2645K-8
WRT2648-8
WRT3211-8
WRT3224-8
WRT3241-8
WRT33649-8
WRT3365K-8
WRT3367K-8
WRT33749-8
WRT3375K-8
WRT3394-8
WRT3395-8
WRT35409-8
WRT3655-8
WRT3657-8
WRT4014-8
WRT41249-8
WRT42444-8
WRT43415-82
Wireless Receiver (Ceiling and Flush Mount)
Master Wireless Switch Receiver (Infrared I/O)(Ceiling and Flush Mount)
Battery Type Wireless Switch (1)(Infrared I/O)
Battery Type Wireless Switch (4)(Infrared I/O)
Battery Type Wireless Dimmer Switch (Infrared I/O)
Master Wireless Switch
Transmission Unit(Panel Use) (100~242V AC)
Open Protocol Interface Unit(Type-M TCP/IP)(Panel Use)
Open Protocol Interface Unit(Type-M)(Panel Use)
Contact Input T/U (1-Input)(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
Contact Input T/U (4-Input)(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
Dimmer Contact Input T/U (1-Input)(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit (Infrared I/O)(with Photosensor)(Wide Detection Area Type)
Auxiliary Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit (Wide Detection Area Type)
Auxiliary Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit (Wide Detection Area Type) (with Amplifier)
Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit (Infrared I/O)(with Photosensor)
Auxiliary Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit (Flush Mount)
Passive Infrared Sensor Switch (Infrared I/O) (Wall Mount) (with Photosensor)
Auxiliary Passive Infrared Sensor Switch (Wall Mount)
Program Timer Unit (Astronomical Clock Type, 24V AC)
Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit (with Separate Setting Unit)
Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit
Relay Control T/U(4-Circuit) (Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
6A Contact Output T/U (Single Pole)(4-Circuit)(Infrared I/O Type)(Panel Use)
Dimmer Unit (0-10V DC)(4-Circuit)
Dimmer Unit for 1500W Incandescent Lamp (Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
22,51
22
22
22,51
22
22
21
28,58
28,58
26,43
26,43
26,52
27,46
27,46,47
27,46,47
27,46,47
27,46
27
27
27,59
27,50
27,48
17,22
15,17,24
26,53
25,52
71 72
WRT
INDEX
WR21
21
22
15,16,24
15,16,24
22
22
16,17,24
30
28,57
28,57
28
18,21
26
28
28
15,16,23
15,16,23
15,16,23
15,16,23
15,16,23
15,16,23
15,16,23
15,16,24
24
24
28
WR2301-811
WR2311-851
WR3400-8
WR34169-8
WR3426K-8
WR3430-8
WR3440K-8
WR3442-8
WR35 -8
WR3891-8
WR3900RK-8
WR3901RK-8
WR3913K-80
WR39319-8
WR3990-8
WR3991-8
WR61613K-8
WR61613K-84
WR6161K-8
WR6161K-84
WR6166-8
WR6166-84
WR61663-8
WR61663-84
WR6172K-84
WR61723K-84
WR9910-8
Transformer(Panel Use)(115V AC)
Transformer(Panel Use)(220V AC)(Output 24V Type)
Relay Control T/U (4-Circuit)
6A Contact Output T/U (Single Pole)(4-Circuit)(Panel Use)
6A Contact Output T/U (Single Pole)(1-Circuit)(Panel Use)
Relay Control T/U (1-Circuit)
Relay Control T/U (4-Circuit)
10A Contact Output T/U (Single Pole)(4 circuits)(Panel Use)
Special Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum)
Card Operation Switch (for Individual and Group Control)
Appellation Indication Unit (Relay Status Indication Type)(Red)
Appellation Indication Unit with T/U Function (Switch/Individual Contact Input T/U-linked Type) (Red)
Amplifier (Panel Use) (100~242V AC)
Signal Line Monitoring Unit (Panel Use)
DIN Rail Mounter (Panel Use for Relay)
DIN Rail Mounter (for Relay Control T/U)
DIN Type 20A HID Relay (Single Pole)(Panel Use)
DIN Type 20A HID Relay (Single Pole)(Panel Use)
20A HID Relay (Single Pole)(Panel Use)
20A HID Relay (Single Pole)(Panel Use)
20A HID Relay (Double Pole)(JIS-Approved Dimensions(1), Panel Use)
20A HID Relay (Double Pole)(Panel Use)
DIN Type 20A HID Relay (Double Pole)(Panel Use)
DIN Type 20A HID Relay (Double Pole)(Panel Use)
480V 20A HID Relay (Double Pole) (Panel Use)
480V DIN Type 20A HID Relay (Double Pole)(Panel Use)
Mounting Strap (Panel Use for 10 Relays)
Product No. Product Name Page Product No. Product Name Page Product No. Product Name Page Product No. Product Name Page
WRVSwitch (1)(Infrared I/O)(GLACIER series)(Silver Gray)
Switch (2)(Infrared I/O)(GLACIER series)(Silver Gray)
Switch (3)(Infrared I/O)(GLACIER series)(Silver Gray)
Switch (4)(Infrared I/O)(GLACIER series)(Silver Gray)
Dimmer Switch(Infrared I/O)(GLACIER series)(Silver Gray)
WRV5601S1-8
WRV5602S1-8
WRV5603S1-8
WRV5604S1-8
WRV5831S1-8
20
20
20
20
20
WTC
Plates
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (White) (1-Gang)
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (White) (2-Gang)
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (White) (2-Gang)
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum) (1-Gang)
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum) (2-Gang)
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum) (3-Gang)
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum) (4-Gang)
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum) (5-Gang)
COSMO Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum) (6-Gang)
WTC7101W-8
WTC7102W-8
WTC7122W-8
WTC9201K-8
WTC9202-8
WTC9203-8
WTC9204-8
WTC9205-8
WTC9206-8
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
WTVGLACIER Series Plates applicable to Switches (GLACIER Type) (1-Gang)
GLACIER Series Plates applicable to Switches (GLACIER Type) (2-Gang)
GLACIER Series Plates applicable to Switches (GLACIER Type) (3-Gang)
WTV6101S1-8
WTV6102S1-8
WTV6103S1-8
292929
WTFDecorative Plates
Decorative Plates
Decorative Plates
Insulated Mounting Strap(COSMO Module)
WTF3111W
WTF3112W
WTF3113W
WTF3710
30
30
30
28
WNWN3020-8
WN3710-8
WN60 W-8
WN65 K-8
WN65 9-8
WN75 -8
WN76 -8
Blank Chip
Insulated Mounting Strap
FULL-COLOR Module Plates Applicable to Switches (White)
FULL-COLOR Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum)
FULL-COLOR Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum)
FULL-COLOR Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Aluminum)
FULL-COLOR Module Plates Applicable to Switches (Stainless Steel)
28,31
28
30
30
30
30
30
WRT4345-82
WRT4348-82
WRT4741-82
WRT5501WK-8
WRT5502WK-8
WRT5503WK-8
WRT5504WK-8
WRT5511-8
WRT5512-8
WRT5513-8
WRT5514-8
WRT5518-8
WRT5551K-8
WRT5552K-8
WRT5553K-8
WRT5554K-8
WRT5731WK-8
WRT5771K-8
WRT5850-8
WRT6024WK-8
WRT6048WK-8
WRT6072WK-8
WRT6120WK-8
WRT6144WK-8
WRT6168WK-8
WRT9103K-89
WRT9500K-8
WRT9600-8
WRT92619-8
Dimmer Unit for 500W Incandescent Lamp (Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
Dimmer Unit for 800W Incandescent Lamp (Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
LED Dimmer Unit(Phase Control) (360VA, 220V AC)(Panel Use)
Switch (1) (Infrared I/O)(COSMO Module) (White)
Switch (2) (Infrared I/O)(COSMO Module) (White)
Switch (3) (Infrared I/O)(COSMO Module) (White)
Switch (4) (Infrared I/O)(COSMO Module) (White)
Switch (1)(Infrared I/O)(Eight Free Module)
Switch (2)(Infrared I/O)(Eight Free Module)
Switch (3)(Infrared I/O)(Eight Free Module)
Switch (4)(Infrared I/O)(Eight Free Module)
Switch (8)(Infrared I/O)(Eight Free Module)
Switch (1)(Infrared I/O)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Switch (2)(Infrared I/O)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Switch (3)(Infrared I/O)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Switch (4)(Infrared I/O)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Dimmer Switch(Infrared I/O Type) (COSMO Module) (White)
Dimmer Switch(Infrared I/O Type)(FULL-COLOR Module)
Program Setting Unit(FULL-COLOR Module)
Master Switch (24)(Infrared I/O)
Master Switch (48)(Infrared I/O)
Master Switch (72)(Infrared I/O)
Master Switch (20)(Infrared I/O)(with Program Setting Unit)
Master Switch (44)(Infrared I/O)(with Program Setting Unit)
Master Switch (68)(Infrared I/O)(with Program Setting Unit)
Central Control and Programming Unit(24V AC)
Wireless Address Setting Unit
Wireless Programming Unit(With Address Setting Function)
LCD Appellation Touch Swich
25,52
25,52
25,54
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19,26,52
19,26
20,39
20
20
20
20
20
20
21,55
21,36
21,35
20,45
WRT1320-8
WRT13906-8
WRT1511K-8
WRT1514K-8
WRT1561K-8
WRT15919-8
WRT2050-80
WRT2645K-8
WRT2648-8
WRT3211-8
WRT3224-8
WRT3241-8
WRT33649-8
WRT3365K-8
WRT3367K-8
WRT33749-8
WRT3375K-8
WRT3394-8
WRT3395-8
WRT35409-8
WRT3655-8
WRT3657-8
WRT4014-8
WRT41249-8
WRT42444-8
WRT43415-82
Wireless Receiver (Ceiling and Flush Mount)
Master Wireless Switch Receiver (Infrared I/O)(Ceiling and Flush Mount)
Battery Type Wireless Switch (1)(Infrared I/O)
Battery Type Wireless Switch (4)(Infrared I/O)
Battery Type Wireless Dimmer Switch (Infrared I/O)
Master Wireless Switch
Transmission Unit(Panel Use) (100~242V AC)
Open Protocol Interface Unit(Type-M TCP/IP)(Panel Use)
Open Protocol Interface Unit(Type-M)(Panel Use)
Contact Input T/U (1-Input)(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
Contact Input T/U (4-Input)(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
Dimmer Contact Input T/U (1-Input)(Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit (Infrared I/O)(with Photosensor)(Wide Detection Area Type)
Auxiliary Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit (Wide Detection Area Type)
Auxiliary Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit (Wide Detection Area Type) (with Amplifier)
Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit (Infrared I/O)(with Photosensor)
Auxiliary Passive Infrared Ceiling Unit (Flush Mount)
Passive Infrared Sensor Switch (Infrared I/O) (Wall Mount) (with Photosensor)
Auxiliary Passive Infrared Sensor Switch (Wall Mount)
Program Timer Unit (Astronomical Clock Type, 24V AC)
Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit (with Separate Setting Unit)
Daylight Sensor Ceiling Unit
Relay Control T/U(4-Circuit) (Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
6A Contact Output T/U (Single Pole)(4-Circuit)(Infrared I/O Type)(Panel Use)
Dimmer Unit (0-10V DC)(4-Circuit)
Dimmer Unit for 1500W Incandescent Lamp (Infrared I/O)(Panel Use)
22,51
22
22
22,51
22
22
21
28,58
28,58
26,43
26,43
26,52
27,46
27,46,47
27,46,47
27,46,47
27,46
27
27
27,59
27,50
27,48
17,22
15,17,24
26,53
25,52
71 72
WRT5501WK-8
WRT5502WK-8
WRT5503WK-8
WRT5504WK-8
WRT5731WK-8
WRT5511-8
WRT5512-8
WRT5513-8
WRT5514-8
WRT5518-8
WRT5551K-8
WRT5552K-8
WRT5553K-8
WRT5554K-8
WRT5771K-8
WRV5601S1-8
WRV5602S1-8
WRV5603S1-8
WRV5604S1-8
WRV5831S1-8
WRT92619-8
WRT6120WK-8
WRT6144WK-8
WRT6168WK-8
WRT6024WK-8
WRT6048WK-8
WRT6072WK-8
WRT5850-8
WRT9600-8
WRT9500K-8
WRT9103K-89
WRT2050-80
WR3913K-80
WR2301-811
WR2311-851
WR6161K-8
WR61613K-8
WR6166-8
WR61663-8
WR6161K-84
WR61613K-84
WR6166-84
WR61663-84
WR6172K-84
WR61723K-84
WR3442-8
WR34169-8
WR3426K-8
WRT41249-8
WR3400-8
WR3440K-8
WR3430-8
WRT4014-8
WRT1320-8
WRT1511K-8
WRT1514K-8
WRT1561-8
WRT13906-8
WRT15919-8
WRT4345-82
WRT4348-82
WRT43415-82
WRT4741-82
WRT42444-8
WRT3241-8
WRT5731WK-8
WRT5771K-8
WRT33749-8
WRT33649-8
WRT3375K-8
WRT3365K-8
WRT3367K-8
WRT3394-8
WRT3395-8
WRT3655-8
WRT3657-8
WRT35409-8
WRT3224-8
WRT3211-8
WR39319-8
WR3891-8
WRT2645K-8
WRT2648-8
WR3900RK-8
WR3901RK-8
Product Name Model NumberProduct Name Model Number Remark Available itemAvailable item Remark
Switches (COSMO Module)
Switches (FULL-COLOR Module)
Switches (GLACIER Series)
Master Switches (Surface Mount)
Program Setting Unit
Wireless Programming Unit
Wireless Address Seting Unit
LCD Appellation Touch Switch
Central Control and Programming Unit
20A HID Relays
Relay Control T/Us (Panel Use)(DIP Switch)
6A Contact Output T/Us(Panel Use)(Infrared I/O)
Relay Control T/Us (Panel Use)(Infrared I/O)
Wireless Control
Dimmer Control
Passive Infrared Ceiling Units
Program Timer Unit
Datylight Sensor
Contact Input T/Us
Card Operation Switch
Appellation Indication Units
Signal Line Monitoring Unit
Modbus Interface Units
Switches (Eight Free Module)
: AvailableUL,CSA : Approved by UL,CSA.
: Not recommended but available. Please contact our sales companies for details.
10A Contact Output T/U
6A Contact Output T/Us(Panel Use)(DIP switch)
UL,CSA
UL,CSA
UL,CSA
UL,CSA
UL,CSA
UL,CSA
Transmission Units
Amplifiers
Transformers
Selecting Chart of Available Products for Each Market
73 74
WRT5501WK-8
WRT5502WK-8
WRT5503WK-8
WRT5504WK-8
WRT5731WK-8
WRT5511-8
WRT5512-8
WRT5513-8
WRT5514-8
WRT5518-8
WRT5551K-8
WRT5552K-8
WRT5553K-8
WRT5554K-8
WRT5771K-8
WRV5601S1-8
WRV5602S1-8
WRV5603S1-8
WRV5604S1-8
WRV5831S1-8
WRT92619-8
WRT6120WK-8
WRT6144WK-8
WRT6168WK-8
WRT6024WK-8
WRT6048WK-8
WRT6072WK-8
WRT5850-8
WRT9600-8
WRT9500K-8
WRT9103K-89
WRT2050-80
WR3913K-80
WR2301-811
WR2311-851
WR6161K-8
WR61613K-8
WR6166-8
WR61663-8
WR6161K-84
WR61613K-84
WR6166-84
WR61663-84
WR6172K-84
WR61723K-84
WR3442-8
WR34169-8
WR3426K-8
WRT41249-8
WR3400-8
WR3440K-8
WR3430-8
WRT4014-8
WRT1320-8
WRT1511K-8
WRT1514K-8
WRT1561-8
WRT13906-8
WRT15919-8
WRT4345-82
WRT4348-82
WRT43415-82
WRT4741-82
WRT42444-8
WRT3241-8
WRT5731WK-8
WRT5771K-8
WRT33749-8
WRT33649-8
WRT3375K-8
WRT3365K-8
WRT3367K-8
WRT3394-8
WRT3395-8
WRT3655-8
WRT3657-8
WRT35409-8
WRT3224-8
WRT3211-8
WR39319-8
WR3891-8
WRT2645K-8
WRT2648-8
WR3900RK-8
WR3901RK-8
Product Name Model NumberProduct Name Model Number Remark Available itemAvailable item Remark
Switches (COSMO Module)
Switches (FULL-COLOR Module)
Switches (GLACIER Series)
Master Switches (Surface Mount)
Program Setting Unit
Wireless Programming Unit
Wireless Address Seting Unit
LCD Appellation Touch Switch
Central Control and Programming Unit
20A HID Relays
Relay Control T/Us (Panel Use)(DIP Switch)
6A Contact Output T/Us(Panel Use)(Infrared I/O)
Relay Control T/Us (Panel Use)(Infrared I/O)
Wireless Control
Dimmer Control
Passive Infrared Ceiling Units
Program Timer Unit
Datylight Sensor
Contact Input T/Us
Card Operation Switch
Appellation Indication Units
Signal Line Monitoring Unit
Modbus Interface Units
Switches (Eight Free Module)
: AvailableUL,CSA : Approved by UL,CSA.
: Not recommended but available. Please contact our sales companies for details.
10A Contact Output T/U
6A Contact Output T/Us(Panel Use)(DIP switch)
UL,CSA
UL,CSA
UL,CSA
UL,CSA
UL,CSA
UL,CSA
Transmission Units
Amplifiers
Transformers
Selecting Chart of Available Products for Each Market
73 74
ECM3 032021-1ZF
Panasonic Corporation Life Solutions CompanyEnergy System Business Division, System Components Business Unit■ Head Office : 1048, Kadoma, Osaka 571-8686, Japan■ Telephone : +81-6-6906-0620 ■ Facsimile : +81-6-6904-4225
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Please contact
All Rights Reserved 2021 COPYRIGHT Panasonic Corporation
バック色彩(未)
2 0 2 1 -
FULL- 2WAYREMOTE LIGHTINGCONTROL SYSTEM
2021.2